Home

FWDU User Manual (Issue 2.2, 15.08.1999)

1. Zeal Data Sammi Window gt Server PI y Gsplayienter Database 2 gt en recordi 12 26 94 103 123 5 gt record2 33 5 44 2 123 5 record3 high low _ high Network Input Output Display Type Function A display type can have several optional features including e Multiple values Some display types can show a single value or a series of values e User entry Some display types referred to as enterable allow the Sammi user to change the current value s by entering new data these changes are written back to the source You can set whether a display type is view only or view and change e Runtime annotations Some display types use a quality word that when received from a data source makes them blink change color and or have a two character description code appended e Runtime keys You can set data source information as a generic variable then allow the user to substitute a specific value during runtime For more details on each of these features refer to the following sections Multiple values This feature is controlled by the height of the dynamic field in characters that you enter in the DFD Display panel see Chapter 6 and by the Number of Values that you specify in the Data Access Description panel see Chapter 8 The relationship between these two values controls how the data is displayed as explained below e If th
2. 2 Move the cursor to the top left corner inside the Drawing Area and click the mouse SELECT button to set the upper left corner of the facing plate 3 Move the cursor to the lower right corner of the Drawing Area 4 Click the mouse SELECT button when the box outline is large enough to encompass all the dynamic fields and text created so far fb bkgd Current Tempera Enter New Temperature Drawing the Facing Plate FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Learning the Format Editor 3 79 The box is drawn It does not need to be perfect at this point You will be able to realign the box later in this lesson 5 Select Save from the File menu in the Format Editor Control panel to save the format When you finish the above steps continue to the next procedure Part 4 Drawing the background objects This procedure explains how to create one of the screws shown in the sample format Before starting make sure you have successfully completed all previous parts of this lesson 1 Click the mouse SELECT button on the Circle by Diameter Tool button first row under Drawing Tools on the Format Editor Control panel OD t Sek Circle by Diameter Tool 2 Move the cursor to the Drawing Area and position it to the upper left corner of the previously drawn facing plate 3 Click the mouse SELECT button once Move the cu
3. pan fb bkgd p FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 Standard Command File APPENDIX C 381 Runtime Environment option menu file The following file is used to create the mouse OPTION button pop up option list for the Runtime Environment This file can be customized to include exclude menu selections for the Runtime Environment Note that this is a Standard Sammi file and that it will not work in the FWDU without modifications The name of the file is std_menu c M 1 ENU_TABLE Modify Layers standard_menu layer format_name Slocal win Zoom In Slocal cmd wee Zoom c z 200 Zoom Out Slocal cmd wee zoom c 2 507 Zoom Box Slocal cmd wee zoom b Full View Slocal cmd wee z 100 Zoom c a Reset Scale Slocal cmd wee Zoom c r Pan To Slocal cmd pan p ny y ny ny x 0 wy wy Y Menu table name Zoom in command Zoom out command Zoom box Full View g Reset Scale Pan Modify Layers Command yn md it is located in the SAMMI data directory FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 APPENDIX C 382 Standard Command File FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 aeenoixo Sample Runtime D 383 Annotations Table Index comparison method RTDA_TYPE
4. O O OO oO EXT value lookup text entry records entry format is value txt_string fg_color bg_color lt optional gt blink value is the minimum value in a range of values Data values are compared with text values The text is selected using the following comparison If value of record i lt data value lt value of record itl select text string from record i see below txt_string is the actual string to be displayed MUST be quoted fg_color is the foreground color bg_color is the background color blink is an optional keyword If present the text string will blink when it is displayed Unless blink is specified fg_color and bg_color can be any standard color H f blink is specified fg_color and bg_color can only be black white red green blue yellow cyan or magenta ntry records must be arranged so that the values associated with ie the text INCREASE from the first record to the last record 0 Fuel tank is empty red white blink ac Fuel is low yellow white blink 25 Fuel tank is less than half full orange white 50 Fuel tank is over half full blue white 95 Fuel tank is full blue white Here is how the value lookup works for this example file incoming valu selected text reason 0 50 Fuel tank is over half full 0 25 lt 0 50 lt 0 95 0 09 Fuel tank is empty 0 00 lt 0 09 lt 0 10 0 21 Fuel is low 0
5. Open Save Import Image Exit Save As Insert File Import Fmt Dismiss i Attributes 1 Select Open from the File menu on the Format Editor Control panel fb cmnd none CDU SYNOPTIC_MODE Read Write Edit View Composites Dynamic Fields Style Help Ujle s plz SIeimlel e Aele astral He A 1 a KESIZE KINESIX FWDU V3 Sammi 3 0 12 fb bkgd none 2 Enter an appropriate MDB Pathname of a FWDU_SYNOPTIC_DISPLAY type End Item and press OK 3 The FWDU_SYNOPTIC_DISPLAY type End Item appears in the Drawing Ar ea Part 2 Setting up the default drawing styles These procedures explain how to set up the default styles that will be used for drawing background objects later in this lesson Before starting make sure you have successfully completed Part 1 of this lesson FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 3 74 Learning the Format Editor Setting the line orientation To set the line orientation 1 Select Constraints from the Style menu on the Format Editor Control panel The Line Orientation panel appears No control Horizontal Diagonal unconstrained Vertical control control 2 Select the first button No control from the Line Orientation panel 3 Click the mouse SELECT button on the OK button to close the panel Setting the Snap Grid function To set the Snap and Grid spacing
6. fb gauge FE Gauge Gauge Display Gauge Color _ 7 Dial Color Fill Meter Yes ightsteelbluel Border Color REN Scale Color j Wide Scale No J show Ticks No Tick Incr s 0 HifLo Marks No Needle Color EEG 4 x aon Value Yes 1 Sy Decimal Dgt EE Min Value 0 00 Limits i ae T Max Value S Conv Factor WE x Data Type SL I Bx soc Label CS Label Color i i i i i Border Width BE Enter Border Style v Shadow In 4 Shadow Etched In v Shadow Out v Shadow Etched Out Reset Value Show High High NNT TTC Medium High EET No Low High 00 No High Low 09 No Medium Low No Low Low pO Pei Threshold Markers Color black black black black m a E Sime ba t Threshold Coloring Mode left Center Right FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 7 286 Display Types Entry Option Meter Gauge Color Fill Meter Gauge Dial Color Scale Color Wide Scale Meter Gauge Entries Description Enter a color for the outer body or select a color by clicking the mouse OPTION button in this box to display a list of choices Indicate whether to use the above color for a fill by clicking the mouse SELECT button in this box to toggle between Yes and No Either enter a dial background color or select a color by clicking the mouse OPTION button in this box to display a list of choices E
7. eceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 174 Sizing a NEW dynamic field esc cei 5 32s i vec acnsasencat cheese Gs gedeseed Oiteausieoeeeres 175 Resizing dynamic fields si cctec odeai Vel te reecec ccna e tenes dlawes code cheetouceteds 176 Creating on line Nel prs dex eras peer ctesetelexousccnereunein nocebeag eceectecas hex 178 Selecting a security level restricting ACCESS cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 178 DED NDGANGS ainan Get th cod ete Arta ch A a AES 179 Creating DFD libraries 24 4 5 cek kes Aa atie fa oc eee fue see 179 Using the DEB IDFA roenan eae lint EE EEA 179 Deleting DFD libraries cfecceseses a veek ee dicnaneevee a bleeds eee 181 General TG atures icra ices saves acs ed ea E sw cates beret AA AA AEE aes 183 Display Types 183 Multiple VAlUGS 158 oc hectic ect hee ad cata dale ends ace tatsundtubecteteganinite 186 SAIMIMISISSR SIRS sirisser innccescuvwed cusareveneuesayiaes 187 Runtime annotations 55 ss occu 05s etexecexeteos xgrile lt eveodypcandearecdodeasetinne 188 PRUNING KEYS acc cetccctetsecctcntt teste tector a al htiar Cocialads 190 Border styles sarietan el a ees a aba A at eal 191 Lookup tables and indexing cceesescceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeennees 191 Entering a Command waccss la ccctee ech ieedtdielith ines Dehecwevicl ehhdebbeteedeetesbhnese 195 Sammi CommandS seca cere a vstletieeeviny iw edeaeei Bede eneee 196 Onboard Predefined Commands cc0 c c cccsseseseeescne
8. 3 68 Learning the Format Editor Part 5 Creating a Meter Dynamic Field Definition DFD In this part you will add a second dynamic field to the testformat format This part is broken into several subparts to cover the three different panels that you must complete Before starting make sure you have successfully completed all previous parts of this lesson and that you have the test format format displayed in the Drawing Area 1 Select Display Palette from the Dynamic Fields menu on the Format Editor Control panel The Display Palette panel appears e 1 2 5 2 22 e m TEXT INTEGER REAL EQUATION 4A a 331 1 0 Ss FORMATTED 331 1 0 TIME ALARM NUMERIC TABULAR lt 7 METER GAUGE BAR BAR CHART Al 1AA fy te me O PLOT TREND CURVE SET _PIE CHART lt q p SCROLL si TOC BUTON BAR B N BUTT GROUP LISTS OPTIONS MENUS BROWSER 2 H mi FIX SCAIE MOVESCATE SRAPHIC SLIDER METER METER DATA FIELD eae v DYNAMIC SYMBOL OBJECT OBJECT TABLE ICON 4 gt 2 Click the mouse SELECT button on the Meter icon You may have to scroll through the Display Palette panel to see the Meter button The Meter Display and the Data Access Description panels appear 3 Move the cursor into the Drawing Area The cursor turns into a Meter icon attached to a DFD outline box 4 Move the Meter icon to the upper left s
9. FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 5 140 Drawing Methods 2 Click at the desired pivot point on the object group to create a mirrored image Remember Use the mouse SELECT button to flip or rotate the object while leaving the original object Use the mouse OPTION button to flip or rotate the object while removing the original object The object group is flipped or rotated from the pivot point If you are dissatisfied with the results use the Undo function immediately to reverse the operation Original Copy of Original Original original rotated Click SELECT Click OPTION Rotate Rotate with copy without copy NOTE Text of X bitmapped fonts subjected to this operation is mirrored but the text does not appear reversed or inverted Instead only the starting point of this type of text is adjusted by the flip and rotate operations Text of scalable vector fonts is mirrored Changing spline to line or line to spline Drawing Tools Toi Se Bel j 2 Spline to line Tool You can change any spline to a polyline and any polyline to a spline This option works only for multi segment lines polylines and splines drawn with the Spline Tool FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Drawing Methods CHAPTER 5 141 To convert splines to lines and vice versa 1 Click with the mouse SELECT but
10. eceeeeeeeees 396 Built in functions ecsc2 eins ecx4asc hbee ies chee blends tolasd loti ieelcuaten Bene ethos 396 Built in constants os ccs vie etceten eter wrtas vata cecetnsetotu weer Paellewcde odov vhabe wceenies 397 Statements and control NOW cies ecacsis den scetedianas cs Vocetandiinesandiavewsiaseaeeeds 397 Input and output and print 2 eee eee cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 398 User defined functions n c ceecnaie de ob ete bok Sie canter ia aiden degbet eee saebathe 398 Sample Bitmap Symbol File 399 Sample Dynamic Object Table 401 Sample Symbol Text Tables 403 Special amp International Characters 409 MDB SAMMI Types 419 POG RIGS a cecca aie Ate eek saan re abel cn lace ats 421 Internal Errors Log Files 421 Glossary 423 Index 427 FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 X Table of Contents FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 chapter Welcome to FWDU 1 11 Introduction to the FWDU The FWDU Flight Window Definition Utility is an interface design system for use with the Runtime Environment You can use the FWDU to create new on board interfaces or modify existing ones The FWDU consists of two tools e FWDU Format Editor for editing Synoptic Displays e FWDU Text Editor for editing text files used by the Format Editor FWDU Format Editor The FWDU Format Editor often just called the FWDU as this is the main tool is a mod
11. lt x scale gt The horizontal scaling factor A value of 100 maintains current scale lt y scale gt The vertical scaling factor A value of 100 maintains current scale lt x position gt The horizontal offset in pixels positive number right shift lt y position gt The vertical offset in pixels positive number downward shift WARNING The scaling factor in the Format Editor has a maximum limit of 5 000 percent There is no limit to the minimum size for scaling however if a format is scaled down and then scaled back objects in the format may not recover their original shape and or position Entering a number which causes the objects to shift outside the Drawing Area means you must resize the window to view the objects To shrink all objects to half 50 their current sizes you would enter the following command scale format 50 50 0 0 To double the vertical scale of the objects while retaining the same horizontal proportions you would enter the following command scale format 100 200 0 0 To shift all objects to the right by 20 pixels and up by 50 pixels without changing scale you would enter the following command scale format 100 100 20 50 FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Drawing Methods CHAPTER 5 147 Special effects and advanced methods Once you understand how to draw with the Format Editor you can use several advanced functions to improve
12. 3 Move the cursor and the attached bounding box to the location desired for the new dynamic field If the bounding box does not move with the cursor repeat step 2 4 When the bounding box reaches the desired location click again The bounding box should remain fixed at the desired location If you are in Production Editing Mode see Setting operational preferences section in this chapter you must click Save DFD to save the newly created DFD You can copy fields by repeating steps 2 3 and 4 or you can end the copy function by selecting another editing function FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 Dynamic Field Description CHAPTER 6 167 Entering dynamic field entries You can describe or modify the size position color and other attributes of a dynamic field by using the DFD Display panel shown here This panel appears when you use any of the three methods for creating a DFD and have set the Editing Mode to Production on the System Preferences panel as explained earlier in this chapter fb dfd DFD Display DFD Name a Display Type Data Access Type Refresh Rate z Refresh Type Poll Width Chr Pixels HZ Il Height Chr Pixels HE Location X Y EL EU Help File o Security Level o Option DFD ME cmnd No Enterable Yes Confirm Entry No Log Entries No RT Annotations No i Notify upon Select No FG Color lightsteelbluel BG Color Font cour
13. A vertical orientation causes the left and right margin for all buttons in a particular column to be forced to the same value the value is the largest margin specified for one of the buttons This keeps all text within each row or column aligned FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 253 General Action Button Grouping Display Entries continued Entry Option Description Packing Select how to pack the buttons contained within the General Action Button Grouping When the General Action Button Grouping packs the buttons it contains it determines its own major dimension using the value of Horizontal Orientation listed above None Indicates that no packing is performed The x and y coordinates of each button are left alone and the General Action Button Grouping attempts to become large enough to enclose all buttons Column Indicates that all buttons are made with identical sizes Sammi determines the size from the largest height and width values of the individual buttons and then lays them out in columns Tight Indicates that given the current major dimension for example vertical that is Horizontal Orientation is No buttons are placed one after the other until the General Action Button Grouping must wrap General Action Button Grouping wraps when there is no room left for a whole button in that row Wrapping occurs by beginning a new row or column in the next availa
14. Creating composites To create a composite to be used in several formats the Format Editor Control panel must be displayed on your screen and you must be logged in and editing a format either new or existing 1 Draw the static objects using the Format Editor Drawing Tools as explained earlier in this chapter 2 Using the methods described in Chapter 6 and 7 add any dynamic fields you want included in the composite 3 Group the static objects and dynamic fields together using the Group Tool FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 5 148 Drawing Methods 4 Select the Save Composite option from the Composites menu on the Format Editor Control panel The following message appears in the message line of the Format Editor Control panel Select the composite to save 5 Move the cursor in the Drawing Area and click the mouse SELECT button on the bounding box of the group The group is highlighted and the Save Composite dialog box appears 6 Either enter a new name for the composite you have just selected or select the name from the scrollable list of existing composites to overwrite 7 Click the mouse SELECT button on the OK button To save more composites repeat steps 4 through 6 Retrieving composites To read a composite into your format new or existing 1 From the Format Editor Control panel load your format in the Drawing Area with the Open option on the File m
15. Select List Display Entries Description Click the mouse SELECT button on one of the following options Static Define the list elements and commands using the Static Select List Item Command Entries panel that displays next when this type is chosen Standard Define a Standard List Table whose elements and commands are included in the command file See Appendix C for information on creating this table Dynamic An application sends the list elements and commands for this type Select the type of Select List by clicking the mouse SELECT button in this box to toggle between Single Only one choice is allowed Multiple Several choices are allowed User must click the mouse SELECT button on the OK button to indicate completion of choices Select whether or not this is to be a pop up list by clicking the mouse SELECT button in this box to toggle between Yes and No For a pop up list select whether or not the pop up grabs the input focus When the Select List grabs the focus the user must make a selection or click the mouse SELECT button on the Cancel button before any subsequent action can be taken Click the mouse SELECT button in this box to toggle between Yes and No If a Select List is used as an Option List inside a trigger DFD this list will always grab focus Enter a value for a time in seconds for the pop up list to remain visible without a selection being made before the list disappears A timeout
16. Threshold Reference The range of numbers included with each threshold is indicated by a band of color on the numeric scale Select the threshold reference by clicking the mouse SELECT button in this box below this field to select one of the following options Bottom The bands in this mode start at the thresholds and cover the range of numbers to the next highest threshold Middle The bands in this mode for the high low high medium and high high thresholds start at the thresholds and cover the range of numbers to the next highest threshold The bands for the low high low medium and low low thresholds start at the thresholds and cover the range of numbers to the next lowest threshold The band of color that covers the range of numbers between the low high and the high low thresholds is the DFD Foreground Color FWDU UM 114 002 ROV User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 303 Object Icon Sample Format sample_objicon With the Object Icon display type you can display a series of graphic images or symbols These images can be overlapped to give the illusion of a single object with moving parts For example the user might see a valve that opens and closes a switch that turns on or off or a spacecraft or aircraft that tracks across the screen To create motion with a piece of equipment make each graphic symbol nearly identical except for the moving item As incoming data causes different symbols to
17. X _Pathnane suport l 1 Path Write the Pathname to the End Item you want the format to be insert in You can also use the Pathname Support File Write the complete filesystem path to the file you want to insert 3 Click the mouse SELECT button on the OK button Modifying static background objects To modify static background objects Use the Drawing Tools buttons on the Format Editor Control panel to change static background objects as desired Most objects are changed by clicking on the appropriate tool button then clicking the locations in the Drawing Area where changes are required see Chapter 5 for more details Modifying dynamic fields DFDs To view or modify dynamic fields 1 Select the DFD Attrib option from the Edit menu on the Format Editor Control panel FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 2 48 Getting Started 2 Inthe Drawing Area move the cursor to the outline of the dynamic field DFD that you want to examine or modify and click on it with the mouse SELECT button The description panels for that DFD appear 3 After making desired modifications to any of the description panels for the dynamic field click on the Save DFD button at the bottom of the DFD Display panel Clicking on the Cancel DFD button will quit dynamic field editing without any modification to the DFD 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each dynamic field to be modified 5 Finish dynamic f
18. test file for dynamic objects table lookup The file format is an ascii file with a header line indicating the type of table table_lookup value_substitution where table_lookup lookup the data value in the table to find the corresponding attributes value_substitution use the data value as the attribute value each following line consists of 15 entries in the following sequence value fg clr bg clr blink fill style fill stipple index line style line dash index thickness x scale y scale x location y location rotate gravity fill level where value value to compare against data value float fg clr foreground color ascii dfefault v 0 gt n bg clr background color ascii dfefault v 0 gt n blink blink flag b link n oblink d efault v 0 gt n Unless blink is specified fg_clr and bg_clr can be standard color If blink is specified fg_clr and bg_clr can only be black white red green blue yellow cyan or magenta fill style Area fill style 0 2 3 d efault v 0 gt n O fill solid 2 fill stippled 3 f1i11 opaque stippled l no fill fill stipple index Area fill stipple index 0 gt max stipple d efault v 0 gt n line style Line drawing style 0 1 2 d efault v 0 gt n O solid 1l dash 2 double dash line dash index Line drawing dash index 0 gt max dash index dfefault v 0 gt n
19. 7 Display Mode Redisplay All Number of variables Enter Reset Axis Color black Title Trend Title Title Color midnightblue Backgnd Color lightsteelblue 3 Step Fraction 0 00 X Axis epee X Axis Title Title Color forestgreen Time Offset Span 0 Entry Option Show Tick amp Label Number of Variables Data Quality Trend Display Entries Description Click the mouse SELECT button on the button to the right of this field to toggle between Yes and No selecting whether to display tick marks labels and titles Display only the value for this field is calculated after you define the variables on the Line Chart Variables Display panel To access this panel click the mouse SELECT button on the Curve Definition button Use this field to allow certain runtime annotations blinking or color changing see the Runtime annotations section earlier in this chapter Click the mouse SELECT button on this button to toggle between Yes and No The API programmer must know this setting in order to provide the correct number of variables FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV User Manual 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 269 Entry Option X Axis Precision Graph Title Title Color Backgnd Color Grid Type Color Trend Display Entries continued Description Click
20. 7 232 Display Types Dynamic Object Entries continued Entry Option Description Number of Objects Calculated and displayed automatically based on the number of drawn objects enclosed in the dynamic field after you click the mouse SELECT button on the Enter button The value displayed in this field before you press the Enter button shows you how many objects are part of the Dynamic Object dynamic field before it is entered Data Type The type of data being used to drive the dynamic field Click the mouse SELECT button on one of the buttons to the right of this field to select one of the following options Short Long Float Double Table End Item End Item of type FWDU_DYNAMIC_OBJECT_TABLE_TEXT NOTE The Shift Right and Mask operations are performed only on Short and Long Data types FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 233 Equation Sample Format sample_eqn With the Equation display type you create a dynamic field that displays values which are derived from other dynamic fields based on an algorithm you create The diagram above shows an example Equation Dynamic Field 64 3 print fieldl 5 fielda f 12 0 4 3 Real Real Dynamic Field Dynamic Field field1 field2 How the Equation Display Type Works The Equation display type in this diagram uses the values from two other dynamic fields field1 and field2 to pr
21. FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV User Manual 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 259 Graphic Data Field Display Entries continued Entry Option Description X Bitmap Only Foreground Color For X bitmap data type either enter a color for the foreground or click the mouse OPTION button in the box below this label to display an option list Then click on the desired color name with the mouse SELECT button Background Color For an X bitmap data type either enter a color for the background or click the mouse OPTION button in the box below this label to display an option list Then click on the desired color name with the mouse SELECT button FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 7 260 Display Types Graphs Plot and Trend Sample Formats sample_plot sample_trend The Plot and Trend display types display graphs containing up to 256 simultaneous curves Both of these display types are virtually identical except for the type of data they handle Plot is used to compare sets of incoming data values to each other while Trend is used to examine the changes in data values over time Correspondingly Plot expects to receive sets of real numbers from an API data server while Trend expects to receive a long time number and corresponding real values A separate curve and y scale are shown for each existing y value provided the y scales are different There can be for example a plot of two
22. FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 2 28 Getting Started Creating a user friendly interface For maximum ease of use each format that you design for Sammi should present data so that it is simple to read and visually uncluttered When you have to present a lot of data there are two approaches that you might use e Creating multiple formats each presenting a different category or level of data The Format Editor lets you create as many different formats as desired to provide a multiple window interface For example you might start with a single format that presents a summary overview of the data see diagram below then tie other formats to it that present different levels of detail OVERVIEW or Main Menu page up down High Level Details page up down Low Level Details page forward back gt page forward back You can use push buttons paging or menus to link formats together in such a way that users can easily and intuitively work their way up down or across a series of data displays For example you might have a map of a region with transparent push buttons over each major city Clicking on a city calls up another window or series of windows with sales figures demographics shipment volumes or other information for
23. Meter Moving Scale Linear Sample Format sample_msl The Moving Scale Linear Meter display type is similar to the Fixed Scale Linear Meter display type the major difference is that the indicator arrow is stationary and centered in the Moving Scale Linear Meter while the tick marks and tick values on the numeric scale move Other differences from the Fixed Scale Linear Meter include e The visible range of the meter must be specified e There is no fill color for the slide area as the slide area color does not change as the thresholds are passed the way it does in a fixed scale linear meter e High and Low Indicators are not supported on the Moving scale Linear Meter display type as they would usually be hidden scrolled off the meter and therefore useless API information The FWDU_SERVER sends only the current value The limits and measurement End Item type are passed to the FWDU_SERVER at preview and the FWDU_SERVER sends data between max and min FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 7 298 Display Types Display type specifications Enter the following specifications as illustrated on the panel below T fb msl Moving Scale Linear Meter Display Moving Scale Linear Meter Display Enter Orientation Horizontal Reset cocky coor TEEI eset Indicator Color iF Border Color Border Width Ez Border Style v Shadow In x Shadow Etched In v Shadow Out
24. Pa 0 Default fill top down 16 Fill level If you wish to use the fill feature for a dynamic object this field expresses as a percentage how much to fill for a given value range The direction of fill is determined by the gravity see above FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 231 Display type specifications Enter the following specifications as illustrated on the panel below Entry Option Table Name Conv Factor Shift Right Mask Hex fb dobj FE Dynamic Object Display Dynamic Object Conversion Factor Shift Right Mask Hex ME Number of Objects JE Data Type Short v Hoat v Long v Double Table End Item SSMB TUP DYN_OBJECT_TABL Enter Reset End Item il Dynamic Object Entries Description Enter the filename of the lookup table without the dob j extension Enter the conversion code for incoming data see Appendix F for details For certain applications where you want to isolate specific bits in the data value enter the number of bits to shift right For more information see Appendix G Shifting and Masking For certain applications where you want to isolate specific bits in the data value enter the mask value to apply to the data value after shifting For more information see Appendix G Shifting and Masking FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999
25. index comparison f000000 00 000 00000 0 0000 f Each hexadecimal represents one of the possible attributes The number at the top of each column of fields is not part of the file but is used as a reference in the discussion at the bottom of the actual table of the function of each field 1 2 3 4 Be 6 7 8 9 10 0 r RED 7B UE r Al r EX r r r BLUE GREEN B2 r EX r r r 2 r GREEN GL OW pe3y EX r r 3 YELLOW MAGENTA D4 A EX F 4 r BLACK r r E r r EX r r r 5 WHITE r pl Oy r EX r r r 6 RED WHITE a NST op EX P 10 WHITE BLACK R O LEX KEY Col 1 Record row number Col 2 Foreground color for DFD and both characters fg_color and char_fg_color use field 2 although each has its own mask Col 3 Background color for DFD and both characters bg_color and char_bg_color use field 3 although each has its own mask Col 4 Blink noblink for DFD Although a comma for this field must be included in the rtda dat file it is ignored by the index comparison method Instead the incoming value is ANDed with the mask if the resulting value is 0 blinking is enabled if the value is not 0 blinking is not enabled Col 5 Character 1 and character 2 char_l and char_2 note that while this entry
26. Attributes of measurement End Items are sent to the FWDU_SERVER which will send data accordingly FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 3 54 Learning the Format Editor What you will learn The lessons in this chapter will lead you step by step through a number of procedures that teach the following elements of the Format Editor and the Runtime Environment Lesson 1 Building a format Part 1 Starting the FWDU Format Editor Part 2 Setting colors and fonts and adding text labels Part 3 Changing the font style Part 4 Creating a Real Dynamic Field Definition DFD Part 5 Creating a Meter Dynamic Field Definition DFD Lesson 2 Using Sammi to test the format Part 1 Testing the format Part 2 Changing the format and retesting Lesson 3 Modifying the format Part 1 Changing the format Part 2 Setting up default drawing styles Part 3 Drawing a border Part 4 Drawing background objects Part 5 Completing the background Though this list does not include everything you can possibly learn about the Format Editor and the Runtime Environment it does provide a comprehensive overview of most of the main features By following these lessons you learn quickly how to make a format work in the Runtime Environment FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Learning the Format Editor 3 55 Lesson 1 Building a
27. Getting Started 2 45 3 Move the cursor into the Drawing Area The cursor changes to an icon of the selected DFD with a bounding box for the DFD attached only if it is selected from the DFD Palette panel 4 Position the cursor in the desired location and click the mouse SELECT button The DFD Display panel for the selected dynamic field appears with preset values 5 Make any changes on the DFD Display panel that you want 6 Save each dynamic field by clicking on the Save DFD button at the bottom of the DFD Display panel NOTE You can continue creating DFDs of the same type by skipping step 2 above The DFD icon that you selected remains selected until you click the mouse SELECT button on it again or click on another icon 7 Repeat steps 2 3 4 and 5 for each dynamic field created 8 Toend the above process and remove the DFD Display panel click on the Cancel DFD button on the bottom of the DFD Display panel to close all the panels 9 To see a static view of the DFDs select the View DFDs option from the View menu 10 To see an animated preview of the DFDs as they will appear in the Run Time En vironment select the Preview option from the View menu Creating dynamic fields DFDs with the Add DFD option Another way to create a DFD is to 1 Select the Add DFD option from the Dynamic Fields menu 2 Move the cursor into the Drawing Area to display the DFD Display panel Use the mouse SELECT button to position a
28. If you choose to show the value enter a conversion code for incoming data see Appendix F for details Read only Data is automatically taken from measurement End Item when associating measurement End Item If you choose to show the value either enter a font for the value or select a color by clicking the mouse OPTION button in this box to display a list of choices Read only Data is automatically taken from measurement End Item when associating measurement End Item Data is Engineering Range Low Value Read only Data is automatically taken from measurement End Item when associating measurement End Item Data is Engineering Range High Value If a measurement End Item is attached you can choose from the measurement End Items nominal limit set range 1 5 by pressing Limits button The following window appears Le Limits_popup d FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV User Manual 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 295 Fixed Scale Linear Meter Entries continued Entry Option Increment Show Scale Values Scale Font Scale Decimal Digits Show Ticks Tick Color Hi Lo Marks Hi Lo Marks Color Label String Label Color Label Font Description Enter a value for the increments between the maximum and minimum scale values Select whether to display the scale values by clicking the mouse SELECT button in this box to toggle between Yes and No If you are showing the scale values
29. Other visual elements that appear as you work with the Format Editor are explained below Dialog boxes Occasionally the Format Editor presents a dialog box that calls your attention to a problem or requires you to take an immediate action For example Confirm data entry Make selections in a dialog box by moving the cursor to the desired response and clicking the mouse SELECT button FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Getting Started 2 43 Pop up option lists In some cases where the Format Editor requires information entry it provides a pop up option list showing all your available choices To view the list click on the entry field using the mouse OPTION button To select from the list click the mouse SELECT button on the desired selection to remove the option list without making a selection click the mouse SELECT button on the Cancel button You must make a selection or click the mouse SELECT button on the Cancel button before you can continue using the Format Editor Some pop up lists include an OK button on which you must click the mouse SELECT button after making your selection s page_up page_up A page down E page_down page_forward O page_forward page back y O page_back Cancel OK Cancel Scrollable List Box Radio Box Option List Option List Option List General guidelines for
30. Toggle The command sent reflects the state of the Object Icon display type that is each time the server sends the Object Icon a new value the state is set according to the value received If the value is zero the state is zero if the value is not zero the state is one When the user clicks the mouse SELECT button on the Object Icon when its state is zero the command defined for the On state is sent otherwise the command defined for the Off state is sent Multiple A selection list will pop up when the Object Icon is clicked on with the mouse SELECT button The user then makes selection s from the list If you chose a multiple select type enter the Selection List DFD name For a border width greater than zero either enter a border color or select the border color by clicking the mouse OPTION button in this box to display a list of choices Enter the integer number of pixels for a border thickness For a border width greater than zero select a border style by clicking the mouse SELECT button on one of the following options Shadow In Shadow Out Shadow Etched In Shadow Etched Out FWDU UM 114 002 ROV User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 307 Object Icon Display Entries continued Entry Option Description Label String optional Enter a string for the text label this may be up to 32 characters in length including new line characters You may format the label in as many lines as desired N
31. span 1 step For example with a span of 100 and a step of 0 5 200 points will be displayed For a span of 100 and a step of 0 8 125 points will be displayed Individual curve specifications Using the Line Chart Variables Display panel available from either the plot or trend display panel you can set variables for each individual curve API information The Sammi user can set some attributes of the Plot and Trend display types during runtime with the change dfd attributes command The command can be issued by a Sammi user on the command line of the Sammi Command window see the Command Reference This command can also be sent by an application FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 7 264 Display Types Plot display type specifications Enter the following specifications as illustrated on the panel below To enter information for individual curves click on the Curve Definition button For more information refer to the Line Chart Variables Display specifications section later in this chapter Plot Data Curve Definition Data Quality Yes Plot Displa R Title Plot Title Title Color midnightblue Backgnd Color lightsteelblue Grid Type No grid Xx nee Title Color black i Size X Major Minor Show Tick amp Label Yes k Y Major Minor N
32. you must enter a character Formats This file contains tables for the Standard Select List DFDs and Standard Menu DFDs Each table consists of one header record followed by one or more item entries Each item entry consist of three records NOTE All entries except the keyword LIST_TABLE or MENU_TABLE are enclosed in double quotes Header record LIST_TABLE or MENU_TABLE There can only be one header record LIST_TABLE or MENU_TABLE per FWDU_LIST_TEXT End Item FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 APPENDIX C 376 Standard Command File The formats for the item entry contain the same item command information as the Menu DFDs The formats for the item entry records are First record lt cascade level gt lt item string gt lt cascade level gt FOR MENU TABLE ONLY An integer value representing the Cascade Level of a menu item This required value should start at 1 increasing and subsequently decreasing for each level of a cascade menu a one level menu is valid An empty entry on the same level is used as a separator blank line between items on the same level lt item string gt The text as it appears in the format in the Standard Select List DFD or Standard Menu The maximum text length is 40 characters Second record lt logical srvr gt lt format name gt lt dfd name gt Y N lt logical srvr gt The name of the se
33. Each of these functions works by sending a simple string of text characters to the appropriate location and by loading its state and sensitive values in the API buffer The target location could be Sammi an application or a dynamic field in the same format or in other formats on the local remote workstation Sammi Window Start localhost emnd win CMD system rsh station2 start_sammi kR gt vir oie Ult lee in on cell aa Alene Mr Acer tucircticn Display station2 i r hate piay emndiwin CMD add window formati lt R gt a ae add window formati uUa Enter station2 formptt text1 Hello lt R gt Sammi_Window formati Hello Dynamic Field Text Workstation 1 Workstation 2 Network How Buttons Initiate Actions In the previous illustration a series of buttons is used to send different commands and text strings that start Sammi on a remote workstation display a Sammi window and enter data into a dynamic field Each function specifies a nodename format name and or dynamic field name along with a text string In most cases a special flag is included to execute the command just the way the user presses the RETURN key after entering a command Characteristics General Action Buttons e Are allowed in Button Groupings and Radio Boxes See the General Action Button Grouping section in this cha
34. FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 Welcome to the Format Editor 1 13 e Sammi End User The person for whom you are designing a user interface The Sammi end user will use your formats in the Runtime Environment to handle a real world application The Sammi end user is typically a person who understands the applica tion itself but not necessarily the technical aspects of computers and workstation envi ronments Therefore all of your planning and design should be carried out with the goal of making the end user interface as intuitive and user friendly as possible As part of the format design you or someone in your organization may have to create special end user documentation for the Sammi user e Sammi System Administrator The person who has installed the system and main tains security levels passwords etc The System Administrator is typically a person with a solid understanding of the workstation environment including setting up the X Window System who may be able to help you understand many of the technical aspects of Sammi e Sammi API Programmer The person who works with the Application Program ming Interface API to create data servers and applications that will feed data into and out of the Sammi user interfaces you design This person must be an experienced C language programmer but does not have to be an expert in networking or X Window System applications You will need
35. Shortest format Float or Exponential FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 7 236 Display Types Equation Symbols Functions and Constants Mathematical Operators in decreasing order of precedence A uf gt gt Built in Functions abs x atan x cos x exp x int x log x log10 x sin x sqrt x exponentiation FORTRAN right associative unary logical and arithmetic negation multiplication division addition subtraction greater greater or equal less less or equal equal not equal same precedence logical AND both operands always evaluated logical OR both operands always evaluated assignment right associative Ixl absolute value of x arc x arc tangent of x cos x cosine of x e exponential of x integer part of x truncated towards zero log x logarithm base e of x logio logarithm base 10 of x sin x sine of x Ax square root of x FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 237 Equation Symbols Functions and Constants continued Built in Constants DEG 180 7 degrees per radian E e base of natural logarithms GAMMA g Euler Mascheroni constant PHI V5 1 2 the golden ratio PI p ratio of circumference to diameter FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 7 238 Display Types Formatted Numeric Sample Format sample_fdat
36. Table lookup This method uses a single incoming data value to control the attributes of the dynamic object The first column in the table provides ranges to which the incoming value is compared In the example below an incoming data value of 25 which falls between 20 0 and 30 0 activates the display properties from the second row the one beginning with 20 0 The remaining values on each row control the relative position appearance and drawing characteristics of the dynamic object for that particular range of data an entry of d for default indicates the current attribute is not modified The numbers below the sample table are keys to the explanation of fields later in this section The numbers on the bottom row represent field numbers table_lookup 10 0 red green noblnk 0 0 0 3 0 dq d d ddd 0 20 0 blue green noblnk d d 1 1 2 a d ddd d25 30 0 green red blink ad od Q 1 4 125 125 ds sd vdb di 50 40 0 black blue blink 2 2 d d 6 80 80 d d e d 75 1 2 3 4 5 U6 af gwg LO dk TZE DA S16 The table must have the title table_lookup as the first non comment line Value substitution This method controls the effects of the dynamic object with a set of incoming data values Variables using v as a prefix are used to show which entries in the table are to be controlled by the data server Other values are the same as those defined for the table lookup method You can have up to 16 variables vO v15 The row selecting v
37. With the Group Tool you combine objects into a group so they can be manipulated as one For example instead of moving several objects one at a time you can group them and move them all at once You can group graphical objects created using the Format Editor Drawing Tools with dynamic objects DFDs but not with scanned objects Additionally you can store grouped objects as a composite and retrieve the composite in the other formats To group objects 1 Click on the Group Tool button on the Format Editor Control panel 2 Move the cursor to the Drawing Area and click with the mouse SELECT button at the upper left and lower right corners of the area that includes the objects you want to group This is similar to using the Box Tool A grouping box encloses the group With the Preference option from the Edit menu you can select one of two possible ways for enclosing objects Containment Includes only those objects whose outlines are completely inside the grouping box The box usually shrinks Intersection Includes all objects whose outlines are inside or intersected by the grouping box The box usually expands FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 5 132 Drawing Methods NOTE The grouping box is not a physical object it appears only for grouping purposes During operations that involve groups all groups are shown with their grouping boxes during other operations grouping b
38. You can create a single line Browser with no scroll bars buttons etc that will send its data when the Return key is pressed choose Single for the Line Display option and No for the Scroll Bars option If you allow scroll bars then you must add a Write button to the DFD If you select pop up enter a time in seconds for the pop up to remain on the screen before it disappears Entering zero means no timeout this requires the user to click on the Cancel button to close the pop up Text Browser window If you want a label for this browser enter the text string here You may format the string in as many lines as desired New lines are specified by entering n anywhere in the text n when found is interpreted as a new line and does not print A double backslash n n is printed as n Spacing and margins for the string is specified as part of the string For example if you want a margin of 1 character on the top bottom and sides of the string with a two linestring you would enter n first line of text n second line of text n If you enter a label either enter a font for the label or click the mouse OPTION button in this box to display a list of choices If you enter a label either enter a color or click the mouse OPTION button in this box to display a list of choices Enter an integer for the number of pixels used for the border width a zero means no border FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2
39. center of the previous display is the center of the new display Zoom Box Lets you use a box outline to select an area to zoom on the current display with a box outline Once you draw the box the area inside of it is scaled and panned so that the contents of the box fill the Draw ing Area To draw the box click the mouse SELECT button in the Drawing Area where you want the upper left corner of the box to start move the cursor down and to the right until the box encompasses the area that you want to zoom and click the mouse SELECT button again Full View Rescales the format so that the entire for mat fits in the Drawing Area Reset Initial Rescales the format to its initial size Reset Maximum Rescales the Drawing Area to its maxi mum size Pan To Lets you select the center point for pan ning Remove All Removes everything on the active layer The second way to zoom the Drawing Area is 1 In the Format Editor Control panel command line enter the command add window zoom 2 When the Zoom Format window appears move it to an unused area of your display using the procedure described earlier in the section Moving panels 3 Enter fb bkgad in the Format Name field of the Zoom Format window The Zoompad on the Zoom Format window resizes to the size of the Drawing Ar ea FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Getting Started 2 41 Click the mouse SELECT button on one of the r
40. either enter a font for the values on the scale or select a font by clicking the mouse OPTION button in this box to display a list of choices If you are showing the scale values enter the number of digits to display after the decimal point for the values on the scale Select whether to display tick marks on the scale by clicking the mouse SELECT button in this box to toggle between Yes and No If displaying tick marks either enter a color or select a color by clicking the mouse OPTION button in this box to display a list of choices Select whether to display High and Low marks on the scale by clicking the mouse SELECT button in this box to toggle between Yes and No If displaying High and Low marks either enter a color or select a color by clicking the mouse OPTION button in this box to display a list of choices If you want a label for this meter enter the single line text string here If you enter a label either enter a color or select a color by clicking the mouse OPTION button in this box to display a list of choices If you enter a label either enter a font for the label or select a font by clicking the mouse OPTION button in this box to display a list of choices FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 7 296 Display Types Fixed Scale Linear Meter Entries continued Entry Option Description For each threshold that you want to use enter the following informati
41. s Guide This manual explains the installation of Sammi system setup control of system processes administrative commands and utility functions typically your System Administrator will perform these functions e Command Reference This manual lists all commands required for operating the Sammi system Application Programming Interface API Guide This manual explains how C language programmers can use the optional Applications Programming Interface API to create their own applications for exchanging data between customer developed software and Sammi A supplemental manual the Contributed Software Guide introduces a sample database and data server that can be used to provide test data for Sammi windows designed using the Format Editor Most of these manuals are available at any site where Sammi is installed If they are not please contact Kinesix for information at 713 953 8300 FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 cuaptern2 Getting Started 2 21 This chapter explains how to get started using the FWDU Format Editor sometimes simply called the FWDU and other times Format Editor depending on the context including how to e Plan the interface design e Start and stop the FWDU Format Editor e Use the mouse and windows with the FWDU Format Editor and e Create view modify copy and delete formats Before reading this chapter you should understand the basic concepts and termin
42. thickness Line thickness 0 gt max thickness d efault v 0 gt n x scale x scaling factor in percent int d efault v 0 gt n y scale y scaling factor in percent int d efault v 0 gt n x location x pixel location factor int dfefault v O gt n y location y pixel location factor int d efault v 0 gt n rotate rotation angle in degrees 64 int d efault v O gt n gravity scale and rotate gravity 0 gt 9 d efault v 0 gt n O default 1 NorthWest 2 North 3 NorthEast 4 West 5 Center 6 East 7 SouthWest 8 South 9 SouthEast fill level percentage of how much to fill object for a given value range FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 APPENDIX K 402 Sample Dynamic Object Table table_lookup 1 0 white black blink 0 0 0 0 10 a d dd d dd 2 0 red blue nobln 0 0 0 0 1 d d dd d dd 3 0 green red blink 0 0 hea TO lt a d dd d dd 4 0 blue green nobln 0 0 12 1 d 6 d a d dd 5 0 cyan green blink 0 0 1 3 10 d d dd d dd 6 0 magenta black nobin 21 12 3 d d dd d dd 7 0 yellow d blink 22 T2 3 d d dd d d d 8 0 aquaramarine d blink 23 1 2 3 d d dd d dd 9 0 MediumAquamarine d noblink 0 0 2 T 10 d d dd d da d 1 turquoise d blink 0 0 2732 10 a d dd d dd test file for dynamic objects value substituion fill style value_substitution 4 0 green d noblnk v0 2 dd ddd dd d d 0 5 0 red d noblink O22 dd d dd dd d d 20 6 0 red d nobl
43. 01 p m on July 6 1995 15 01 23 7 6 95 OPENTRY FROM SANDIA OLD 12 NEW 15 e Alarms These are groups of data generated by external applications that are sent to Sammi via an API application when some process has a problem The alarm message typically indicates what happened to cause the alarm For example the following message might appear if the temperature in a boiler exceeds safe limits 07 23 32 12 25 90 TEMPERATURE EXCEEDED AT UNIT 5 Alarms are classified in various ways for specifics please refer to Chapter 4 Using Alarms and Events of the System Administrator s Guide These classifications can be used to filter alarm messages so that only those in the desired classifications are shown e g all active alarms all unacknowledged alarms etc The Sammi user can control this filtering directly using the alarm filter keys on the Sammi Alarm Menu The user can display messages for a given range of dates and choose whether they appear in chronological or reverse order The user can also silence alarms by entering the Sammi alarm silence command or by pushing a special button that you create in the Format Editor see General Action Buttons later in this chapter Alarm messages are generated automatically by the system based on templates contained in the alarm format file named alm_format dat This file is supplied with Sammi and can be edited using any ASCII text editor Alarm colours are defin
44. 2 Dynamic Field Description CHAPTER 6 153 Edit Menu Selections continued Option Action Layer Display the Layer Display panel Preferences Set operational preferences Delete Delete an existing DFD or static object from the format Dynamic Fields Menu Selections Option Action Display Palette Display a palette of push buttons from which you can select pre defined dynamic fields Read DFD Lib Read a FWDU_LIBRARY_BINARY from the MDB When the Read_Lib_popup appears enter the com plete Pathname Save DFD Lib Write a FWDU_LIBRARY_BINARY in the MDB When the Save_Lib_popup appears enter the complete Pathname Add DFD Create a dynamic field deferring type and attribute specification until after you place and size the new dynamic field on the format Each of these functions is initiated by selecting the appropriate menu then selecting the appropriate option from the resulting pull down menu Procedures for performing each function are discussed on the following pages These procedures cover only the basic aspects of dynamic fields More information about entering specific details is included later in this chapter and in Chapters 7 and 8 As with graphical objects DFDs that are part of a group or composite may not be edited moved copied etc The group or composite first must be separated into individual objects using the Ungroup Tool under the Drawing Tools section of the Format Editor Control
45. 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 APPENDIX C 380 Standard Command File Format Editor option menu file The following file is used to create the mouse OPTION button pop up option list for the Drawing Area of the Format Editor This file can be customized to include exclude menu selections for the Drawing Area Note that this is a Standard Sammi file and that it will not work in the FWDU without modifications The name of the file is fe_std_menu cmd itislocatedina Sammi data directory as specified by SAM2_DATAF ILE either in your environment or in the start_sammi script MENU_TABLE fe_std_menu Menu table name 1 Undo Undo Command Slocal cmd Woe woe wy et fe objects undo Redisplay Redisplay command Slocal cmd Wwe woe Tym fe objects redisplay Remove All Remove All Command Slocal cmd wee woe Wye fe objects delete all fe objects redisplay Zoom In Zoom in command Slocal cmd wee woe my Zoom fb bkgd z 200 Zoom Out Zoom out command Slocal cmd Woe woe MyM zoom fb bkgd z 50 Zoom Box Zoom box Slocal cmd Woe Woe mym zoom fb bkgd b Full View Full View Slocal cmd Wwe Woe wym zoom fb bkgd a z 100 x 0 y 0 Reset Initial Reset Slocal cmd Wwe Wwe y zoom fb bkgd r Reset Maximum Reset Maximum Slocal cmd Wee woe mym zoom fb bkgd r m Pan To Pan Slocal cmd Wwe Woe TyM
46. 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 3 66 Learning the Format Editor Attaching MDB End Items as Data Sources NOTE In the FWDU the Data Access Description Panel sets up a communication link between FWDU_SERVER started automatically at preview and the SAMMI Runtime Environment This is done implicitly without need for user interac tion This can be done because the end data server is known and well defined Now move the cursor to the Data Access Description panel fb uni FE Universal Keys Data Access Description Read Keys Write Keys Number of Values RE Key Type EL Data Access End Item SSMB ROV2 SETUP INT MEAS 001 Enter Reset The FWDU does not use read keys nor write keys Instead it uses a read only field Data Access End Item to record attachment of MDB measurement End Items End Item Ese 1 Press the End Item button The following window appears end item_popup rs X Potman swore canet l al 2 The MDB Pathname is prefixed with a best guess Current CCU CDU Complete the Pathname a measurement End Item As a help you could use Pathname Support instead 3 Press OK button As a result the Data Access End Item field is filled with the specified End Item When attaching an End Item the existence of the End Item is verified Only End Items in the current scope CCU CDU can be attached If the End Item is found the type of the End FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Is
47. By radius The first point defines the center of the object the second point defines the circumference e By diameter The first point defines one point on the circumference of the object the second point defines a point on the circumference opposite the first point Circle by Circle by radius diameter Drawing a Circle FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Drawing Methods CHAPTER 5 123 To draw a circle 1 Click on either the Circle Tool by Radius or Circle Tool by Diameter button 2 Click on two points in the Drawing Area Sfb bkgd to describe the size and location of the object as shown by the numbers in the illustration above A rubberband outline appears after the first click to let you visually size the object After the second click the object is drawn automatically using the default colors line and fill styles To draw an ellipse 1 Click on either the Ellipse Tool by Radius or Ellipse Tool by Diameter button 2 Click on two points in the Drawing Area fb bkgd to describe the size and location of the object as shown by the numbers in the illustration above A rubberband outline appears after the first click to let you visually size the object After the second click the object is drawn using the default colors line and fill styles To change the object s color line style or fill style see Recoloring objects later in this chapter Splines open closed
48. DED Palette 38 DED palette 105 Dialog boxes 42 Direct index 194 Display methods and types 23 Display Palette 68 153 157 160 Display Type 168 display type 17 Double 199 Double buffering 261 Drawing Area 16 30 39 Drawing Area zooming 39 drawing order 105 drawing sequence 130 Drawing Tools 16 35 60 Dynamic components 16 dynamic field 17 Dynamic Field Definition 17 Dynamic Field Description 151 dynamic field display 103 dynamic field entries entering 167 dynamic field adding 157 dynamic field sizing 175 Dynamic Fields menu 152 Dynamic Fields Add DFD 38 dynamic fields copying 166 dynamic fields deleting 164 Dynamic Fields Display Palette 38 Dynamic fields modifying 47 dynamic fields moving 165 Dynamic Fields Read DFD Library 38 dynamic fields resizing 134 176 Dynamic Fields Save DFD Library 38 Dynamic fields viewing 49 Dynamic menu 282 Dynamic Menus 355 Dynamic Object 16 23 185 Dynamic Object tables 226 Dynamic Objects 17 25 225 dynamic objects creating 147 Dynamic Select List 330 Dynamic Text Browser 346 E Edit menu 152 Edit Copy 37 Edit Delete 37 Edit DFD Attributes 37 Edit Layers 37 Edit Move 37 Edit Preferences 37 Edit Resize 37 Edit Static Attributes 37 Edit Undo 37 Editing mode 155 Ellipses 104 End User 13 Enterable 64 169 187 Entry confirmation 27 187 Equation 24 25 184 185 233 Equations 17 355 Eraser Tool 81 82 137 164 Event logging 188 F File C
49. GIF XWD XBM Transparent Enter a string for the button s text label this may be up to 63 characters in length including new line characters n You may format the label in as many lines as desired New lines are specified by entering n anywhere in the text label n when found is interpreted as a new line and does not print Double backslash n n is printed as n Spacing and margins for the labels are specified as part of the label text For example if you want a margin of 1 character on the top bottom and sides of the button label with a two line label you would specify the label text as n first line of text n second line of text n FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 247 General Action Button GAB Display Entries continued Entry Option Description Button Label Selected When you select the Toggle Button W O Indicator you can have two labels one for the button when it is in an unselected state a raised three dimensional button if the value in Shadow Thickness is greater than zero and the other for the button when it is in a selected state a pressed three dimensional button if the value in Shadow Thickness is greater than zero If you leave this field blank the button will have only one label the button label from the Button Label field no matter which state the button is in Shadow Thickness If the value in this field is greater tha
50. Notes Color Notes Font Besar nacs Passer nen aaae yas Gases ae Legend bg Color Enter Reset Dismiss J Pie Chart Legend Display Entries Entry Option Description Title String Enter a string for the title this can be up to 32 characters in length including new line characters You can format the title in as many lines as desired New lines are specified by entering n anywhere in the text label n when found is interpreted as a new line and does not print A double backslash n n is printed as n Spacing and margins for the title are specified as part of the text For example if you want a margin of 1 character on the top bottom and sides of the label with a two line title you would enter FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 319 Title Color Entry Option Title Font Show Patch Show Variables Variables Font Show Value Display Type Units Digitals Font Decimal Digits n first line of text n second line of text n Either enter a color for the legend title string or click the mouse OPTION button in this box to display a list of choices Pie Chart Legend Display Entries continued Description Either enter a font for the legend title string or click the mouse OPTION button in this box to display a list of choices Select whether a patch of color texture for each variable appears on the legend by clicking the mouse SELE
51. S 15 August 1999 Dynamic Field Description CHAPTER 6 177 3 Point to the DFD that you want to resize and click the mouse SELECT button The DFD becomes a solid area with handles small boxes on each corner To resize in one direction click the mouse SELECT button on a side top bottom left right of the outline The cursor changes to a cross and a rubber band box with three sides anchored appears To resize a dynamic field in two directions click the mouse SELECT button on one of the handles The cursor changes to a cross and a rubber band box appears anchored on the diagonally opposite corner 4 Use the rubber band box to assist you in sizing the dynamic field when you have the desired size click the mouse SELECT button again To shrink a rubber band box move the cursor toward the center of the box To expand the rubber band box move the cursor away from the center of the box NOTE If the DFD Display panel is on your screen notice that the Width and Height fields change as you resize the dynamic field 5 To save the new DFD size click the mouse SELECT button on the Save DFD button of the DFD Display panel NOTE The DFD Display panel does not display if you have selected the Design Editing Mode on the System Preferences panel and the above step is unnecessary If you are dissatisfied with the results use the Undo function immediately to reverse the operation FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue
52. Shadow Etched Out Show Value Yes Background Color Foreground Color lightsteelbluel Decimal Digits Hz Conv Factor E Data Type Font courier bold 12 pt Scale Minimum 300 00 Limits Scale Maximum 300 00 Visible Range Increment Show Scale Values Yes Scale Font Scale Decimal Digits HE Show Ticks Yes Tick Color Label String EE ae Label Color Label Font Threshold mean Value Show Threshold Threshold Color Reference High High B VRS Middle Medium High Yes Low High j No High Low n Medium Low MEE ves Low low E ea FWDU UM 114 002 ROV User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 299 Entry Option Orientation Background Color Indicator Color Border Color Border Width Border Style Show Value Background Color Foreground Color Moving Scale Linear Meter Entries Description Set the orientation of the meter by clicking the mouse SELECT button in this box to toggle between Vertical and Horizontal Either enter a color for the background or select a color by clicking the mouse OPTION button in this box to display a list of options Either enter a color for the indicator or select a color by clicking the mouse OPTION button in this box to display a list of options For a border width greater than zero either enter a border color or select a color by clicking the mouse OPTION button in this box to display a list of options Enter an integer for th
53. Top Right il Yes Float ry Slider Display Entries Entry Option Description Orientation Set the orientation of the slider track by clicking the mouse SELECT button in this box to toggle between Vertical or Horizontal Max Direction By default the maximum value of the Slider is located to the right of a horizontally oriented or on top of a vertically oriented slider you can invert this location Click the mouse SELECT button in this box to toggle between a Top Right and Bottom Left placement Label Name optional If you want a label for this slider enter the text string here Shadow Width Enter the width in pixels for a shadow border with a three dimensional effect Show Value Select whether the incoming data value should be FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 7 338 Display Types Decimal Digits Increment Rate Min Value Max Value Conv Factor Min Value Max Value Data Type Pop up Timeout secs Grab Focus displayed near the slider by clicking the mouse SELECT button in this box to toggle between Yes and No If Yes was selected for Show Value enter the number of digits to be included to the right of the decimal point in the displayed value for real numbers only Enter a value a multiple of which the slider moves when a user clicks above or below the slider in the track area The user can also drag the slider by pointing to the slider itself a
54. UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Drawing Methods CHAPTER 5 143 Modifying a single attribute You can also modify objects by changing one or more display attributes without changing all the object s defaults by using Format Editor commands or selections from the Style menu of the Format Editor Control panel To modify a single attribute of an object 1 Set the attributes Color Font Line Style and Fill Style exactly as you want it to be applied to the object being changed 2 Select the Static Attrib option from the Edit menu on the Format Editor Control panel 3 From the resulting cascading menu select the attribute you are changing Your options are Color Line Style Fill Style Font or All Attributes 4 Move the cursor to the Drawing Area and click the mouse SELECT button on the object to effect the change Repeat this step for any other object that you want to change NOTE Be aware that when you select a single attribute this is the only attribute that will be used in subsequent Recolor operations until you change the selected attribute or select the All Attributes function FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 5 144 Drawing Methods Modifying several attributes To modify several attributes of an object in one operation 1 Set the attributes colors fonts line styles and fill styles exactly as you want them to be applied to
55. Uppercase eth D f OxD1 N with tilde N 0xD2 O with grave O om accent roy OxD3 O with acute Vy O accent 6 0xD4 O with O o circumflex 6 accent OxD5 O with tilde oO 6 OxD6 O with diaresis O 0xD7 multiplication x x sign x Capen A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 Special amp International Characters APPENDIX M 415 Second ar character amp Resultin Hex value Description First character Pay 8 third if character needed 0xD8 O with slash P O g 0xD9 U with grave U on accent n cc mt 0OxDA U with acute aN UV accent cce igs 0xDB U with UV SA circumflex accent 0xDC U with diaresis lt UV wy 0xDD Y with acute y Y accent A OxDE Upper case H or T or thorn p l 0OxDF German g g double s g OxEO a with grave S a accent OxE1 a with acute y a accent 43 a OxE2 a with eas a circumflex a accent erae A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 APPENDIX M 416 Special amp International Characters Second Tr character amp Resultin Hex value Description First character ee 8 third if character needed 0xE3 a with tilde a a A OxE4 a with eae a diaresis a OxES
56. User Manual 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 349 Text Browser Data Input Output Field Display Entries continued Entry Option Border Style Border Color Scroll Bars Scrollbar Color Automatic Scrolling Description For a border width greater than zero select a border style by clicking the mouse SELECT button on one of the following buttons Shadow In Shadow Out Shadow Etched In Shadow Etched Out For a border width greater than zero either enter a border color or click the mouse OPTION button in this box to display a list of choices You can optionally select to use scroll bars Click the mouse SELECT button in this box to toggle between Yes and No Either enter a color for the scrollbar or click the mouse OPTION button in this box to display a list of choices This option controls whether or not the Text Browser scrolls as you enter data beyond the width or length of the Browser s text area When data updates occur the Browser maintains the position of text and does not scroll back to the top however if Automatic Scrolling is enabled the Browser will blink when updated Click the mouse SELECT button in this box to toggle between Yes and No NOTE The following entries are used only if you add the optional buttons Buttons Label Font Buttons Label Color Buttons Button Color Write Button Either enter a font for the labels or click the mouse OPTION button in this box to display a list of c
57. User Symbol Address Codes Name DASA RIO62 Ralf Zimmermann ROVSING A S Poul Erik Holmdahl ROVSING A S Nazzareno Straccia ROVSING A S Project Library This document and the subjects described in it are copyrighted with all rights reserved Under the copyright laws the documentation may not be copied photocopied reproduced translated or summarised to any electronic medium or machine readable form in whole or in part without written consent of ROVSING International A S Copyright 1999 ROVSING A S Dyregardsvej 2 DK 2740 Skovlunde Denmark FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 DOCUMENT CHANGE LOG Date iv Modified Sections Reason For Change 14 November 1996 28 March 1999 15 August 1999 FWDU ROVSING A S All All UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 First Issue based on FrameMaker DN 114 002 UM 010 DN 114 002 UM 011 COL RIBRE SPR 5250 CCN 2 and CCN 3 IRN 8010 1 A SPR 5973 SPR 6009 footer has been updated User Manual 15 August 1999 Table of Contents l Table of Contents introd c tionito the FWDU a aaaeei al etka aaaea a ENEA des curate ty 11 FWDU Format Editor ssessneeesesseeeeeeeesnrenseserrnrnnssertnnnnenserrnnnnnnreere nnn 11 Welcome to FWDU 11 FWDU TEX E dITON mazisi sacs cetiendstvciierntendtc tuts aaO EEE En Ea EREKE REE EEE 12 Tools Interacting with the FWDU ccccceeeesecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeees 12 Who c
58. Y Scrollbar name Description Background Size Image In later chapters we will discuss adding dynamic fields and data access to the basic format FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 4 86 Format amp Layer Description Entering a format description You can describe or modify the size position color and other attributes of a Sammi window by using the Format Description panel shown below After opening a format either with the New or Open option from the File menu display the Format Description panel with the Attributes option of the File menu Now change any of the preset values by clicking on the field and typing in the appropriate text and or values ofa fb vbdesc y Format Description Name Description App Name Creation Date JERE WM Class Refresh Rate HIT Logical Server ME Security Level MET Change Date pS Help Fic mes End Item Window Control Window Background X Location HEE Y Location EGI Color Width eee init KE max ST cur 50 aoe End Item Ss Height init EE max EE cur EUS Color Scale Factor Type Decoration Yes Lachey Oo Nolmage GIFF Image Grab Focus no V o Bitmap v XWD Image Paging ih End item item Paniai Ene itom Up Down A ttem ees m me Em item sO End iam Reset Press the RETURN key or click the mouse SELECT button on the OK bu
59. a with ring a a vt OxE6 ae dipthong a e e OxE7 c with cedilla K Cc i OxE8 e with grave ms e accent aa e OxE9 e with acute y e accent rr e OxEA e with eS e circumflex 6 accent OxEB e with Pepe e diareses iis e OxEC i with grave s T accent 7 OxED i y P with acute 7 accent Lena A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 Special amp International Characters APPENDIX M 417 Second TE character amp Resultin Hex value Description First character Pay 8 third if character needed OxEE i with TNE at circumflex i accent OxEF i with ses aie diaresis ip OxFO Lower case eth a T OxF1 n with tilde n a Kak OxF2 o with grave me oO accent ans e OxF3 o with acute N o accent ss OxF4 o with dN oO circumflex 6 accent OxF5 o with tilde oO a O OxF6 o with re oO diaresis 6 OxF7 division sign o s OxF8 o with slash P o y raie A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 APPENDIX M 418 Special amp International Characters Second TE character amp Resultin Hex value Description First character ee 8 third if character needed OxF9 u with grave di Ww accent ass u OxFA u with acute y Ww accent i OxFB u with As Ww circumflex a accent OxFC u wi
60. appear when the DFD is placed in the format it is saved FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Dynamic Field Description CHAPTER 6 181 5 To continue adding the same DFD Library file in different locations on the same format click the mouse SELECT button and the bounding box reappears Repeat step 5 Deleting DFD libraries To delete a DFD Library use the I_MDB FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 6 182 Dynamic Field Description FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 cuaptern7 Display Types 7 183 General features As part of the dynamic field description entered on the DFD Display panel in the previous chapter you selected a display type that controls how the dynamic field looks and works in Sammi This chapter provides more detail on the function of each display type and how to enter specifications for it like the Meter shown in the illustration below Formati Dial Color Scale Color Width Marks Needle Color Body Color Fill Label Color Text Value Display min max conversion factor type Typical Display Type Some display types like Bar Barchart Linear Meters Meter and Gauge use the last value received to set the current position of an indicator on a scale Except for the Moving Scale Linear Meter these display types can also optionally show
61. associated with the initial format are changed to the values for the respective session FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manua 15 August 19991 Data Access Types CHAPTER 8 363 To use the Session Manager enter the following command in the Sammi Command Line add window session The Session Format Manager is displayed enter the following specifications as illustrated below When done click the mouse SELECT button on OK or press the Return key Session Manager Session Name generic_session 3 Delete Session Session Type Transient No of Formats Permanent Attached BF Key Value A lt lt S 5 OK Delete Key Undo Last Dismiss Session Manager Entries Entry Option Description Session Name Name of the current session A new session can also be created by entering the name in the field Session List Displays all currently available sessions To select a new session click on the name of the desired session on this list the name will be placed in the Session Name field Session Type Displays the type transient or permanent of the current session The user may change the session type by clicking the desired type and then pressing the OK button FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 8 364 Data Access Types Session Manager Entries continued Entry Option Descript
62. bar fill is colored Click the mouse SELECT button on the buttons to the right of this field to select from these options Default The default fill color fills the bar regardless of the threshold Dynamic The whole bar color changes to the threshold color when a threshold is reached Multiple Only the part of the bar beyond a threshold changes to that threshold color Threshold Ref Action of the bar color at the thresholds Click the mouse SELECT button on the buttons to the right of this field to toggle between the following options Bottom When a threshold is exceeded the bar color changes to that of the threshold Middle When the value reaches or exceeds the high low high medium high high or the value drops below the low high low medium or the low low the bar color changes to that of the threshold The bar is the DFD Foreground Color when the value is between the low high and the high low thresholds Label Enter a label for each threshold If you enter the environment variable CUR LIMIT the current threshold value displays as the label at runtime Show The Max and Min values are read only always Yes Value Max and min are read only The six Data values are automatic taken from the first entered measurement End Item when associating measurement End Items The six values are Danger Limits High Value Nominal Limit High Value Nominal Limit High Value Nominal Limit High Value Nominal Limit Low Value D
63. be selected or No which means the initial state of the button will be unselected at startup The application can override this setting If the data access type for the button is Universal select the data type by clicking the mouse SELECT button in the box to the right of this field to toggle between the following options Long Short Although the General Action Button display type is by default a Motif Widget you can make it a Motif Gadget by setting this field to Yes Gadgets use significantly less memory than Widgets However Gadgets have limitations they have the same foreground and background color as the drawing area they reside on and the colors you specify in the DFD Display will be ignored NOTE To set gadget label colors enter this line inthe Xdefaults file SAMMI XmDrawingArea foreground name where name is a color name from Appendix A of this manual Gadgets back grounds will be a format s background color the label color foreground must be set through Motif via the line above FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 249 General Action Button GAB Display Entries continued On Off Text String FWDU command send to the runtimesystem data server Pressing the Edit button the following window appears Send SSMBNROV2 COMMANDINGSSHOP4 p1 gt 5 p2 gt E p3 gt 2 p4 gt 1 p5 gt 2 p6 gt 5 f l For a detailed des
64. button 33 Move 152 Move Point Tool 134 Move Tool 83 136 165 Moving Scale Linear Meter 183 Moving Scale Linear Meters 17 Moving Scale Linear meter 297 Moving scale Linear Meter 25 Moving scale meter 23 MTC 189 Multiple values 186 N NDBM databases 18 New formats creating 44 NOP 355 NOP No operation 357 Notify upon Select 170 oO Object Icon 17 23 26 185 303 339 object ungrouping 132 objects changing points in 134 objects deleting 137 objects deleting all 137 Objects flipping 138 objects grouping 131 objects manipulating 129 objects moving 136 objects recoloring 142 objects resizing 133 Objects rotating 138 On line help 27 on line help creating 94 178 operational preferences setting 154 Option DFD 169 Option List 26 184 308 FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 430 Index Option Lists 17 24 P Page Bkwd 90 Page Fwd 90 page back 93 page down 93 page first 93 page forward 93 page last 93 page up 93 Paging 27 paging 28 85 93 pan 105 Pan To 40 Panels moving 39 permanent session 362 Pie Chart 311 Pie Chart Legend Display panel 318 Pie Chart Variable Display panel 313 Pie Chart Variables Display panel 314 Plot 23 26 169 183 Plots 17 260 Point Tools 134 Poll 173 174 Polygon Tool 126 Polygons 104 126 Polyline Tool 125 Popup Menus 17 Pop up option lists 43 Preferences 153 Production Edi
65. button that is insensitive The application must turn this button sensitive this can be done in the same write of the state then turn it insensitive again The application can also set the state of a button by setting the state data field in the API data buffer On refresh cycles the dynamic field checks the state field to determine whether the button is selected or unselected When the button is selected unselected by the user the button writes its current state and sensitive values into the API data buffer This tells the application the button s current condition A value of zero for the state variable causes the button to be unselected A value of zero for the sensitive variable causes the button to be insensitive unselectable Any non zero values in these variables cause the button to be selected and sensitive respectively Both variables must be of the same data type either short or long You may choose to use neither variable both variables or only the state variable with your API application In order to use the sensitive variable you must use the state variable The Number of Values field on the Data Access Description panel must be set to the number of values you expect to use for the General Action Button display type If you expect only to execute commands enter zero If you need to know and control the state variable enter 1 If you need to also know and control the sensitive variable enter 2 See Chapter 8 of this guide fo
66. ceeeeeeeeeeeeees 147 Using composites rv ce ses eee Ne ia pk a a ia OA Ae EN Sa tt es 147 Creating composites cceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeeeeeeeenees 147 Retrieving composites 0 eee eeeeceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeteas 148 Deleting COMPOSITES eane hed ad civics acs AA AAE EAEE aa AE EEN aes 149 Dynamic Field Description 151 General procedures eeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaaeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeseenseneeeeeees 152 Setting operational preferences ssssserereseererrrrserrrrrrnsserrrrrnnsent 154 Adding a new dynamic field ssesesenneeeeeeeeneeeeseernrreeseernnnneseerrnn 157 Add DEDODION ernennen A 157 Display Palette option s nsseseessnnnnnneesennrnrneerrrrnrnseernnrnnsseerrrreneeet 160 Read DFD Lib option jis irre ei hoe oe eee ete aide 162 Changing existing dynamic fields cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeeeeeeeeeees 163 Deleting dynamic fields 2 0 2 2 eccceeeeeeeeeeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 164 Movin ng dynamie NGOS ass cesses acces raaa tase eee eaa eect EE EEA 165 Copying dynamic fields lt 2 52 trcetetisaseSerecetanivlectveceysieuccidvdsere oineed 166 Entering dynamic field entries sAc sccccsteoninctiendecie Seok diel nent eeiae 167 Defining the display type and data access type ssseeeeeeeees 171 Specifying refresh rate ANd type eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeees 174 Defining size ANC POSITION
67. creates the dynamic field to look and work like a meter All you have to do is define the colors dial limits labels and other physical attributes of the meter no drawing is required Summary of Available Display Types Dynamic Function Required Display Type s Used Area definition Bar graphs Charts Calculations Command initiation Data entry and or display Data scrolling Dynamic messages Dynamic movement of static objects Dynamic symbols Graphs standard x y Graphics Menus Meters or gauges Popup lists to select entry options Region Bar Graphs Barcharts Pie Charts Equations Push Buttons Object Icons Toggle Buttons Menus Option and Selection Lists Reals Integers Text Custom Time Text Browser Formatted Numeric Output Sliders Tabulars Scrollbars Text Table Dynamic Objects Symbol Table Object Icons Plots Trends Curve Sets Graphic Data Field Pulldown Menus Cascading Menus Popup Menus Meter Gauge Fixed or Moving Scale Linear Meters Option and Selection Lists Display Types supported by Sammi but NOT by FWDU Dynamic messages Alarm FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 ROVSING A S User Manual 15 August 1999 Welcome to the Format Editor 1 18 Data access types Most dynamic fields provide a direct link to live data For example a Meter DFD might be linked to a pressure sensor on a boiler and show the current pressure as a reading on its dial
68. description discussed in Chapter 8 For enterable dynamic fields other features may also apply e Entry confirmation This feature displays a dialog box illustrated below asking the user to okay the data changed in the dynamic field The user must click Yes or press the Return key to confirm the data entry is then accepted and the dialog box disappears FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 7 188 Display Types Set this feature by toggling the Confirm Entry box on the DFD Display panel to Yes Confirm data entry You can also change a DFD s enterable attribute during runtime using the change dfd attribute command Please refer to the Command Reference for more information e Event logging You can track user entries by having these entries appear as system events in Sammi alarm displays if your Sammi system supports the optional alarm subsystem Set this feature by toggling the Log Entries box on the DFD Display panel to Yes When this feature is enabled the following message is added to the Sammi alarm display s each time the user makes an entry it shows the time date userid old value and new value entered time date OPENTRY FROM userid OLD xxx NEW xxx e Maximum minimum limits You can set limits on the value entered by the Sammi user restricting the value to a certain range Set this feature by entering values in the Maximum Minimum Limits fie
69. displays a series of graphic images or symbols These images can give the illusion of movement For example the user might see a valve that opens and closes a switch that turns on or off or a spacecraft or aircraft that tracks across the screen To create motion with a piece of equipment you can make each graphic symbol nearly identical except for the moving item As incoming data causes different symbols to be displayed the only part of the image that seems to change is the moving item For motion on an object such as an aircraft you would move the same graphic to a new set of coordinates You create or copy and modify the symbols using a bitmap editor program capable of producing an X bitmap file most X Window System workstations have generic bitmap editors Each symbol must be saved as a separate file witha sym suffix and stored in a SFWDU_HOME 1ib directory For graphics that will be placed on top of each other you should make the graphics the same size You must also create a lookup table to which incoming data values are compared which then makes a certain graphic display Each symbol must be stored as separate End Items of type FWDU_SYMBOL_BITMAP_BINARY The lookup table shall be stored in the MDB Lookup table End Item type is FWDU_SYMBOL_TABLE_TEXT and can be edited with a safs editor Please refer to Appendix L for a sample file Although similar to the Symbol Table display type the Object Icon display type is user select
70. dynamic field see Chapter 4 Restricting access security Enter the DFD name associated with this dynamic field if any see Chapter 7 Option List Click the mouse SELECT button to toggle between Yes for option type option sent to server No for standard type option entered in dynamic field These entries apply only to dynamic fields where the user can enter data directly into the field Real Time Integer or Text Toggle between Yes and No to indicate whether or not 1 data should be enterable 2 entries should be logged 3 entries should be confirmed See Chapter 7 Sammi user entry This entry applies only to dynamic fields where runtime annotations are desired See Chapter 7 Runtime annotations for details Click the mouse SELECT button to toggle between Yes to add runtime annotations No to omit runtime annotations NOTE The RT Annotations field has no effect on runtime annotations for the Plot and Trend display types To cause blinking and color changing for these display types you must set the Data Quality field to Yes on their respective display panels see Chapter 7 FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 6 170 Dynamic Field Description DFD Display Entries continued Entry Option Description Notify upon Select If this field is set to Yes a DFD with Data Access Type set NOTE FG Color BG Color NOTE Font NOTE to universal sen
71. dynamic fields Real and Integer only within the equation by placing an symbol before their DFD Names This makes the dynamic field value a working part of the equation e Standard spreadsheet symbols like and others are used to indicate mathematical functions like multiplication addition etc Other such symbols are explained below and shown in an accompanying table later in this section e Parentheses are used to isolate parts of the equation that must be calculated individually just as in standard mathematical equations like the following x y 1 2 e Spaces can be included to visually separate elements of the equation The accompanying table later in this section shows the typical symbols functions and constants that can be used with an Equation dynamic field A more thorough discussion of the equation language is provided in Appendix I of this guide If you are a C language programmer you can write small C type routines using this function You can use these building blocks to produce fairly complex logical statements such as the following if field2 gt 0 print sqrt field2 PI else print imaginary This equation is read as follows Ifthe value in field2 is greater than or equal to zero then display the square root of field2 times pi Otherwise display the message imaginary You can create as many Equation dynamic fields as desired within a given format When creating an Equation dynamic fi
72. eee eee eeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteteeeeeeeeeeeees 90 Window position X Y location i 2 ssc wipes eee et ede eerie 91 Window size width height ccccccceceeeeeeseseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeees 91 Restricting ACCESS security sxe uctsc com ca cl cect hoe fs cota teats aed 92 Linking formats through paging ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeee 93 Gi cet alee apy Ilelemlals Oma eaecennermMOrE ier rene Coen aren ere er oree nner itr ener emery 94 Adjusting the window background color paves isdeicccewesbentad onde awl eee nee eet hes 94 Using background IMage Sirisiri eresian teeta a E ERRERA 94 Accepted image formats axcceeceesucteveccteheteraveae one vecegySigsecuceteneseioot cas 95 Scaling an image cast ace lee Aes teth teat erecd dee cce tacky einen daeenn mete eate 95 Re touching images nce hae glenn aioe eon terete 95 Creating your own bitmapped images c ccceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 95 Importing the background image ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeees 96 Importing a Movable static image eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaaees 97 Specifying an application type x gece sexed id cae lacie veneeedataect ei auacaeeess 97 Entering a layer description ccccceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeees 99 WALFOCUICUON esei painaen aapa aAa a ana ea iaaa aa EES 103 Drawing Methods 103 Drawing tools available soon cers owes iat n
73. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 70 Completing the data entry process for the Meter DFD 71 FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Table of Contents Ill Lesson 2 Using Sammi t TESE MME format ct hose ta one Acetate I A ahi Manta hella cart 71 Part 1 Testing the format xchat ptesciet netic oftsecees hate ete aerate 71 Part 2 Changing the format and retesting ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 72 Lesson 3 Drawing static background objects ea ea ius acer toa eae 72 Part 1 Changing the format ccccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 72 Part 2 Setting up the default drawing Styles ceeeeseeeeeteeee 73 Setting the line orientation sisi Gsvess heeds coil pate even tees spedtev eneswsceeeeess 74 Setting the Smap Grid function eee eee eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 74 Setting the fill style nse ces ccte aaa et ses e ce eet tae htt Ace 76 Setting the line Siler os ne a aa Ale a ee alee 77 Part 3 Drawing the facing plate cccceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 78 Part 4 Drawing the background objects eceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeees 79 Part 5 Finishing the background ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeeees 81 Format amp Layer Description 85 Entering a format description ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeees 86 Defining window size and position 20 0 2
74. format In the following session you start the Format Editor and create a format with the basic display elements Part 1 Starting the FWDU Format Editor 1 To start the FWDU invoke a FWDU_SYNOPTIC_DISPLAY End Item from the I MDB If the FWDU is properly installed on your system the Format Editor Control panel displays fb cmnd none CDU SYNOPTIC_MODE Read Write FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 3 56 Learning the Format Editor Creating a format To create a new format 1 Ifthe invoked FWDU_SYNOPTIC_DISPLAY End Item already has been opened the following Drawing Area panel appears The header holds the name of the fb bkyu S K_01_ 460399 FWDU Format Editor specific window fb bkgd and the SID and the End Item name 2 Ifthe invoked FWDU_SYNOPTIC_DISPLAY End Item never has been opened the window on the next page appears FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Learning the Format Editor 3 57 fb vbdesc Format Description Name Ee METRES Description App Name Logical Server ME Creation Date Security Level PE WM Class Change Date Refresh Rate EE Help Fic es End Item Window Control Window Background X Location BEU Location ET Color Width imane nt KEE mar EEE cur SU ae End item a Height init OL max EGE cur EU Color Scale Factor Type Decoration Yes Er O o N
75. have a pop up menu which you access by clicking the mouse OPTION button on either the border or on a button in the upper left corner of a window to move panels Others may not show a moving outline Some let you drag any part of the window border If the above method does not work please see your window manager manual or ask your system administrator for instructions To change the overlap of a partially obscured panel click the mouse cursor along the edge of its frame The obscured panel pops to the front NOTE On some workstations you must use a pop up menu to change the overlap If the above method does not work please see your workstation manual or window management system documentation for instructions Zooming the Drawing Area When the Drawing Area is displayed you may want to view it in a magnified zoomed FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 2 40 Getting Started state You can do this in one of two ways The first is by a menu that pops up when you click the mouse OPTION button in the Drawing Area outside of a dynamic field This menu contains the following options Undo Undoes the last operation Redisplay Redraws the visible format Zoom In Magnifies zooms the Drawing Area to twice its previously displayed size The center of the Drawing Area becomes the center of the zoomed area Zoom Out Reduces demagnifies the Drawing Area to half its previously displayed size The
76. in the Format Editor command line d w S fb palette You can also remove this panel using the close OSF Motif command the quit OpenLook command or your window manager s equivalent command Selecting font styles Any new text you create uses the default font shown in the Current Font Selection panel You can always change fonts later see Recoloring objects later in this chapter To save time however you may prefer to set the font before creating text objects Follow these steps 1 Select the Fonts option from the Style menu on the Format Editor Control panel The Current Font Selection Display panel appears Current Font Selection fixed ABCDabcd fixed D 6x12 x13 8x13 bold OK 9x15 v 4 gt Cancel Current Font Selection Display Panel 2 Click the mouse SELECT button on the name of the font you want to use for your format See Appendix B for information on the available fonts 3 Click the mouse SELECT button on the OK button to close the pop up panel To close the pop up panel without making changes click the mouse SELECT button on the Cancel button FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 Drawing Methods CHAPTER 5 111 Selecting line styles Any object you draw is made up of lines that form the edges of circles arcs rectangles and polygons You can draw straight or bending lines that go from one point to another Whe
77. manipulate the X axis range which you can then specify to less than 1 second You can specify this FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV User Manual 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 261 X axis range using the Format Editor change dfd attribute command or the zoom scroll dialog For the y axis you can specify the same features as for the x axis To enter information for each individual y axis click the mouse SELECT button on the Curve Definition button of either the Plot or Trend Display panel to show the Line Chart Variables Display panel For each value plotted on the y axis you can choose whether to draw an actual curve or suppress drawing of the curve to produce a scatter plot effect You can also choose the type of marker to be used on each curve to show data points box triangle cross etc If any curves share the same y scale range only one scale will be drawn This scale will have the color of the highest number curve NOTE Axis labelling is done with a predefined font that scales as the graph is resized The use of a predefined font means the font specifications in the DFD Display panel is ignored Sizing Sammi sizes both Plot and Trend displays to fit the area covered by the dynamic field However a certain amount of space along the top left and bottom of the dynamic field is always reserved for labelling and scales The rest is filled proportionally with the graph If the dynamic field is too small there
78. mouse SELECT button on the Delete Variable button you delete the variable at the top of the list The Reset button restores all entries on the panel to the values that they contained the last time you saved them When you have added and saved all the variables close this panel by clicking the mouse SELECT button on the Dismiss button Barchart Variable Display Entries Entry Option Description Digital fg Color Either enter a color for the foreground color for the variable value or click the mouse OPTION button in the box beside this label to display an option list Then click the mouse SELECT button on the desired color name Digital bg Color Either enter a color for the background color for the variable value or click the mouse OPTION button in the box beside this label to display an option list Then click the mouse SELECT button on the desired color name FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 7 219 Display Types Barchart Variable Display Entries continued Entry Option Description Fill Style Click on a button below this title to indicate the fill style Fill Pattern Click on a button below this title to indicate the fill pattern Variable Name Enter the text for the variable name Bar Position This position is based on the relative location of the variable that is zero 0 is the first bar on the left of the vertically oriented barchart or the bottom bar on the horizonta
79. occurs as a single field in the table each has a separate entry in the mask definition Null and blank entries in either of the positions are represented by 0 and s respectively An explanation of the behavior of each of these values can be found at the end of this discussion of the index comparison method Col 6 An obsolete entry always leave blank but include comma as shown COL s 7 Used for MTC or LEX method leave blank for index comparison method Col 8 Used for MTC leave blank for index comparison and LEX methods Col 9 Used for MTC leave blank for index comparison and LEX methods Col 10 Used for MTC leave blank for index comparison and LEX thods FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 APPENDIX D 384 Sample Runtime Annotations Table Each mask hex value tells which bits in the quality word are to be ANDed Each 0 represents 0000 and the f represents 1111 Thus the mask value in the sample above for foreground color is found in bits 28 31 of the quality word with bits 0 27 filled with zeros 1111 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 The last four bits of the quality word are ANDed with the last four bits of the mask If the quality word is 00100010110010011100101100010110 the last four bits here with a value of 0010 are ANDed with 1111 1111 0010 0010 0010 converts to a decimal 2 thus the foreground color is taken from record 2 the third record
80. presentation aids Other display types and design features that you can use to enhance the presentation of data include e Layering This feature lets you create a format that consists of several layers any or all of which can be visible at any given time Once you have created the different layers you can let the Sammi user hide and or show a layer to reduce the complexity of the format see next page e Paging This feature lets you connect various formats and pages between them using the Sammi paging commands see the discussion on the next page and in Chapter 4 Format Format Format 1 3 2 3 3 e On line help This feature lets you store help information for a format or a dynamic field in a text file where the Sammi user can view it by clicking the mouse OPTION button while holding the SHIFT key down see Chapter 4 for details Vv DONE OVERVIEW DISPLAY This window provides an overview of the total system operation To use this window select the feature that you want to use and click the left mouse button on e Entry confirmation This feature can be used with any dynamic field that allows user entry of new data A dialog box pops up allowing the user to confirm the entry Confirm data entry As part of the design process you may want to plan ways in which these aids can be used to improve the final Sammi interface
81. record definition consists of a series of lines in the format lt record_name gt lt num_of_fields gt lt x gt lt y gt lt z gt lt field_name gt lt field_type gt data_length_in_bytes lt field_name gt lt field_type gt data_length_in_bytes lt field_name gt lt field_type gt data_length_in_bytes where lt record_name gt Name of ddr record that is name used in the DFD definition lt number_of_fields gt Number of data items in the data buffer There will be this number of lt field_name gt lines in the record definition lt x gt lt y gt lt z gt Reserved for future use currently specify each of these with a value of 1 lt field_name gt Name of the field in this ddr record This name is arbitrary and is not used by the Runtime Environment therefore it is best to make this name as explanatory as possible lt field_type gt The data type of this field Valid entries are short long float double and ASCII data_length_in_bytes Optional entry needed only for ASCII field types Specifies the length of the ASCII string in bytes characters FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 343 Display type specifications Enter the following specifications as illustrated in the panel below Tabular Display Title
82. right of Height shows 1 character Chr click the mouse SELECT button again If you cannot get them adjusted with the mouse enter them manually see next section FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 3 64 Learning the Format Editor Entering data on the DFD Display panel To enter data on the DFD Display panel x fb dfd DFD Display DFD Name a Display Type Data Access Type Refresh Rate Refresh Type Poll Width Chr Pixels IEE I Height Chr Pixels HE Location X Y Et EU Help File es 6 Security Level Eau Option DFD i 80 cmnd No Enterable ves Confirm Entry No Log Entries No RT Annotations No Notify upon Select No FG Color lightsteelbluel BG Color Font courier bold 12 pt Save DFD Cancel DFD 1 Click to the right of DFD Name and enter the name inputemp Do not press the RETURN key 2 Either press the TAB key or click the mouse OPTION button in the box to the right of Display Type and select Real from the resulting option list The Real Display panel appears Stay on the DFD Display panel 3 Click the mouse OPTION button in the box to the right of Data Access Type and select Universal from the resulting option list The Data Access Description panel appears Stay on the DFD Display panel 4 Enter 5 in the box to the right of Refresh Rate This sets the amount of time that will elapse before the data redisplays in
83. see Recoloring objects later in this chapter If you selected the Closed Spline option your last point and first point are connected automatically For best control over this final spline segment you should have the Snap function turned on and click the last point as close to the first one as possible FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Drawing Methods CHAPTER 5 125 Lines single and multiple segment Line Tool rawing Tools AME S With the Line Tool you can draw either a single line that connects two points or multiple segment lines that connect multiple points You construct lines by clicking on the desired points in the Drawing Area Both single lines and multiple segment lines may have arrowheads See Arrowhead settings later in this chapter Polyline Tool Set the default line styles using the methods discussed earlier in this chapter You can also use the Line Orientation Control functions to help you draw straight horizontal vertical or diagonal lines To draw single line segments 1 Click the mouse SELECT button on the Line Tool button on the Format Editor Control panel 2 Inthe Drawing Area position the cursor on the first point and click the mouse SELECT button 3 Move the cursor to a second point and click the mouse SELECT button a single line is drawn between the two points To draw a polyline multi segmented line 1 Clic
84. symbol by adding the word blink The value lookup method includes numeric values as the first entry in each row of the table whereas the index lookup method does not This difference is explained below e Value lookup method In this method the incoming data value is converted to a double precision floating point number then compared to the first entry in each row of the lookup table starting with the top row If the entry is less than or equal to the incoming data value Sammi uses the symbol colors and blink attribute listed in that row For instance in the earlier example an incoming data value of 0 35 will cause Sammi to use the valtran3 symbol file with orange foreground white background and no blink This is because 0 25 lt 0 35 lt 0 5 If the incoming data value is less than the value of the first symbol in the table the first symbol will be selected if the value is greater than the value of the last symbol in the table the last symbol will be selected This is a more straightforward method than the index lookup and works for any range of incoming data values as long as your table entries reflect the entire range In order for this method to work correctly the lookup table must be arranged so that the values associated with symbols increase from the first row to the last row FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 7 194 Display Types e Index lookup method
85. that city FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 ROVSING A S User Manual 15 August 1999 Getting Started 2 29 e Creating a single format with several layers up to 64 The Sammi user can then hide show each layer with the Layers Attribute panel which the user accesses either by clicking the mouse OPTION button in the format and clicking the mouse SELECT button on the Modify Layers option or by adding the Layer format with the add win command in the Runtime Environment Layering can be automatic so that when the user zooms magnifies a format the layers disappear reappear declutter clutter automatically depending on the level of magnification The levels are controlled by you the format designer at format creation time Prototyping review cycles Unlike other interface building programs all designs created with the Format Editor are immediately usable by the Sammi Runtime Environment This saves compiling and linking time Instead of simply creating a picture of an interface you use the Format Editor to create actual ready to use interfaces You can still use manual sketches to draft the interface design if that is what your review approval process requires But the Format Editor also makes it easy to start prototyping with a working interface and to move the design through multiple review and demonstration cycles until final approval is reached INITIAL DESIGN AND REVIEW FINAL TESTING g
86. the user that may flash change color or otherwise attract the user s attention so that appropriate action may be taken Alarms are stored for later review Compare to event which involves the system rather than incoming data A process that makes a request for some sort of action of another cooperating program called aserver For example a client process might ask a server to update a certain piece of data or to add a window to the display See also server Columbus Orbiting Facility The european part of the International Space Station The control system in a multi user or multi system environment In a Sammi environment console refers to the system on which Sammi is physically running A Sammi session might be running on the console but users on other computers connected or networked to the console would have access to the session A set of static and dynamic objects grouped to form a single entity which is then saved into a file for use in formats Crew Procedure Language Cathode ray tube the original type of computer display In programming now a generic reference to any monitor or display Dynamic field description The area in a Sammi format through which data is displayed Also referred to as display type An occurrence involving the computer system such as a user logging on or off starting or stopping an application entering data etc An event may cause a message to appear on the display Compare to a
87. the attributes and with the dynamic field still selected it should be highlighted select the Save DFD Lib option from the Dynamic Fields menu of the Format Editor Control panel The menu disappears and the Save_Lib_popup appears 4 Complete the Pathname and press OK Using the DFD library Once a dynamic field is saved in the MDB FWDU_LIBRARY_BINARY end item you can read that library into any synoptic display with the Read DFD Lib option To do this 1 From the Dynamic Fields menu select the Read DFD Lib option FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 6 180 Dynamic Field Description The menu disappears and the following window appears Read_Lib_popup Ee X Pathnane support Caneel zll 2 Complete the Pathname by typing or using Pathname Support and press OK The End Item must be a FWDU_LIBRARY_BINARY 3 Move your cursor into the Drawing Area As the DFD Display and other dynamic field attribute panels are displayed a bounding box appears at the cursor location 4 Using the mouse move the box to the desired location and click the mouse SELECT button again The DFD Library file has been added to the format NOTE If you are in the Production Editing Mode the newly added DFD Library will be selected for editing You may edit the dynamic field attributes or save the DED as added If you are in the Design Editing Mode none of the DFD attribute panels will
88. the client Some Sammi processes are clients that request data from data servers other Sammi processes are clients that request window manipulation functionality from an X Server See also client A very powerful multi user multi tasking platform independent operating system Sammi typically runs under UNIX or some variant thereof An ID assigned to you when your system administrator enters you into the Sammi system Used as part of the logon process An industry standard windowing system developed at M LT and running under the UNIX operating system In Sammi the format designer is operating under the X Window System or a variant but need not interact with it 1 In the X Window System a rectangular area of any size that works like a miniature screen may be moved sized iconified etc 2 In the Sammi Graphical Environment a page of a user interface displayed inside an X Window FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 Glossary 426 Also called a format although a format is the element built using the Format Editor that is subsequently displayed through the X Window System workstation A desktop computer system equipped with sophisticated graphics capability and a multi tasking operating system usually but not always networked to other systems A smaller system can function like a workstation if it has network access to workstation level graphics and operating system
89. the mouse SELECT button Sammi Window General Action Sammi Equation Button Processor E N Alarm Commands x 5y z ES 12 0 lt 43 Other Dynamic Fields Equation and General Action Button Functions Data Server Network Other display types like Alarm Dynamic Object Formatted Numeric Object Icon Text Table and Symbol Table use a lookup table like the one shown below Sammi compares incoming data to the lookup table then selects the appropriate display qualities The lookup table can set foreground and background colors and other attributes used for displaying the dynamic field Sammi Window OK A Dynamic Field display only Data Server Database read only record1 record2 OK PROBLEM white red blue green lt q _ record3 12 33 5 high 26 44 2 low 103 123 5 high Lookup Table Network Lookup Tables FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 7 186 Display Types With other display types like Real Integer Text and Custom Time data values are displayed literally or can be entered or changed directly by the Sammi user The diagram below shows the function of this type of display
90. the mouse SELECT button on the button to the right of this field to select either Single precision for time in seconds or Double precision for time in seconds and microseconds Enter the text for the graph title Either enter a color for the graph title color or click the mouse OPTION button in the box beside this label to display an option list Then click the mouse SELECT button on the desired color name Either enter a color for the background of the graph inside the axes or click the mouse OPTION button in the box beside this label to display an option list Then click the mouse SELECT button on the desired color name Select the type of grid by clicking the mouse SELECT button in the box to the right of this field to select one of the options from the following list of entries No grid Dotted horizontal grid lines Solid horizontal grid lines Solid vertical grid lines Solid vertical and horizontal grid lines Either enter a color to be used for grid lines if any or click the mouse OPTION button in this box to display an option list Then click the mouse SELECT button on the desired color name FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 7 270 Display Types Entry Option Size X Display Mode Step Fraction X Axis Axis Color Title Title Color Time Offset Span Trend Display Entries continued Description Click the mouse SELECT button in this group to se
91. the value is zero the state is zero if the value is not zero the state is one You must enter zero for one number and any positive number for the other When the Object Icon s state is zero the command defined for the On state is sent when the user clicks the mouse SELECT button on the Object Icon otherwise the command defined for the Off state is sent FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 7 304 Display Types Multiple You create a Selection List dynamic field then enter the name of that dynamic field in the Select List field on the Object Icon display panel This list pops up when the user clicks the mouse SELECT button on the Object Icon so the user can make selection s from the list Display Type Specifications Enter the following specifications as illustrated on the panel below SSMB ROV2 SETUP SYMBOL_TABLE 0 Ga qgaaa a o 0000 A wa X Object Icon Display Entries Entry Option Description Symbol Tbl Name End Item of type FWDU_SYMBOL_TABLE_TEXT FWDU UM 114 002 ROV User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 305 Object Icon Display Entries continued Entry Option Table Access Indirect List Indirect index lookup only Mask Hex Direct index lookup only Shift Right Direct index lookup only Data Type Description Select the type of index to be used with the index lookup method Refer to the Lookup tables and i
92. this label to toggle between Vertical and Horizontal orientation Enter the text string for the barchart title Either enter a color for the chart title or click the mouse OPTION button in the box beside this label to display an option list Then click the mouse SELECT button on the desired color name Either enter a font for the Title Name or click the mouse OPTION button in the box beside this label to display an option list Then click the mouse SELECT button on the desired font name Select whether to show the incoming data values for each bar on top of each vertical or to the right of each horizontal bar by clicking the mouse SELECT button in the box to the right of this field to toggle between Yes and No If you selected Yes for Show Value for real numbers only enter the number of digits to the right of the decimal point to be displayed If you choose to show the value either enter a font for the value or click the mouse OPTION button in the box beside this label to display an option list Then click the mouse SELECT button on the desired font name FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 Display Types CHAPTER 7 213 Entry Option Min Value Max Value Conv Factor Data type Hi Lo Marks Grid Type Barchart Display Entries continued Description Read only Data is automatically taken from measurement End Item when associating measurement end item The end i
93. to work closely with this person to develop the data access portions of your user interface In some organizations each of these jobs is held by a separate person with separate skills If your talents are broad enough and the workload is small enough you may be called on to handle some of these jobs yourself in addition to format design FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 1 14 Welcome to the Format Editor How to use this manual This manual is designed to provide all the information you will need to operate the Format Editor The chapters are summarized below Chapter 1 Welcome to the Format Editor explains the basic operation and concepts related to Sammi and the Format Editor Chapter 2 Getting Started explains how to plan the interface design how to start and stop the Format Editor and how to operate the Format Editor e Chapter 3 Learning the Format Editor provides step by step lessons that help you use the Format Editor to create a sample format Chapter 4 Format amp Layer Description explains how to enter the general specifications for a format e Chapter 5 Drawing Methods provides step by step procedures for using the Format Editor s Drawing Tools to draw background objects Chapter 6 Dynamic Field Description provides step by step procedures for creat ing or modifying dynamic fields built into a format Chapter 7 Display Types explains how to enter specificat
94. turn these functions on 1 Select Snap Grid from the Style menu on the Format Editor Control panel The Current Spacing Display panel appears Current Spacing Display Snap spacing in pixels 10 Grid spacing in pixels 20 OK Cancel FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Learning the Format Editor 3 75 Enter 10 in the box to the right of Snap spacing in pixels on the Current Spacing Display panel Enter 20 in the box to the right of Grid spacing in pixels on the Current Spacing Display panel Click the mouse SELECT button on the OK button to close the panel Click the mouse SELECT button on the Grid and the Snap buttons on the far right side of the Format Editor Control panel 55 amp Recolor E Snap Grid FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 3 76 Learning the Format Editor Setting the fill style To set the current fill style 1 Select Fill Style from the Style menu on the Format Editor Control panel The Current Fill Style panel appears Fill Style L Fill Pattern EHS amp Kho Current Fill Style OK Fill Rule Cancel x K M Mh 2 2 Select the first button from the left No Fill from the C
95. up unless the user has write privilege for the format and trigger DFD See the System Administrator s Guide for more information on security FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 329 Command entries for Select Lists used as Option Lists For a Select List used as a Command Option List which pops up when the mouse Option button is clicked in a trigger dynamic field the presence or absence of the logical server name causes different actions e Ifa logical server name is present the command entries associated with the selected item are sent to the specified server If the logical server is an application the server is notified that the command data for the selected item is available with the S2_SEND_CMD event within the application If entry in the logical server name is local cma the command items are sent to the Sammi Command processor e If there is no entry in the Logical Server Name field of the Static Select List Item in the Command Entries panel the logical server of the trigger DFD is notified that the command data for the selected item is available with the 2_BTN_EVENT event in the application In this case if the trigger DFD is not connected to a server the commands associated with the selected item are discarded For more details refer to Appendix C of this manual and the Application Programming Interface API Guide Optiona
96. up with 10 fields per record Fields 1 10 are required for the MTC method LEX uses fields 1 7 Although index comparison uses only fields 2 3 and 5 each of the ten fields must contain a place value a blank is acceptable because all three runtime annotation methods expect to find these fields You will probably find it helpful to assign sequential integers beginning with 0 in field 1 so as to keep track of from which record a specific attribute is taking its value Commas are used as field delimiters tabs cannot be used to space fields in columns Please refer to Appendix D for more details and sample rt da dat files Runtime keys Runtime keys function as generic variables representing all or part of any data source parameters for which a user can later substitute specific values Runtime keys are useful if you do not know the specific variable when creating a format or when required to link multiple versions of the same format to different data sources For example the necessary applications that will provide data to the formats you are designing may not be complete until after the user interface is completed FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 Display Types CHAPTER 7 191 Or you may want to create one format but duplicate and link it with a variety of data sources You can specify runtime keys in fields like the Read key and Logical Server of the Data Access Description panel
97. using the Format Editor Once you have started the FWDU Format Editor from the I MDB with the panels displayed correctly on the screen you can begin using it to perform the following operations e Create new formats and save them in the MDB e View existing formats e Change existing formats e Copy Save As existing formats to the MDB General procedures for performing each of these functions are listed on the following pages Keep in mind that during any work session you can use any of these procedures in any order and as often as desired as long as your system administrator has provided you with the proper permissions Procedures for quitting the Format Editor are given at the end of this chapter NOTE The procedures in this section are intended as general guidelines Since the actual steps you take depend on the format design we have omitted some details and referred you to later chapters where appropriate The lessons in Chapter 3 will also repeat many of these steps but in the context of a specific example FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 2 44 Getting Started Creating new formats Use the following steps each time you want to create a format You can create any number of separate formats desired during a given work session NOTE Before editing a format one and only one Equipment Constraint End Item has to be created See The FWDU Text Editor on page 365 1 Inth
98. window will be located from the top left corner of the monitor screen when the window appears in Sammi FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 APPENDIX E 388 Pixel Measurements More precisely e X Location is the distance in pixels from the left edge of the visible screen to the left edge of the Sammi window e Y Location is the distance in pixels from the top edge of the visible screen to the top edge of the Sammi window X Y Location is also used to indicate the position of a dynamic field inside a format X Y Location of a dynamic field is the distance from the top left edge of the format For example on an 85 dot per inch monitor if the desired location of the window is two inches from the left side of the screen and one inch from the top the X Location would be 170 pixels and the Y Location would be 85 pixels However if you wanted the window to fit snugly inside the top left corner of the screen both the X and Y Location would be 0 pixels FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 appenvixe Conversion Factors F 389 You can convert the values of certain dynamic fields such as Real that the Runtime Environment displays by entering the Conversion Factor Codes from this table into the Conversion field of the relevant dynamic fields Conversion Typ
99. 02 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 7 224 Display Types Custom Time Display Entries continued Entry Option Description NOTE You can display a pop up help menu containing a description of the specifiers listed on the previous page by moving the mouse cursor into the Format String entry block and holding down the SHIFT key while clicking the mouse OPTION button Time Zone Select the time zone code to be used for converting the time value from Greenwich Mean Time This code can be selected from a pop up menu Twenty six one hour world time zones are kept in the timzones dat file The Daylight Savings Time start and end dates are also stored in this file The time zone can also be local In this case the Custom Time Display type determines how to convert the time value by calling operating system time functions NOTE If the time zone entry in the file does not have Daylight Savings Time start and end dates or the start and end dates are not valid for the date time correspond ing to the converted time value Daylight Savings Time corrections will not be applied to the time value FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 225 Dynamic Objects Sample Format sample_dobj The Dynamic Object display type allows you to turn a static object and or dynamic field into a data activated DFD that can rotate blink or change appearance for example appear to fill based o
100. 1 RED YELLOW 3 Ys HI LEX 32 RED BLACK Y LO i Et 64 BLUE RED MD LEX 256 RED GREEN EX LEX a es ails type Background colors character Table Format for Single bit Setting Blink Shift Value Bit mask no blink Appended character color value to compare 1 RED YELLOW Y Hl MTC 10 EQ 1 32 RED BLACK Y LO MTC 10 GT 0 64 BLUE RED MD MTC 10 LT 2 256 RED GREEN EX MTC 10 LE 1 Foreground Appended Function type Comparison Background colors character type Table Format for Multiple bit Setting NOTE If you leave the blink no blink entry blank no blink is used There are three types of entries LEX MTC and Index Comparison LEX is used when each bit of the quality word flags a distinct quality value MTC is used when multiple bits of the quality word can be combined to flag a quality Index comparison is used with masks for each runtime attribute such as foreground and background colors Each row in the lookup table shows special effects to be applied to the dynamic field when a specific bit or group of bits is set in the quality word The rows are listed in order of priority As soon as Sammi encounters a match it uses the settings for that row FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 7 190 Display Types For matching LEX entries the bit mask is ANDed with the quality word If the result is NOT Z
101. 10 lt 0 21 lt 0 25 1 2 Fuel tank is empty inf lt 1 20 lt 0 0 10 2 Fuel tank is full 0 95 lt 10 20 lt inf FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Sample Symbol Text Tables Editor APPENDIX L 407 Text table index lookup file example indextxt safs example definition file for index lookup text table header record MUST BE BEFORE entry records EXT index lookup text entry records entry format is txt_string fg_color bg_color lt optional gt blink txt_string is the actual string to be displayed MUST be quoted fg_color is the foreground color bg_color is the background color blink is an optional keyword If present the text will blink when it is displayed Unless blink is specified fg_color and bg_color can be any standard color If blink is specified fg_color and bg_color can only be black white red green blue yellow cyan or magenta Records are 1 3 Text table indexes corresponding to the entry records are index 0 record 1 index 1 record 2 index 2 record 3 Data values are converted to long integers shifted and masked and the resulting number is used as the index into the text table If the resulting index is 0 valve is closed is selected and if it is 2 valve is fully open is selected If the index is out of range lt 0 or gt 2 bad status is displayed valve
102. 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 6 178 Dynamic Field Description Creating on line help You can provide Sammi users with on line help by connecting a plain ASCII text help file to the dynamic field The Format Editor lets you create one help file per dynamic field Whenever help is needed the Sammi user can hold down the SHIFT key and click the mouse OPTION button to pop up a window containing the help information The Format Editor allows you to create one general help file per format and an additional help file for each dynamic field Selecting a security level restricting access You can restrict access to individual dynamic fields to authorized users only much in the same way you restrict access to the whole format This is done by entering the appropriate Security Level code in the DFD Display panel Security levels are defined by the Sammi system administrator using procedures described in the System Administrator s Guide If you do not know the correct security level codes ask your system administrator Entering a value of 0 in this field allows any Sammi user to add change delete or copy your DFDs FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Dynamic Field Description CHAPTER 6 179 DFD libraries You can create a dynamic field and save it independent of a format as a DFD Library file This feature allows you to create a dynamic field template with specific color s si
103. 410 Special amp International Characters Second TE character amp Resultin Hex value Description First character pene 8 third if character needed 0xA5 yen Y or y OxA6 broken bar lt P s343 1 OxA7 section mark O or S or Oo or S or 3 OxA8 diaresis nye Pees OxA9 copyright C or O or Cc Kok OxAA feminine o A or superior a numeral OxAB left guillemot gt gt OxAC not sign lt or or e 3 a OxAD soft hyphen o OxAE registered O or R or o r paveine A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 Special amp International Characters APPENDIX M 411 Second EE character amp Resulting Hex value Description First character did if acetate needed OxAF macron o N OxBO degree or nN KOK t 9 OxB1 plus minus 4 OxB2 superior 2 2 DEUN 125 OxB3 superior 3 3 A 133 0xB4 acute accent N N 0xB5 mu P w y i OxB6 paragraph Y P or mark p ae 1 OxB7 centered dot wee A OxB8 cedilla ay a FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 APPENDIX M 412 Special amp International Characters Second TE character amp Resulting Hex value Description First character third a
104. 5 percent horizontally but leave it the same size vertically No fractional percentages are allowed 12 x position If you want the dynamic object to move to another 13 y position location on the screen enter the horizontal x and vertical y coordinates in pixels as measured from the upper left corner of the format See Appendix E for a discussion of pixel measurements FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 7 230 Display Types 14 Rotation If you want the dynamic object to rotate clockwise around arotation point enter the angle of rotation for the dynamic object in degrees times 64 rotation is specified in sixty fourths of a degree the rotation point is an attribute of gravity see below Rotation is clockwise for positive values 15 Gravity This is the rotation and transformation reference point That is if a dynamic object is to rotate this value determines the axis on which it rotates If a dynamic object is to be scaled this value determines the point from which it is scaled Itis also used for dynamic objects that appear to fill in responses to incoming data values The gravity values are 1 NW upper left fill top down 2 N top center 3 NE upper right 4 W left center fill left to right 5 Center center fill top down 6 E right center fill right to left 7 SW lower left fill bottom up 8 S lower center A 9 SE lower right
105. 57 Graphs Plot and Trend tice aiesnia ceed een aot aie 260 Generalmen cided ade th aah ee tn te ee Ube tet art Aa E A A E Ee tated 260 ROS POS noera a ere a e e a 260 SIZIN aneia e e ae E aa e a e E e at 261 ZOO aii Gehan a eee AN ala en ala E 261 Double ffering sec caseecdece eaa aaura araa vee vane AEA EEE aai 261 FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Table of Contents VII Step Display Step Fraction 0 cccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 261 Individual Curve specifications 2 0 2 2 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 263 APIMAIORMANON nstema ave Sel uate ove EE Aa NE 263 Plot display type specifications sisc cttceitecaccicteteeeecchcieteleidtinttterieice 264 Trend display type specifications c ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeees 268 Line Chart Variables Display specifications ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 271 ae 2 gener wre aan TEE ena ue ee enn ea ea we Aenea Wee te eo Cre er eee 274 Display type specifications ce cceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeentees 274 PORN ee EE ads cad yeaa ce eee eyes ee cert gees eaten ceca Syren enced 276 Menus used as options ceccecshndeen lee ces atone ces ee aed eceareeeleciacedearste 277 Command entries for menus used as Options eeeeeeee teeters 278 Display type specifications 2 4 se wut ad ade Anan aka 278 Static menu display type specifications 2 0 0 eeeeeeeeeee
106. 84 336 Slider Bars 24 Sliders 17 Snap 35 74 165 snap 104 106 Snap and Grid function spacing 107 Snap Off 108 Snap On 108 Spline Tool 140 Splines 104 spline to line 140 Spline to Line Tool 141 SQL databases 18 squares 104 Standard menu 281 Standard Option List 308 Standard Sammi Keystrokes 31 Standard Select List 330 Standard Text Browser 346 Static Attrib 152 FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV iSSUE 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 Index 431 Static Attribute 143 Static background objects modifying 47 Static Browser Data Display panel 351 Static components 16 Static Menu 279 Static Menus 355 Static objects 16 static objects 103 Static objects deleting 49 Static Select Lists 355 Static Text Browser 346 Status Text panel 352 Step Display Step Fraction 261 Stipple pattern 105 Stream 173 174 Style Colors 38 Style Constraints 38 Style Fill Style 38 Style Font 38 Style Line Style 38 Style Recolor 38 Style Snap Grid 38 Symbol From Status Display panel 339 Symbol Table 17 23 25 185 339 System events 201 System Preferences 37 System Preferences panel 154 167 T t Custom T 17 Table Lookup 227 Tabular 23 25 342 Tabulars 17 Text 18 23 25 104 128 186 345 356 Text Browse 356 Text Browser 17 25 184 346 Text font 105 Text Table 17 23 25 185 352 Text Tool 128 Text adding 60 text creating 129 text editing 129 Time 18 171 355 357 Timeout V
107. Bar Chart Display Orientation Horizontal Tite tome Number of Variables ME Variables Definition i Title Color i L Title Font Show Value No EA Decimal Dgt WE Digital Font m E O Min Value _ 300 00 Max Value _ 300 00 Conv Factor E A z _ Data type I s Pe Hi Lo Marks No n Grid Type No grid L Grid Size Minor X Y A Grid Color black s B J a eet Bar Outline Gr E Depth Thickness Hi L atl 7 EP Oe Cc Bar Width bE 7 z J e p Bar Spacin T BE Mariable 2 Variable 3 ree n L Show Variables No eee aos Variables Font Enter Reset Ticks Color Ticks Font fixed OOOO O Thresholds i Axis Color Label Show Value Label Fill Color Axis Label E ET Axis Label Color EE e RENES co ves A Thresholds Font eo BEAT recon Color Fill Mode Default E o 99 00 v Dynamic v Multiple Yes 1 00 a Threshold Ref Bottom mm Yes es 1 a FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 7 212 Display Types Entry Option Number of Variables Orientation Title Name Title Color Title Font Show Value Decimal Dgt Digital Font Barchart Display Entries Description Display only this value is calculated after you define the variables on the Barchart Variables Display panel To access the Barchart Variables Display panel click the mouse SELECT button on the Variables Definition button Click the mouse SELECT button in the box beside
108. CT button in this box to toggle between Yes and No Select whether the variable name is displayed by clicking the mouse SELECT button in this box to toggle between Yes and No If you selected Yes for the Show Variables either enter a font for the variables string or click the mouse OPTION button in this box to display a list of choices Select whether the data value is displayed by clicking the mouse SELECT button in this box to toggle between Yes and No Select how the data is presented in the digital value field by clicking the mouse SELECT button in the box to toggle between Value Actual value of the data Percentage Part of the pie the data represents Enter a unit measurement of 1 or 2 characters such as a percent sign that displays after the value or after the runtime annotation field If you selected Yes for the Show Value either enter a font for the value or click the mouse OPTION button in this box to display an option list If you selected Yes for Show Value enter the number of digits to be included to the right of the decimal point in the displayed value for real numbers only FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 7 320 Display Types Num of Chars Enter an integer greater than zero for the number of characters displayed in the digital display Inner Margin Enter the width in pixels for a margin surrounding the legend Pie Chart Legend Display Entri
109. Choose the fill color and texture for the pie slices e Add a shadow to the pie Add runtime annotations API information The runtime data buffer for the Pie Chart display type must contain one 1 value for each variable defined up to 256 values The runtime data buffer can also contain one quality value for each variable to implement runtime annotations FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 313 Pie Chart Display type specifications Enter the following specifications as illustrated on the panel below To define variables for the pie chart click the mouse SELECT button on the Variables Definition button the Pie Chart Variable Display panel displays To define a legend click the mouse SELECT button on the Legend Box Definition button the Legend Display panel displays pe fb pie Pie Chart Display Number of Variables BE Legend Box Definition Variables Definition Pie Chart Shape Type Access Type Title Name Title Color Title Font Title re FED E EOS S26 SoU CEL DaCO ME t Inner Margin ME vari 40 Conv Factor MME va 35 PERUSE EE vars 25 r Shadow Thickness Eee E 0 A m Fill Direction Starting Angle Border Thickness Border Style Ellipse Dynamic E E HE o Counter Clockwise 180 p z HE v Shadow In Shadow Out 270 v Shadow Etched In v Shadow Etched Out j gt Entry Opti
110. Display Mode i Number of variables ploy Redisplay All Step Fraction _ 0 00 N N 1 X Axis Axis Color black Yea e X Axis Title i forestgreen Enter Reset Title Color g X Min Max 0 Oo Plot Display Entries Entry Option Description Show Tick amp Label Number of Variables Data Quality Click the mouse SELECT button to the right of this label to toggle between Yes and No selecting whether to display tick marks labels and titles Display only the value for this field is calculated after you define the variables on the Line Chart Variables Display panel Use this field to allow certain runtime annotations blinking or color changing see the Runtime annotations section earlier in this chapter Click the mouse SELECT button on the button to the right of this field to toggle between Yes and No The API programmer must know this setting in order to provide the correct number of variables FWDU ROVSING A S User Manual 15 August 1999 UM 114 002 ROV Display Types 7 265 FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 7 266 Display Types Entry Option Graph Title Title Color Backgnd Color Grid Type Color Size Plot Display Entries continued Description Enter the text for the graph title Sammi uses scalable fonts for Plot and Trend labels allowing titles and labels to be resized appropriately if the plot trend is zoomed Sammi automa
111. Drawing Tools Vag ee hal NY S Spline Tools With the Spline Tools you can draw a free form series of smooth splines that can include multiple bends in any direction You must construct a spline by clicking in the Drawing Area S b bkgd on a series of points that define the spline s path Splines can be either open ended or closed An open ended spline stops at the last point that you click A closed spline automatically joins the first and last points Set the line style defaults for the splines using the methods discussed earlier in this chapter If you choose any open splines that you draw may have arrowheads on either end of the spline You can also use the Line Orientation Control functions to help you draw straight horizontal vertical or diagonal paths for the spline FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 5 124 Drawing Methods To draw a spline 1 Click the mouse SELECT button on either the Open Spline Tool or Closed Spline Tool button 2 Inthe Drawing Area fb bkgd click the mouse SELECT button on the first point and on any intermediate points in the spline You must click on at least one intermediate point 3 Click the mouse OPTION button on the last point Drawing Splines When you select the last point the spline is drawn automatically using the default colors and line styles To change the spline s color or line style
112. ERO a match has been found For matching MTC entries the quality word is ANDed with the bit mask then shifted and the result compared to the value in the entry using the comparison type operation in the entry If the result is TRUE a match has been found For matching Index Comparison entries the bit mask for each attribute is ANDed with the quality word Each row of the table must follow the appropriate format shown on the previous page In each row the first value is the bit setting to be compared to the quality word Colors blink and appended characters are included only if they apply to a given bit setting otherwise they are left blank If the quality word has only one bit set LEX is used as the seventh and last entry in each row If multiple bits are set MTC is used as the seventh entry and is followed by a shift value a comparison operator EQ NE GT LT or LE and a value against which to compare For an explanation of masking and shifting see Appendix G For index comparison masks expressed in hexadecimal notion can be applied for each attribute foreground color fg_color background color bg_color character foreground color char_fg_color used by both characters character background color char_bg_color used by both characters character 1 char_1 first appended character character 2 char_2 second appended character blink no blink whether the DFD blinks or not SN BS SQ so The rtda dat file is set
113. Entry Option Menu Type Standard Menu Table Name Shadow Thickness Orientation Menu Display Entries Description Click the mouse SELECT button on one of the buttons in this box to select one of the following menu types Static Define the menu elements and commands using the Menu Definition panel which displays next if you select this type Standard Define a Standard Menu Table whose elements and commands are included in the command file See Appendix C for information on creating this table Dynamic An application sends the menu elements and commands for this type End Item of type fwdu_list_text Enter an integer for the number of pixels used for the shadow thickness a zero means no shadow Click the mouse SELECT button in this box to toggle between Vertical For each level stack the menu items one on top of each other in a single row Horizontal Place the menu items one after the other from left to right in a single row Static menu display type specifications If you select the Static Menu Type enter the following specifications in the Menu Definition panel You must complete one set of the following entries for each option on the menu you are creating FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 7 280 Display Types NOTE Menu fonts colors are controlled by default settings in the DFD Display panel MANDING SWOP4 p1 gt fANDING SWOP4 p1 gt m
114. FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Index app cmd 99 fb bkgd 39 40 86 89 90 local cmd 278 329 MAINMENU 34 168 MAINPANEL 168 session 191 no operatio 355 Pie Chart 17 Text 17 Toggle Buttons 17 gif 95 xbm 95 256 Xdefaults 88 xwd 95 A Active Layer Name 101 Add DFD 45 63 153 157 175 Add Point Tool 134 add dfd 38 add window 16 38 40 89 Alarm 23 185 201 Alarms 201 alarms 356 alarm silence 201 APP_CNF_OP_ENT 99 APP_OP_ENT 98 Application Programming Interface 13 18 22 Application Type 98 application type specifying 97 Applications 22 Arcs 104 Arrow Tool 141 arrowheads 105 arrowheads adding deleting 141 B Background Color 94 Background color 85 109 background image 103 background image importing 96 Background images 16 background images 94 background objects 33 Bar 23 25 183 204 Bar Graphs 17 Barchart 183 209 Barchart variables 217 Barchart Variables Display 211 Barcharts 17 Border styles 191 Box Tool 78 127 128 Browser 346 Button labels 243 Cc cancel amp delete 99 Cascading Menus 17 Change Date 87 change dfd 37 change dfd attribute 188 261 427 Chapter 6 92 Circle by Diameter Tool 79 Circles 104 Color Palette panel 38 106 Color Palette using 109 Color Selection Display panel 38 59 108 command line 30 35 Command Option List 308 composite 153 Composites Read 37 Composites Save 37
115. IF89a and XWD X WindowDump color image labels the image is scaled to fit the button dimensions No matter what the size of the graphic it is scaled to fit the area of the button However xbm graphics are not scaled An xbm graphic is centered on the button if it is smaller than the button the entire graphic is displayed if larger the graphic is cut off at the edges of the button sym files shall be stored in the MDB as FWDU_SYMBOL_BITMAP_BINARY End Item xbm files shall be stored in the MDB as FWDU_X_BITMAP_ BINARY End Item xwd files shall be stored in the MDB as FWDU_XWD_BINARY End Item gif files shall be stored in the MDB as FWDU_GIF_BINARY End Item NOTE Do not mix xbm graphics with gif or xwd graphics on the same button scaling and display problems can result API information The API data buffers for the General Action Button contain two variables a state variable and a sensitive variable The data type for either variable can be either short or long FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 7 244 Display Types The application can control the sensitivity of a button by setting the sensitive data field in the API data buffer On refresh cycles the dynamic field checks the sensitive field to determine if the button displays grayed out Buttons that are tagged as not sensitive cannot be selected An application cannot write state information to a universal toggle
116. In this method Sammi knows which row of the lookup table to use by converting the incoming data value to a row number For example if the converted value is 7 the eighth row of the lookup table is used row numbering starts with 0 The conversion process used to calculate this row number is more likely to be used by experienced programmers The conversion process and the two methods used for looking up the row number are described below Value conversion The incoming data value is first converted to an unsigned long integer The value is then shifted right by the specified number of shift bits as specified in the Symbol Table display panel discussed later in this section The right shifted value is then bitwise ANDed with the specified mask see Appendix G for a discussion of shifting and masking If the mask value is 0 the raw data value will not be shifted or masked For example if the Symbol From Status display type is created with a bit shift value of 0 no shift and a mask value of 7 hexadecimal and the incoming data value is 10 5 the value will be converted as follows Incoming data value 10 5 Converted to unsigned long integer 10 Shift zero bits 10 Bitwise ANDED with the mask value 2 NOTE Keep in mind that 10 decimal is 1010 binary 7 decimal is 0111 binary 1010 bit ANDed with 0111 is 0010 binary or 2 decimal If the incoming data value is a single or double precision floating point number the floating point va
117. Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 7 256 Display Types Graphic Data Field Sample Format sample_gdf The Graphic Data Field DFD is a display only DFD with which you can import and manipulate graphical images The Graphic Data Field DFD supports three graphical data file types X bitmap FWDU_X_BITMAP_BINARY End Items created by the X Window System bitmap utility or files that conform to the xbm format X Window Dump fwdu_xwd_binary End Items created with the X Window System xwd utility or files that conform to the xwd utility format e Graphical Interchange Format fwdu_gif_binary End Item created to conform with the CompuServe Graphical Interchange Format For the Graphic Data Field DFD you can e Specify the color and style for the border that surrounds the graphic e Specify a color for the scrollbars e Specify a three dimensional 3 D border e Specify margins e For the X bitmap format specify the foreground and background colors FWDU UM 114 002 ROV User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 257 Display type specifications Enter the following specifications as illustrated on the panel below fb gdf FE Graphics Data Field Display Graphic Data Field Display Entries Entry Option Description Image End Item of type FWDU_X_BITMAP_BINARY FWDU_XWD_BINARY or FWDU_GIF_BINARY Data Format This field is set automatic when you enter an End Item in the i
118. Line Thickness on the Current Line Style panel wherever possible Greater thicknesses tend to slow down the display especially for circles arcs ellipses and splines FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Drawing Methods CHAPTER 5 115 Arrowhead settings Any new objects with open ended lines or splines may have arrowheads attached to them automatically depending on the default settings You can always add arrowheads later see Adding deleting arrowheads later in this chapter If you know your format will require arrowheads you can set the arrowhead function now The default arrowhead settings are toggled on or off by clicking on the buttons at the bottom of the Current Line Style panel An indicator shows when the arrowhead options are turned on Select one of the three arrowhead options e Trailing arrow Turning on this option causes an arrowhead to appear at the starting point of any new open ended lines or splines e Leading arrow Turning on this option causes an arrowhead to appear at the ending point of any new open ended lines or splines e Both arrows Turning on both options causes the arrowheads to appear at both ends of any new open ended lines or splines NOTE This function works best with thin lines since the arrowhead drawing algorithm tends to distort the arrows on thick lines However you can manually draw arrowheads on thick lines using the Polyline Tool discussed later
119. NG A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 aeenoixe X Bitmapped and B 371 Scalable Fonts Sammi supports scalable vector fonts that can be selected either from the same option menus as the X bitmapped fonts or from the Current Font Selection panel These fonts allow you to resize and to rotate text in the same way as other static objects Only fixed pitch scalable fonts that is fonts that have fixed scale in their title can be used in the DFDs that allow scalable fonts These DFDs are Text Integer Real Formatted Numeric Bar Meter Gauge Tabular Equation Custom Time Alarm Text Table All other DFDs can use only standard X bitmapped fonts that is fonts without scale or fixed scale in their title and if you try to use a scalable font in these DFDs you will get an error message Be aware of the following issues concerning scalable vector fonts e Even though the scalable fonts can be scaled to any size using the Resize Tool the font will have an initial point size when you select it The initial point size is shown within parentheses as part of the font name e Some fonts include simplex duplex triplex and complex in their names This tells you how many parallel strokes are required to create the font Simplex takes a single stroke duplex takes two strokes triplex takes three strokes and complex takes more than three strokes e Any static text object created under Sammi Versio
120. ROVSING A S GSAF GWDU FWDU amp MMIS Development amp Maintenance FWDU User Manual Doc No UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 Date 15 August 1999 ii CLASSIFICATION CATEGORY 1 Config controlled for approval 1 Unclassified 2 Config controlled for review 2 Industry 3 Non config controlled for review 3 Restricted 4 For information 4 Confidential CONTRACT Contract number GSAF CD ROVI 34 Issuing organisation DASA Contractual date Work package number Programme GSAF Issue 2 April 1996 11QAP BM 11QAR BM amp 11QAS BM TITLE GSAF GWDU FWDU amp MMIS Development amp Maintenance FWDU User Manual Issue 2 2 INTERNAL REFERENCE NUMBER NUMBER Issue date 15 August 1999 R projects 114 FWDU UM Cover fm of pages NA of annexes NA SUMMARY The purpose of this document is to describe how the FWDU Software is used The manual is an edited version of the SAMMI User Manual 3 0 HOST SYSTEM HARDWARE MEDIA SOFTWARE EQUIPMENT LANGUAGE CODE Nature M O Nature and type DD Name FrameMaker for Windows ENG HP LaserJet Identification Version 5 1 1 KEY WORDS Prepared by Nazzareno Straccia FWDU Mission Database User Manual Approved by Poul Erik Holmdahl Authorised by Allan Mahler CCB date FWDU User Manual UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 DISTRIBUTION LIST iii USER SYMBOL o For information x For action
121. RT Annotations no Notify upon Select No FG Color lightsteelbluel BG Color Font courier bold 12 pt Save DFD Cancel DFD FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Dynamic Field Description CHAPTER 6 159 Depending on your entries the appropriate display type panel and or Data Access Description panel will appear as shown in the following illustrations Tj fb uni FE Universal Keys 7 Data Access Description Read Kevs Write Keys Number of Values EE Key Type HL Data Access End Item SSMB ROV2 SETUP INT_MEAS 001 End Item Enter Reset i fka FE Integer Display Integer Display Conversion Factor JE Maximum Value Minimum Value Decimal Display Format _ Hex Vv Octal Leading Zero No Data Type Long Shift Right WE Mask Hex ME Enter Reset FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 ROVSING A S User Manual 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 6 160 Dynamic Field Description 6 Fill in any additional panels using the guidelines in Chapter 7 Display Types and Chapter 8 Data Access Types 7 Click the mouse SELECT button on the Save DFD button on the DFD Display panel to save your entries If you wish you can add more dynamic fields by returning to step 2 8 To quit adding dynamic fields select another editing option If you do not click the mouse SELECT button on the Save DFD button before you click the mouse SELECT button on th
122. Sammi window being designed e The size of the final Sammi window corresponds exactly to the size of the fb bkgd and is controlled by the Width and Height entries in the Format Description panel for the format e The location of the window when it appears in Sammi is controlled by the X Location and Y Location entries in the Format Description panel Also each of the visual elements that you later add to this format will appear in the final Sammi window in the exact size that you draw them and at the exact location that you place them inside fb bkgd FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Format amp Layer Description CHAPTER 4 91 Window position X Y location Windows first appear in the Runtime Environment at the location defined in the X Location and Y Location fields in the Format Description panel You can change the location to any value desired e X Location is the desired horizontal distance in pixels from the left side of the screen to the left edge of the Sammi window e Y Location is the desired vertical distance in pixels from the top of the screen to the top edge of the Sammi window Keep in mind that these are initial values Because Sammi operates under the X Window System the Sammi operator can move windows to any position desired Also be careful not to position a format so far to the right or so far down that it will run off the edge of the screen For an explanation o
123. TE To create a function key a push button or menu option that sends one of the commands described above send the command to the logical server Sapp cmd Chapter 7 explains how to create push buttons and menu options that perform these commands See the System Administrator s Guide for information on defining function keys or ask your system administrator for help Entering a layer description You can create a Sammi format with layers As an example imagine a presentation consisting of several coordinated overlays that start with a simple diagram as you add overlays the diagram becomes more detailed Layers on a Sammi format work similarly except that instead of physically adding or removing overlays the Runtime Environment allows the user to turn layers on or off Each layer might contain one or more DFDs and or static graphic objects NOTE You do not always need layers If your format is uncluttered without layering do not select this option your format defaults to one layer and all objects that you draw or add will be on that layer FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 4 100 Format amp Layer Description You can define or modify the position in visibility decluttering and other attributes of the layers through the Layer Display panel shown on the next page To define the layers open an existing format or create a new format then select the Layers option from the Edi
124. Temp vs Time 80 0 80 0 f T e e m 70 0 el m 70 0 P p 60 0 60 0 10 15 20 25 30 1 00 1 30 2 00 2 30 3 00 Pressure Time Plot Trend Static Step Step Display with Step Fraction Set At 2 Entering 5 sets the two parts of the display to equal size Entering 33 sets the display to 1 3 for the Step Fraction and 2 3 for the static fraction Entering 0 causes the default of 20 Entering 1 0 causes entire display to refresh See the following illustrations for examples Temp vs Pressure Temp vs Time 80 0 80 0 T TE e e m 70 0 m 70 0 p P 60 0 60 0 to 15 20 25 30 1 00 1 30 2 00 2 30 3 00 Pressure Time Plot Trend Static Step Step Display with Step Fraction Set At 5 Temp vs Pressure Temp vs Time 80 0 80 0 T T q e e J m 70 0 A m 70 0 P p J 60 0 60 0 10 15 20 25 30 1 00 1 30 2 00 2 30 3 00 Pressure Time Plot Trend Static Step Step Display with Step Fraction Set At 33 For plots and trends set to Step Fraction the span does not represent the actual X range you will see Instead the actual X axis range that will be displayed is calculated by this formula User Manual 15 August 1999 FWDU UM 114 002 ROV ROVSING A S Display Types 7 263 range
125. This linking of dynamic fields to live data is called data access Sammi provides three major types of data access for a complete list refer to Chapter 8 e Local The dynamic field receives data from local sources such as other dynamic fields For example a General Action Button dynamic field might be designed to send a message to a Text dynamic field in the same format or other formats on other workstations running Sammi e Time The dynamic field gets the current time and or date from the system clock This is only used with the Custom Time dynamic field e Universal The dynamic field is linked to a remote source via the Sammi Application Programming Interface API The FWDU supports the attachment of by having a End Item buttons whenever a data source can be attached The type of the end item is read automatically from the Mission Database Application MDB When attaching an End Item a browser can be opened so that the user can select valid End Items which are valid in the context For each dynamic filed different sets of End Items can be attached How to attach the End Items is described together with each dynamic field Application Programming Interface API Most computer programs are designed to work with a certain set of data that the program itself builds and maintains Sammi is different however because it accesses data from other sources that may exist in a wide variety of locations on a network including Data
126. U FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 7 222 Display Types Custom Time Sample Format ndbm 08 contains a Custom Time DFD The Custom Time display type displays the time and or date The display can be completely customized to include dates and times mixed with words or punctuation in any combination For example Format H M o S o d o b o Y Result 20 30 04 05 Apr 1991 or Format The time is l M p Z on A e 0 y Result The time is 2 30 p m CST on Thursday 11 1 90 Special insertion codes beginning with a percent sign are used to indicate variable time and date values that the computer s operating system must insert automatically Insertion codes are defined later in this section Based on the codes you use Sammi automatically inserts the correct date and time along with standard names or abbreviations for the day of the week Friday Fri month April Apr and time zones EASTERN EST You can change these to any spelling or foreign language desired by editing the files named timnames dat and timzones dat in the SFWDU 1ib directory Instructions for editing these files are described in Chapter 7 of the System Administrator s Guide The inserted time and date values are all calculated from a single integer value that represents the number of seconds elapsed since January 1 1970 Greenwich Mean Time This value can be provided by the
127. UP VALCLS red white SSMB ROV2 SETUP VAL TRANS orange white SSMB ROV2 SETUP VAL TRANL green white ot 4 6 SSMB ROV2 SETUP VAL TRAN2 yellow white 8 0 SSMB ROV2 SETUP VAL OPN blue white A The fwdu_editor checks that the entered Pathnames are valid Sammi checks which symbol to display by comparing the incoming data value to the lookup table The incoming data value can be a short integer a long integer a single precision floating point value or a double precision floating point value The examples below show two different formats that you can use to create the lookup table Value Lookup Method SYMBOL value lookup 0 0 valcls red white blink 0 25 valtran3 orange white 0 50 valtran2 magenta white 0 75 valtranli magenta lightgray 1 00 valopn navyblue aquamarine FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Display Types CHAPTER 7 193 Index Lookup Method SYMBOL index lookup valcls red white valtran3 orange white valtran2 magenta white blink valtranl magenta lightgray valopn navyblue aquamarine Notice that both examples have a title line indicating the lookup method being used value lookup or index lookup The title line is followed by the names of symbol bitmap files to be used in quotation marks and the corresponding foreground background colors to be used with each Enable the blinking feature on any
128. Using Sammi to test the format eeeeseeeeseeeeeteees 54 Lesson 3 Modifying the format ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 54 Lesson 1 Building a format ccccceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeees 55 Part 1 Starting the FWDU Format Editor cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 55 Cr ating a format i Terane a aiea ARE a enari aAA ces 56 Entering data in the Format Description pane cccceeeeeeees 57 Part 2 Setting colors and adding text labels eeeeeeeeeeeeees 59 Setting default colors fe rl Meee i See te Se ee Ae 59 Setting WS Til MANGIN nian a 60 POG ING NORE Ae E Gere eee BAe 60 Part 3 Changing the font style 0 0 ee eeecceeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeetseeeeeeeeeees 62 Part 4 Creating a Real Dynamic Field Definition DFD ceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 63 Entering data on the DFD Display panel eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeees 64 The Real Display Panelhccvecccsecse vossictexecersctes teexees testers reeetren 65 Attaching MDB End Items as Data Sources 000eeeeseeeeeees 66 Completing the data entry process for the Real DFD 67 Part 5 Creating a Meter Dynamic Field Definition DFD eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 68 Entering data on the DFD Display Panel ccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 69 Entering data on the Meter Display Panel
129. WDU_HELP_TEXT FWDU_SYMBOL_TABLE_TEXT FWDU_DYNAMIC_OBJECT_TABLE_TEXT FWDU_LIST_TEXT FWDU_CONVERSION_TEXT FWDU_DATA_DEF_RECORD_TEXT or FWDU_EQUIPMENT_CONSTRAINTS_TEXT you need to use the FWDU Text Editor See chapter The FWDU Text Editor on page 365 After a brief pause the Format Editor Control panel appears as shown below This panel has from top to bottom amain menu e push buttons e a message line and acommand line fb cmnd none CDU SYNOPTIC_MODE Read Write Edit View Composites Dynamic Fields Style Help Drawing Tools ayele t gt ez aame ae Ae SSj 3 S T ei H FWDU V3 E KINESIX Each item on the main menu has an associated pull down menu which may or may not have an associated cascading menu All format level commands most editing commands and other global commands are found on these menus The push buttons are used to draw edit and manipulate static graphical objects in the Drawing Area The message line displays system prompts warnings and general information The command line is where you enter any command that is not available from the menus FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Getting Started 2 31 The Format Editor is now started and ready to use Most Format Editor operations are discussed later in this chapter under General guidelines for using the Format Editor But first let s take a quick tour of the F
130. You can also use commercial paint software to retouch scanned images before importing them into the Format Editor Retouching is used to clean up unwanted features and blemishes or add desired features such as thicker lines If you do not have the proper equipment to do this consider using a service bureau that specializes in computer graphics typography or desktop publishing Many service bureaus have not only the proper equipment in house but also the expertise to retouch scanned images Creating your own bitmapped images You can produce very small graphic symbols or icons using an X bitmap editor Most workstations running the X Window System provide a bitmap editor utility that appears when you enter the bitmap command consult your X Window System manual for the command syntax Most such bitmap editors provide rudimentary drawing or painting tools that can be used to create simple shapes and designs For complex images however you should use a FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 4 96 Format amp Layer Description professional paint program then convert the resulting file to xbm format using a graphics file conversion utility Importing the background image Enter the following in the Format Description panel 1 Select your the image using the End Item button next to the Image field and under the Window Background text 2 The type is automatically set so it match
131. a The Formatted Numeric display type converts formats data from an application prior to displaying it Once the data is displayed in one of these dynamic fields the Sammi user can click the mouse SELECT button on the dynamic field to display the data using the next conversion in the file for the type of data displayed This process repeats itself until the end of the conversion file is reached when Sammi recycles to the top of the file To create a FWDU_CONVERSION_TEXT End Item you have to e Create a FWDU_CONVERSION_TEXT End Item in the MDB via I MDB Invoke the End Item Edit the End Item in the fwdu_editor e Save the End Item in the MDB Now you can reference the End Item from the FWDU The FWDU_CONVERSION_TEXT file entries consist of C language format strings for the data followed by the conversion equation for the data For information on the equation language see the Equation display type and Appendix I The following example is an entry in the conversion FWDU_CONVERSION_TEXT file to convert incoming data defined using the symbol inches to centimeters meters and feet WS Le an WSL fE 12 o ZLE cm MA AZDAN OLE m TA 0254 API information The runtime data buffer for the Formatted Numeric display type must contain a minimum of two values the current value to be converted and the index into the FWDU_CONVERSION_TEXT file where the conversion is located The first entry is always the
132. a Border Width EU Enter Border Style v Shadowin Shadow Etched In Shadow Out v Shadow Etched Out Reset Threshold Markers Value Show Color High High hey Medium High Yes CE Low High ATE ves High Low ves Bodiam En ves CO Low Low E O es Threshold Coloring Mode Left Center Right 1 Click the mouse SELECT button in the box to the right of Show Value to toggle to Yes This tells Sammi to display the numeric value that is represented on the meter in digital from below the meter 2 Enter Temp deg F in the Label This provides a label for the meter when it appears in the Runtime Environment NOTE As previously described the type of the meter is automatically determined FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Learning the Format Editor 3 71 3 Click the mouse SELECT button in the box to the right of Show Ticks to toggle to Yes This tells Sammi to display the tick marks on the meter All other entries on this panel are acceptable however you may select new colors for the meter dial scale etc from pop up option lists that appear when you click the mouse OPTION button in the appropriate boxes WARNING Do NOT click on the Save DFD or Cancel DFD button yet Completing the data entry process for the Meter DFD Now move the cursor to the DFD Display panel and 1 Enter an End Item on the Data Access Description Panel as described in section Attaching MDB End Ite
133. able Display type specifications Along with creating the desired symbols and the necessary lookup table you must fill in the Symbol From Status Display panel Enter the following specifications as illustrated below fb sfs FE Symbol Table Display Symbol From Status Display Border Thickness EE i Symbol Thi Name SunOS Sa Ealen Enter Table Access Direct Index Reset Indirect List LEE EEEELE CE Shift Right E Mask Hex 0000 Data Type Short Float Long Double Border Color black Border Style Shadow In Shadow Etched In v Shadow Out v Shadow Etched Out _ Label String Label Label Color wae Label Font FA H x A FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 7 340 Display Types Symbol From Status Display Entries Entry Option Symbol Tbl Name Indirect List Indirect index lookup only Mask Hex Direct index lookup only Shift Right Direct index lookup only Data Type Border Color Description End Item of type fwdu_symbol_table_text A valid table name must be supplied before saving Enter the list of row numbers to be looked up for final converted values of 0 through 7 as described in the Lookup tables and indexing section earlier in this chapter Enter the hexadecimal value that is to be bitwise ANDed with the right shifted data value If Mask is 0 the incoming data value will not be shif
134. access a database and call up a list of persons to be notified about the alarm condition Communication between Sammi and remote data sources is handled through the Application Programming Interface API For this reason you will need to coordinate the format design process closely with API programmers to make sure all of your planned data display and control requirements can be met Sammi Instruments input to Sammi Dynamic Application Field commands to from Sammi Local Area Network Dynamic Field read write access Typical Sammi Input Output FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Getting Started 2 23 Display methods and types Once you know what type of data should be displayed you must decide the best way to display it The Format Editor provides several different methods for displaying data Each is accomplished by selecting the appropriate display type when you are setting up the dynamic field for that data in the Format Editor e Display types Real Text Integer Custom Time and Tabular You can create data fields that allow user entries and or display of remote data Any data displayed is shown literally without being converted or interpreted For example if the incoming data value is 12 the number 12 is displayed 12 12 You can also provide input output access to ASCII text data with the Text Browser Da
135. actual layout of a FWDU_LIST_TEXT FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 APPENDIX C 378 Standard Command File Examples The following are examples of FWDU_LIST_TEXT s Note that all End Item pathnames are in the example are written as MDB PATH These pathnames should be valid paths in the MDB and should be of type FWDU_SYNOPTIC_DISPLAY The pathname is checked when the FWDU_LIST_TEXT is saved Test table to add formats LIST_TABLE sample_eqn Select list item text record WSloOGal emd tM ww ily Item target record add win MDB PATH sample_eqn End Item path in the MDB sample_font Select list command record Slocal ema mm ary Item target record add win MDB PATH sample_font End Item path in the MDB sample_color Select list command record WS I cal cma Wow Mym Item target record add win MDB PATH sample_color End Item path in the MDB Test table to delete formats LIST_TABLE sample_eqn Select list item text record Slocal emd Mw Mm wyn Item target record del win MDB PATH sample_eqn End Item path in the MDB sample_font Select list command record WS Local emam weW mM mym Item target record del win MDB PATH sample_font End Item path in the MDB sample_colo
136. ained earlier For use with an application you can pass the value entered here to the application along with a text string This value can be interpreted by the application FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 311 Pie Chart Sample Format sample_piechart The Pie Chart display type creates a view only pie chart representation of real numbers and or integers see the illustration below A single Pie Chart DFD can have up to 256 slices but to preserve readability you should probably use no more than ten or twelve Sammi scales the pie chart automatically to fit the area covered by a bounding box that encompasses the pie chart and if specified its title and legend Pie Chart Title Var 1 45 Var 2 30 Mm Var 3 25 Notes This is an example of a pie chart FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 7 312 Display Types For the Pie Chart display type you can e Create a title optional e Choose the colors and the fonts for titles and labels e Create borders and margins inside of borders e Create a legend that may consist of atitle optional labels for each variable optional an area in which to display the digital value for each variable optional patches of color texture that relate the variables to the pie pieces optional notes optional e
137. albcdefohijhlmnopgrstuuuny01 23456789 abedefghijklmnopgrstubirxy20123456789 abcdefghijkiumnoparstuvwxy30123456789 abcdefghijkImnoparstuvwxyz0123456 789 abcdef ghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz0125456789 FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 APPENDIX B 374 X Bitmapped and Scalable Fonts abcdefghijkImnopgqrstuvwxyz0 123456789 abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz0123456789 abcdefghijklimnopqrstuvwxyz0123456789 abedefghijhklmnopgrsiuuwayz0 123456789 albcdefghijhlmnongrinuwzy 01 23456789 abedefghiiklnmopgratuhmxygz0123456789 upcoel Nl emnmhdretnnmnmzAOrS ZT e2 abecdefghijkimnoparstuvwxyz0123456789 CSVOGCHESIOsS zatuNarpyonmlaAjidpjs6zdn abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyZ0125456789 abedefghijkimnoparstuvwxyz0123456789 abcdefghijkIlmnoparstuvwxyz0123456 8 FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 APPENDIX C Standard Command File C 375 This appendix contains an example of a Standard Command file test_list cmd This file holds the information on Standard Select Lists and when the Runtime Environment is started is read into cache memory that has been allocated by s2_event The End Items within current CCU CDU of type FWDU_LIST_TEXT are extracted from the MDB at start up so the SAMMI runtime system are aware of the existents of cmd files The included cmd files are located in FWDU_HOME lib NOTE When entering text in the file DO NOT place a blank space in the first column
138. alue which is compared to the first field to find the upper range limit is always vO The range limits column 1 can never be substituted changed by the data source an application FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 7 228 Display Types The following sample file shows how value substitution can be used to allow the application to directly control the foreground colors of the dynamic object Assuming the data server is designed to send data to this dynamic field in the form of foreground color values with varying stipple patterns Sammi inserts these values atv1 and v2 in the table Sammi compares the incoming vO value to the first value in each row until it finds one greater than or equal to the incoming data value then uses the display properties in that row Again the numbers below the sample value substitution table reference the description of fields which follows The variable number references its occurrence as a variable not its relative column position Also a column s values can mix variables and non changing elements and the non changing elements can mix specific and default assigned with the Drawing Tools values The numbers on the bottom row in the following table represent field numbers value_substitution 10 0 vl greennoblinkO v20 3 0 d d d d d d oO 20 0 vl greennoblnkd v2 1 2 ad d dod d 25 30 0 vl red blinkd d Q 1 4 1251254 d d a 50 40 0 vl blue blink2 2
139. alue 89 transient session 362 Transparent buttons 240 Trend 23 26 169 183 Trends 17 260 U Undo 105 129 145 152 ungroup 104 Ungroup Tool 132 153 Ungrouping Tool 82 Universal 18 171 355 358 universal 170 update dfd 37 user entry 187 V Value conversion 194 Value Lookup Method 352 Value Substitution 227 Value Lookup Method 192 Vector fonts 170 View DFDs 45 View Back 37 View Front 37 View Redisplay 37 View View DFDs 37 Visible 101 Visible buttons 240 Ww Window Background 58 90 Window color 109 Window Control 41 58 Window size 91 Windows 16 WM Class 88 Write Key 358 write format 36 write part 37 X X Location 91 X Window System 15 XWD 243 Y Y Location 91 Z Zoom 105 261 zoom 29 323 Zoom Box 40 Zoom Format 40 Zoom In 40 Zoom Out 40 Zoompad 40 FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999
140. ame Variable Position WE Foreground Color Me l ismi Background Color i Enter Reset Dismiss an sera lor SSS eS TSA End Item To add a variable click on the Add Variable button then enter information for the variable in the appropriate boxes Once you have entered information for a variable either press the RETURN key or click the mouse SELECT button on the Enter button There are two ways to add a variable to the middle of an existing list of variables e Click the mouse SELECT button on the variable name in the Variables List just above where you want to add a new variable then click the mouse SELECT button on the Add Variable button e Click the mouse SELECT button on the Add Variable button Type a new value in the Variable Position field representing the location to which you want the new variable When you press the RETURN key or click the mouse SELECT button on the Enter button the variable is repositioned In either case the Variable Position field for all variables that follow the one that you add are automatically updated the Variable List is sorted in Variable Position order To change a variable click the mouse SELECT button on the name in the Variables List make your changes in the appropriate fields To delete a variable click the mouse SELECT button on the name in the Variables List Then click the mouse SELECT button on the Delete Variable button If you click the mouse SELECT button on the Delete Variable but
141. an be used to activate Sammi functions or system functions as well as to reflect their current state Provide different button types that can be used to activate Sammi functions or system functions These buttons can also have different states Provide mutually exclusive or non mutually exclusive groupings of buttons that can be used to activate Sammi functions or system functions Provide a menu bar or pop up menu that activates Sammi functions or system functions Provide a pop up option list to allow user entries without keyboard input required Use This Display Type Slider sample_slider Trend sample_trend Plot sample_plot Object Icon sample_icon General Action Buttons sample_gabs General Action Button Groupings sample_gabutton Menu sample_menu Option List sample_menu 20 0 F r Ta w0 a04 e oo 4 ono lo ts Pressure vs Flow amp Temp start stop exit Pop Up Menu start stop exit Menu Bar Provide a scrollbar for scrolling Scrollbar other dynamic fields ndbm01 1 e a 341 0 12 3 y FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Getting Started 2 27 Helpful
142. an enter the number of desired values for the dynamic field to accept Enter this information in the Local Data Access Description panel shown below Local Data Access Description Number of Values xg Enter Reset FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manua ROVSING A S 15 August 19991 Data Access Types CHAPTER 8 357 NOP No operation NOP is primarily used by the display types General Action Buttons GABs and GAB Button Group For details refer to the relevant section on each display type in Chapter 7 Formats can be transferred between platforms or from an earlier release of Sammi to the latest one A conversion utility fmt_unload is used on the original platform or Sammi release to create an ASCII format file from a format This file can be moved to the target platform or new Sammi release using another conversion utility When fmt_load reads an ASCII format file that contains an obsolete or unknown data access type for a dynamic field it sets the type as NOP You can change NOP to another data type if necessary Time This data type is used only by dynamic fields that use the Custom Time display type The access type links the dynamic field to the system clock which provides the time in the form of an integer value This value is the number of seconds since midnight Greenwich Mean Time of January 1 1970 The number is used internally by the Custom Time Display Object to calculate and display th
143. an use this man ali sismica cpbebibctece Ee Ni 12 How to use this manual ince cll Wa ates aye ds aca ake eaten 14 Basics of the Format EGUOP Mice aos Seas eeercaet Aa ciate uau 14 WVIMGQWS aii he ale Bae ated tt NS et ites aa elas tee 16 FORMAIS se te iw ehh dis i vine cd se vo cc case tee pats it ce ese eee 16 DAC COMPONGING ecu terena tela E EA esse EAO EEEE AAE EEEN Ta 16 Dynamic components iiaiai edena nr a naaide ni rint ie 16 Data access types 2c2 thrice bndstidiiceet winds ceiaceeh a i Oe adadtelieabee ened 18 Application Programming Interface API ccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 18 For more information et teh ts i ttt el ee nk tee ated Lael Sle 20 Planning theinterfacE nin aie ees tee coe eas 21 Getting Started 21 Data display Control functions 2 20 00 ceeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 22 Display methods and types c cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeees 23 Helpful presentation aids ccecceeceeeeeeseeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 27 Creating a user friendly interface ceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 28 Prototyping review cycles ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeneneeeneeeseeeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeees 29 Formatnaming tracking cs cise soso cteeck ie e a a ni 29 Starting the FWDU Format Editor lt s s cnwa acu val wa ay 30 A quick tour of the Format Editor ccc cesta eed hee Sheet etalk 31 Using the keyboard cccceeceeeseccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeee
144. and height must be entered in pixels as explained in Appendix E The fb bkgd format resizes automatically according to the size of the Width and Height when you click on OK at the bottom of the Format Description panel or when you press the RETURN key on the keyboard If you press the RETURN key the Format Description panel remains on the screen You can enter an initial size and a maximum size for both Width and Height If you enter only an initial or only a maximum size the fb bkgd_ resizes to the size entered If you enter both the fb bkgd resizes to the maximum size If you enter a maximum size less than an initial size then the initial size will become equal to the maximum size These two entries control the operation of the window when it appears in the Runtime Environment Since the Sammi user will be able to resize any window the initial size you specify using the Format Editor is the size of the window when it first appears in the Runtime Environment The maximum size is used to provide an upper limit for user resizing The window cannot display anything larger even if it is resized larger by the Sammi user In the Format Editor the format to be modified initially appears at the maximum size but in Sammi Runtime the format will be displayed using the minimum width and height assuming they are smaller than the maximum and scrollbars will appear Restricting access security You can restrict access to individual Sam
145. anger Limits Low Value FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 7 217 Display Types Barchart Display Entries continued Entry Option Description Label Fill Color Either enter a color for the label and bar for each selected threshold or click the mouse OPTION button in the box under this label to display an option list Then click the mouse SELECT button on the desired color name Barchart variables display type specifications To enter legend variables click on the Variables Definition button of the Barchart Display panel Enter the following specifications as illustrated on the panel below fb bar var FE Bar Display Bar Chart Variables Display ae fy Color r Digital bg Color Add Variable Delete Variable i Fill Style Limits Variables List EJIL vi Fill Pattern v2 sees at J aoa EN 7 es maa E Be 83 6 S w m m m ER variable Name C __ Bar Position E Foreground Color Enter Reset Dismiss Background Color pe Data Access End Item E SSMB ROV2 SETUP UINT MEAS 001 Baer Seer Prope nee K To add a variable click on the Add Variable button then enter information for the variable in the appropriate fields Once you have entered information for a variable either press the Return key or click the mouse SELECT button on the Enter button to save your entries There are two ways to add a variable to
146. art of a dynamic field display DFD type and are called static objects You can use static objects to create Borders dividers and boxes that delimit different areas of the format e Titles and labels those not provided by DFDs e Organizational diagrams e Flow charts and flow symbols e Process flow indicators e Any other visual element not provided by the background image or dynamic fields DFDs Once drawn you can then manipulate static objects move copy stack flip rotate bend or fill them with colors and patterns Once integrated into Sammi they become part of the static background on which dynamic components are overlaid Groups of static objects can also be converted to dynamic objects using the Dynamic Object display type discussed in Chapter 7 Display Types This allows you to draw visual elements not provided through Sammi s dynamic object library and use them to represent data For example you can create a tank that shows a fill level Static objects are an integral part of the format and are stored in the format along with dynamic fields You can save formats with static objects and text or formats only with dynamic fields to use as templates for future formats This function saves time because you can borrow visual elements from past drawings instead of redrawing them each time you create a new format Later in this chapter you will learn how to store frequently used groups of DFDs and static objects so t
147. as a whole number integer with units that may vary depending on the refresh type The two major types of data refresh are discussed below e Poll method This method is used with API applications based on the client server model The dynamic field is updated at regular intervals by Sammi at the selected refresh rate The refresh rate for this method is always calibrated in seconds and the minimum rate is 1 one second e Stream method This method is used with API applications based on the peer to peer model The dynamic field is updated by the API The refresh rate for this type may be interpreted and used by the application if desired If you do not know which method to use ask your API programmer or system administrator for help Defining size and position If you have planned correctly see Chapter 2 Planning the interface you should already know the exact size and position of each dynamic field you want in the format Each of the DFDs you add to a format will appear in the final Sammi window in the exact size and position that you specify here Define the size of a DFD one of two ways e Enter the dimensions in the Width and Height fields of the DFD Display panel On this panel the values to the left of the two lines Il are measured in characters and the values to the right are in pixels When entering values in the Width and Height fields enter the size in either characters or pixels not both as the Format Editor calculate
148. at can cause problems at runtime The grid is drawn only to the maximum size of the format even if you Zoom Out on the format This means that sometimes you will not have a grid on the bottom top and or sides of the Drawing Area If you zoom pan and resize the Drawing Area several times especially if the aspect ratio is substantially distorted the cursor coordinates shown in the message line of the Format Editor Control panel may stop updating because the cursor is beyond the limits of the maximum size of the format See Note 1 above on increasing the maximum size FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 2 42 Getting Started 4 The Reset Maximum option of the pop up menu resets the Drawing Area to the maximum size values in the maximum fields of the Window Control section on the Format Description panel of the format This is the default when a format is edited in the Format Editor 5 The Reset Initial option on the pop up menu resets the Drawing Area to the initial size values in the initial fields of the Window Control section on the Format Description panel of the format This is the default when a format is displayed in the Runtime Environment 6 The Full View option on the pop up menu scales the entire format to fit within the current size of the Drawing Area with the aspect ratio maintained 7 Any bitmap and or GIF images on the format do not scale Other visual elements
149. ate a library of parts with interconnecting segments all drawing should be done with Snap on with a Snap spacing of n pixels where n 1 2 5 10 this forces all points endpoints circle centers vertices to be on a Sammi pixel boundary Then lines will always connect properly even if you zoom To set up and control the Snap and Grid functions 1 Select the Snap Grid option from the Styles menu on the Format Editor Control panel The Current Spacing panel appears Current Spacing Display Snap spacing in pixels 10 Grid spacing in pixels 20 OK Cancel Current Spacing Panel 2 Inthe Current Spacing panel enter the desired values for Grid and Snap spacing in pixels NOTE You can set the Grid and Snap spacing independently of each other but the Grid Value must always be an even multiple of the Snap Value 3 Click on the OK button with the mouse SELECT button to close the Current Spacing panel To close the pop up panel without making changes click the mouse SELECT button on the Cancel button FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 5 108 Drawing Methods Turning the Snap and Grid functions on and off Once you have set the Snap and Grid spacing you can turn the Snap and Grid functions on and off by pointing to and clicking the mouse SELECT button on Snap and Grid buttons on the far right of Format Editor Control pane
150. atically determine whether the data requires scrollbars and add them You can also specify the Text Browser as a pop up display type API information Dynamic browsers set with a Universal data access type support two data processing methods for the data sent to it by an application Standard and Special With the Standard method data is not processed before the browser displays it Line feed characters should be inserted in the data by the application wherever line breaks are desired The Dynamic Browser Max Characters on the Text Browser Data Input Output Field Display panel should be set to represent the maximum number of characters to be sent to the browser with line feeds included Special is included only for backwards compatability with applications developed to support browsers in Release 2 0 of Sammi FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 347 Display type specifications Enter the following specifications as illustrated in the panel below Text Browser Data Input Output Field Display File Name PODAR Yas Type Static Standard Timeout secs 0 i Dynamic Line Display Single e5 Label optional Title Manse a tae Label Font JAN Label Color lightsteelblue Border Width 3 Border Style Shadow In Shadow Etched In aad Shadow Out Shado
151. atio buttons to the left of the Zoompad to magnify or demagnify the Drawing Area The ratio buttons are cumulative that is if you press the 2 1 button twice you have effectively magnified the Drawing Area to 4 to 1 The ratio buttons are 2 1 Magnify the outlined area of the format by two times 4 1 Magnify the outlined area of the format by four times 8 1 Magnify the outlined area of the format by eight times 1 2 Shrink the outlined area of the format to half its current size 1 4 Shrink the outlined area of the format to one fourth it current size 1 8 Shrink the outlined area of the format to one eighth its current size Full Return the format to its regular size 1 1 Notes on panning and zooming You should be aware of the following issues in panning and zooming NOTE To change either the maximum or the initial size of a format change the initial and maximum fields in the Windows Control section of the Format Description panel This is accessed by choosing the option Attributes under File on fb cmd window See Chapter 4 for information on these fields If you resize the format using the window manager and add objects to the area outside the maxi mum size your changes will not be visible unless you increase the maximum fields under height and width of the Window Control section on the Format Description panel If you use the area outside the maximum size you are creating invisible objects and DFDs th
152. ault Fill Cir ummm VS Ge A O deg v Default Color Fill Mode Dynamic wv Multiple __Enter _ Reset Threshold Ref Middle Bar Display Entries Entry Option Description Show Value Select whether the incoming data value displays near the bar by clicking the mouse SELECT button in the box to the right of this field to toggle between Yes and No Decimal Dgt If you selected Yes for Show Value enter the number of digits to be included to the right of the decimal point in the displayed value for real numbers only Min Value Read only Data is automatically taken from measurement End Item when associating measurement End Item Data is Engineering Range Low Value Max Value Read only Data is automatically taken from measurement end item when associating measurement end item Data is Engineering Range High Value If a measurement end item is attached you can choose from the measurement End Item s FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 7 206 Display Types nominal limit set range 1 5 by pressing Limits button The following window appears Limits_popup Ea ia all Conv Factor Enter the conversion code for incoming data see Appendix F for details Data Type Read only Data is automatically taken from measurement End Item when associating measurement end item Hi Lo Marks Indicate whether high low value markers will display by and clicking the
153. ay be kept or automatically deleted depending on which mouse button you use to select the object Clicking the mouse OPTION button removes the original object Clicking the mouse SELECT button leaves the original FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Drawing Methods CHAPTER 5 139 NOTE You can rotate and flip text of X bitmapped fonts and dynamic objects only as part of a group When a group containing this type of text or dynamic objects is rotated it is moved to a new location calculated by rotating centers around the rotation point or pick location When this group is flipped or mirrored the bitmapped text or dynamic objects are simply moved However if you flip rotate or mirror text in a scalable vector font the text actually flips rotates or mirrors the original text The four Mirror Tool buttons are grouped together on the far right in the second row of the Format Editor Control panel These tools from left to right allow you to Fli Fli srap horizontally vertically Flip objects vertically Rotate objects counterclockwise Flip objects horizontally Rotate counter clockwise Mirror Tools Rotate objects clockwise To create a flipped or rotated mirror image l Click with the mouse SELECT button on one of the Mirror Tool buttons on the Format Editor Control panel Rotate clockwise
154. bases e Other applications On line instruments Since the variety and location of data sources is so diverse Sammi is designed to interface to each individual installation using the optional Application Programming Interface API a set of standard functions designed to handle communication between Sammi and remote data sources Part of the API however must be modified by a computer programmer experienced in C language Different applications can be set up to handle data transfer to and from Sammi and remote processes For example one API data server might provide access to NDBM databases and another to SQL databases and an API application could be written to channel the flow of data from on line instruments into certain Sammi windows FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 Welcome to the Format Editor 1 19 NOTE The LAPAP software provides a data server which is called the MCD The log ical server name is however FWDU_SERVER A preview data server is pro vided with the FWDU so that synoptic displays can be previewed This data server just provides the displays with random data inside the provided limits FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Welcome to the Format Editor 1 20 For more information If you need more information about Sammi and the Format Editor please consult these related manuals available from Kinesix e System Administrator
155. be displayed the only part of the image that seems to change is the moving item For motion on an object such as an aircraft you would move the same graphic to a new set of coordinates You can create or copy and modify the symbols using a bitmap editor program capable of producing an X bitmap file most X Window System workstations have generic bitmap editors Each symbol must be saved as a separate file with a sym suffix and stored ina SSammi data directory as specified by SAM2_DATAFILE either in your own environment or in the start_sammi script For graphics that will placed on top of each other you should make the graphics the same size You must also create a lookup table that incoming data values are compared to which then displays a certain graphic You can create this file with any text editor add the extension safs to the file name when you save Please refer to Appendix L for a sample file Although similar to the Symbol Table display type the Object Icon display type is user selectable and e Flashes each time it is selected regardless of its select type e Can be one of three select types Single The command associated with the On selection is sent whenever the user clicks the mouse SELECT button on the Object Icon Toggle The command sent reflects the state of the Object Icon display type that is each time the server sends the Object Icon a new value the state is set according to the value received If
156. ble space Wrapping continues as often as necessary until all the buttons are laid out In the vertical dimension columns buttons are set to the same width in the horizontal dimension rows buttons are set to the same length or height Each button s position in the major dimension is left unaltered for example the y coordinate is left unchanged when Horizontal Orientation is No its position in the minor dimension is set to the same value as the greatest button in that particular row or column The position in the minor dimension of any particular row or column is independent of all other rows and columns FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 7 254 Display Types General Action Button Grouping Display Entries continued Entry Option Description Border Style For a border width greater than zero select a border style by clicking the mouse SELECT button on one of the following buttons in the box to the right of this label Shadow In Shadow Out Shadow Etched In Shadow Etched Out Border Width Enter an integer for the width in pixels of the border Border Color For a border width greater than zero either enter a border color or select the border color by clicking the mouse OPTION button in the box to the right of Border Color to display a list of choices FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 255 FWDU UM 114 002 ROV
157. block DDR name Title Foreground color Column header block Background color Foreground color lightsteelblue Background color lightsteelblue Title column3 columin L amp Suppress header No item 1 100 TIR pa e ee rhe na item 2 2 00 Soporan item 3 3 00 Shodow width 3 Scrollbar block Scrollbar color item n n 00 black 4 gt SS Scrollbar trough color lightsteelblue Column header format long val 12 d float val 12 2f ascii val 8 s Enter Reset Tabular Display Entries Entry Option Description Title block Title optional If you want a title for the output enter the text string Foreground color If you enter a title either enter the foreground color or click the mouse OPTION button in this box to display a list of choices Background color If you enter a title either enter the background color or click the mouse OPTION button in this box to display a list of choices DDR name Enter the record name defined in the Data Definition Record file discussed earlier in this section Column header block Foreground color Either enter the foreground color or click the mouse OPTION button in this box to display a list of choices Background color Either enter the background color or click the mouse OPTION button in this box to display a list of choices FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 7 344 Display Types Tabular Display Entries continued Entry Op
158. blue white The editor has two buttons e Save for storing the current text in the mission database e Quit for closing the current FWDU Text Editor session Text Editor Operations The following describes how to use the text editor s functionality FWDU UM 144 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 9 366 FWDU Text Editor Invoke To start the editor you have to invoke it from the I_MDB Se the IMDB manuals for details Quit To terminate the current session then press on the Quit button This terminates the current session Save When a text needs to be saved to the mission database then simple press on the Save button Pressing Save can result in an error message Read the message and proceed according to the recommend action Hints and Tricks When using the editor you can use the following functionality Cut Paste You can use the standard operating system copy cut and paste The buttons for this are located on the left side of the keyboard Highlight the text you want to cut or paste and then press on the wanted key Place the cursor and paste the text You can also combine this with other tools that support the operating system cut and paste functionality Save As There is no Save As functionality built into the editor Instead of Save As you can take a copy of the wanted End Item in the I_MDB and then invoke the copy Undo If you do not want to save a text you just have modified
159. cale values enter the number of digits to display after the decimal point for the numbers on the scale Select whether to display tick marks on the scale by clicking the mouse SELECT button in the box to the right of this field to toggle between Yes and No If displaying tick marks either enter a color or select a color by clicking the mouse OPTION button in this box to display a list of options If you want a label for this meter enter the text string If you enter a label either enter a color or select a color by clicking the mouse OPTION button in this box to display a list of options If you enter a label either enter a font for the label or select a font by clicking the mouse OPTION button in this box to display a list of options Max and min are read only The six Data values are automatic taken from measurement End Item when associating measurement End Item The six Values are Danger Limits High Value Nominal Limit High Value Nominal Limit High Value Nominal Limit High Value Nominal Limit Low Value Danger Limits Low Value Max and Min are read only always Yes FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 7 302 Display Types Moving Scale Linear Meter Entries continued Entry Option Description Threshold Color Either enter a threshold color for each threshold you want displayed or select a color by clicking the mouse OPTION button in this box to display a list of options
160. ck with the mouse SELECT button 4 To finish the polygon click the mouse OPTION button on the last corner p 42 4 Drawing a Polygon If your first and last points do not coincide the final side of the polygon is drawn automatically between these two points When you select the location for the last corner the polygon is drawn using the default colors and styles To change the object s color line style or fill style see Recoloring objects later in this chapter Rectangles Drawing Tools aie ie SQ oe Box Tool With the Box Tool you can draw square and rectangular box shapes in the Drawing Area using two clicks of the mouse The sides of the box automatically align to the horizontal and vertical FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 5 128 Drawing Methods To draw a rectangle 1 Click the mouse SELECT button on the Box Tool button 2 Inthe Drawing Area click the mouse SELECT button on the points where you want the upper left and lower right corners of the box to appear 1 Drawing a Rectangle The box is drawn using the default colors and styles To change the color line style or fill style see Recoloring Objects ater in this chapter Text QJS t amp Text Tool With the Text Tool you add text to the Drawing Area by typing it in from the keyboard Each line of text that you type is lik
161. clicks of the mouse Though these objects normally are static within a display they can also be given dynamic properties using the Dynamic Object display type discussed in Chapter 7 NOTE Static objects are drawn on top of the background image Dynamic components You can create formats which include dynamic components that reflect changes in their states during runtime that is while Sammi is running For example a format can include a gauge that represents the changing of the pressure reading in a boiler or a push button that lets the Sammi user send a warning signal or message to another workstation simply by clicking on the button FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 Welcome to the Format Editor 1 17 Each dynamic component is contained inside of a dynamic field a physical area of the format that has been reserved for a specific function With the Format Editor you define all aspects of the dynamic field including size color position data inputs and function on the DFD Dynamic Field Definition Display panel The dynamic field description includes a display type and data access type as discussed below You indicate the function of a dynamic field by selecting a particular display type on the DFD Display panel The display type that you select has general characteristics you can customize For example if you select the Meter display type for a dynamic field the Format Editor
162. complish and how the Format Editor can help FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 2 22 Getting Started NOTE If you only want to learn program operation right now without getting into the details of design planning you can skip the rest of this section and return to it later when you are ready to start creating your own production formats Data display control functions The main purpose of Sammi is to provide the user with visual access and control over a wide variety of network resources One of the first decisions therefore should involve the types of data to be displayed and the types of control functions to be provided for users Sammi provides access to a wide variety of network resources including e Databases Sammi can display data from any type of database hierarchical relational custom etc and let the user make changes to the data that are written directly back into the database e Applications Sammi can exchange data and commands with remote applications Thus users can use Sammi to start remote applications and to receive data or commands back from them For example by pressing a key or clicking the mouse the Sammi user might start a remote application that reads in data from on line instruments and issues alarms based on high or low instrument readings When the alarm appears in the Sammi window the user might push another key or use the mouse to click on a button to
163. composites using 147 confirm 99 Confirm Entry 64 169 confirm amp delete 99 Containment 131 156 Conv Factor 314 Conversion Factor 274 Copy 152 Copy Tool 82 135 166 copy format 36 Creation Date 87 Current Fill Style panel 38 60 76 Current Font Selection Display panel 110 Current Font Selection panel 38 62 Current Line Style panel 38 77 Current Spacing Display panel 74 Current Spacing panel 38 107 Cursor shapes 33 Curve Set 355 356 Curve Sets 17 221 Custom Tim 355 Custom Time 18 23 25 186 222 Custom Time Display 357 D Data Access Definition 159 Data Access Definition Panel entering data 66 Data Access Description 64 159 355 Data Access Description panel 186 Data Access Type 64 168 170 data access type 17 355 Data access types 18 Data Definition Record 342 Data display control functions 22 Data Quality 169 264 268 Databases 22 Declutter 102 declutter 29 Decoration 89 Default colors setting 59 Delete Composite 149 Delete Point Tool 134 delete dfd 37 delete window 89 Deleting composites 149 Design Editing Mode 180 Design mode 155 DFD 34 DFD Attrib 152 DFD Display panel 17 45 63 92 134 155 158 167 183 FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 UserManual 15 August 19991 428 Index 186 309 358 DFD Display panel entering data 64 DFD libraries 179 DFD libraries creating 179 DFD libraries deleting 181 DED library using 179 DFD Name 64 168
164. cription of the Edit_Cmd_popup see Entering a Command on page 195 Sensitive Insensitive bitmaps Pathnames to image End Items which will be displayed on the button FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 7 250 Display Types General Action Button Grouping Sample Format sample_bgroup The General Action Button Grouping is a manager display type with capabilities encompassing Mutually Exclusive Button Grouping or Radio Box and Non Exclusive Button Grouping A General Action Button Grouping display type is comprised of a frame or border surrounding one or more General Action Button display types The General Action Button Grouping lets the user select from a mutually exclusive radio or non exclusive set of functions The General Action Button Grouping display type also provides layout policies see the Packing section below An optional title for the General Action Button Grouping can be placed at the top of the grouping You can only use General Action Button display types defined as toggle types in a General Action Button Grouping Toggle type buttons with and without indicators can be mixed within a grouping You can create check boxes by grouping a set of toggle buttons in a General Action Button Grouping and setting the Radio Grouping field on the Button Grouping display panel to No To create a radio box button group group a set of toggle buttons in a General Action Button Grouping an
165. current value followed by the index If your Formatted Numeric is a data set your data values must provide the current values for each displayed value followed by an index value and all values have to be of the same data type that is short long float or double FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 239 You must set the Number of Values field on the Data Access Description panel to the total number of values that you are receiving from the application that is one more than the number of values that you are displaying at a time The minimum number that you can enter in the Number of Values field is 2 See Chapter 8 of this guide for more information Display type specifications Enter the following specifications as illustrated on the panel below FE Formatted Numeric Formatted Numeric Display v Short Data Type v Long Float v Double Enter Reset Table End Item Ena tem SSMB SETUP CONVERSIO Formatted Numeric Entry Option Description Table End Item End Item of type FWDU_CONVERSION_TEXT Data Type Is set automatically FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 7 240 Display Types General Action Button GAB Button Sample Format sample_gabutton The General Action Button GAB display creates a graphical image of a button push or toggle on which the Sammi user can click the mouse SELECT butt
166. d set the Radio Grouping field on the Button Grouping display panel to Yes NOTE In a radio button group if a user presses a button that is already pressed the related command is issued again General Action Button display types defined as toggle types which normally have square shaped visual indicators appear with diamond shaped indicators when grouped into a General Action Button Grouping that is set to exhibit Radio behavior The fact that a General Action Button is in a General Action Button Grouping is transparent to all applications That is the application will only be concerned with the individual buttons within the grouping Every button grouping on a particular format should have a unique name If a button grouping is created without a name management of its buttons is not assured When the group is named all buttons within the group are properly managed Formats may then have more than one independently managed group You build General Action Button Grouping and General Action Button display types in any order and in any location desired When the General Action Button Grouping is displayed during Sammi runtime any General Action Button display types defined as toggle type found within the boundaries of the General Action Button Grouping display type become members of that General Action Button Grouping display type You can create the buttons first and then surround them with the General Action Button Grouping or crea
167. dda 6 8080da ddd 75 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112 1314 1516 You can use the v0 value in another column For example in the table above changing v2 to v0 links stippling to the row selecting value Be aware that if vO is greater than the highest possible value for stippling see Table field definitions below results will be unpredictable You can even switch variables if the two values concerned are the same type For example in the table below the background and foreground colors switch at a value of more than 20 value_substitution 10 0 v0 v1 noblnk 0 0 0 3 0 qd d adda o 20 0 vO v1 noblnk d a i t 2 d d d dad d 25 30 0 vil v0 blink d d 0 1 4 125 125d d d d 50 40 0 vl v0 blink 2 2 dad da 6 80 80 d de da75 The table must have the title value_substitution as the first non comment line Table field definitions 1 Upper range limit The number to which an incoming value is compared to determine which row to use for the Dynamic Object s attributes 2 Foreground color You can use any color listed in Appendix A 3 Background Color unless the blinking feature is enabled below If blinking is enabled the blinkable color choices are red green blue yellow white black cyan or magenta Attempting to blink the non blinkable color will use the color indicated and ignore the blink attribute FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 229 4 Blink No blink Enter bli
168. de presentation that has several overlays each overlay representing a level of complication LAPAP Laptop Application The onboard IBM Thinkpad laptop with specialized software including the MCD which is used for displaying the synoptic displays in the COF MCD Mission Control and Display The onboard logical server MDA Mission Database Application FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Glossary 425 MDB option palette process real number server UNIX userid X Window System window Mission Database See flag This is a format that has several selections Two examples are the Color Palette and the Icon Palette A program that is running on a computer In Sammi the start_sammi command actually begins a process called s2_sysinit it is this process that actually starts a Sammi session the quit command stops or kills the processes that run during a Sammi session In the Sammi system a number with decimal places For example 2 0 and 100 4436 are real numbers 2 and 100 are not In strict mathematical terms all integers whole numbers are real numbers but only real numbers without decimal points are integers See also integers 1 hardware a system on which a program or set of data resides typically available to other systems over anetwork 2 software a process that is waiting to be contacted by a client process so that the server can do something for
169. ds any mouse event that occurs within this DFD s boundaries to the server to which the DFD is connected Information sent includes location and mouse button selected as well as any modifier key SHIFT CTRL ALT that was pressed Notification occurs only if the DFD does not trap the mouse selection All Motif widget based DFDs trap the mouse selection These DFDs are Curve Sets the General Action Buttons and Groups Graphs Graphic Data Field Menus Option Lists Push buttons except transparent Scrollbars Selection Lists Slider Bars and Text Browser Select the foreground color for this dynamic field from a pop up option list when you click the mouse OPTION button in the box to the right of this entry Then click the mouse SELECT button on your choice Select the background color for this dynamic field from a pop up option list when you click the mouse OPTION button in the box to the right of this entry Then click the mouse SELECT button on your choice Be sure not to make the foreground and background the same color unless you want invisible characters for example when creating a dynamic field for entering passwords you may want the user s entries to remain invisible for confidentiality Select the font for any text labels or data in the dynamic field from a pop up option list by clicking the mouse OPTION button in the box to the right of this entry Then click the mouse SELECT button on your choice Vector fon
170. dynamic field controlling it A scrollbar dynamic field and its target dynamic field s must use the Universal Data Access type and all must access the same logical server Also the Number of Values entered in the Data Access Description for the scrollbar must be 4 because applications use four data values Offset Min Max and Slider length to control scrollbar positioning Display type specifications Enter the following specifications as illustrated on the panel below Scroll Bar Display Target DFDs Orientation Vertical Init Min 0 Init Max 10 Slider Length 0 Enter Reset Scrollbar Display Entries Entry Option Description Orientation Set the orientation of the scrollbar by clicking the mouse SELECT button in this box to toggle between Vertical and Horizontal FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 327 Entry Option Init Min Max WARNING Slider Length Target DFDs Scrollbar Display Entries continued Description Enter the value where the scrollbar begins minimum and the maximum number for items that can be displayed The values that you enter here restrict the user to accessing all or only part of a data set These values can be changed dynamically by the application as data are made available to the target dynamic field s These fields can be changed dynamically check with your API develo
171. e FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 APPENDIX D 386 Sample Runtime Annotations Table FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 appernixe Pixel Measurements E 387 Sammi can be used on a wide variety of workstations and each workstation may have a different monitor resolution For this reason measurements of length or size must often be expressed in pixels instead of inches or centimeters The actual distance described by a certain number of pixels depends on the size and resolution of the workstation monitor For example if the screen resolution is 85 dots per inch then 85 pixels equals one inch or 2 54 centimeters How to determine pixel resolution on the SUN To determine the resolution for a particular display in pixels per inch also known as dots per inch log on to that workstation and enter the following command in any shelltool window xdpyinfo When you enter this command a considerable amount of data scrolls by The information you need is listed under screen resolution If the command xdpyinfo is not found contact your System Administrator for help How to use pixel resolution Y Location Sammi Window name Description X Y Location of a Format One typical use of pixel resolution is to specify the X Y Location of a format Loosely speaking X Y Location indicates how far the top left corner of the Sammi
172. e SELECT button If you are in Production Editing Mode the DFD Display the dynamic type description and Data Access Definition panels appear NOTE If you set the Editing Mode on the System Preferences panel to Design the next step does not apply 5 Make appropriate entries in the panels that appear Refer to Chapter 7 Display Types and Chapter 8 Data Access Types for details 6 Click the mouse SELECT button on the Save DFD button to save your entries If you wish you can add more dynamic fields by returning to step 2 WARNING If you do not click the mouse SELECT button on the Save DFD button before you change to another editing function any changes that you made are lost To quit adding dynamic fields select another editing function FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Dynamic Field Description CHAPTER 6 163 Changing existing dynamic fields To change an existing dynamic field you must be currently editing the format using the New or Open option To change dynamic fields 1 Select the DFD Attributes option from the Edit menu on the Format Editor Control panel All existing dynamic fields in the Drawing Area appear as white outline double boxes see illustration fb bkgd Selecting the Dynamic Field To Be Changed 2 Click the mouse SELECT button on the dynamic field to be changed To help in selecting the dynamic field the name and type of the dyna
173. e Cancel DFD button any changes that you have made are discarded Display Palette option To use the Display Palette option 1 Select the Display Palette option from the Dynamic Fields menu on the Format Editor Control panel The following panel appears y 1 2 3 2 22 e m TEXT INTEGER REAL EQUATION 4A Vas 331 1 0 T Z FORMATED 331 10 TIME ALARM NUMERIC TABULAR METER GAUGE BAR BAR CHART oal MA wy E Ee PLOT TREND CURVE SET PIE CHART q Ls SCROLL si Tos BUTON BAR BUTON BUTIO GROUP a ger mr p So Ua U ES ee LISTS OPTIONS MENUS BROWSER i e mt FIX SCALE MOVE SCALE GRAPHIC SLIDER METER METER DATA FIELD aft gt v SYMBOL OBJECT OBJECT TABLE ICON 4 gt Scroll bars allow you to move down and to the right on this panel for more selections or you can resize the DFD Palette panel 2 Click the mouse SELECT button on the button for the display type you want to create FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Dynamic Field Description CHAPTER 6 161 3 NOTE Move the cursor to the Drawing Area The cursor style changes to the icon of the DFD you have selected A bounding box is attached to the cursor and follows it as you move about the Drawing Area This bounding box is the actual size of the pre defined dynamic field Position and set the dynamic field o
174. e Conversion Factor Code Conversion Formula No Conversion 0 X 10 Y PSFA to PSIG 1 X Y 14 696 144 0 Hundred to unit 2 X Y 100 0 Thousand to unit 3 X Y 1000 0 Million to unit 4 X Y 1000000 Unit to hundred 5 X Y 100 0 Unit to thousand 6 X Y 1000 0 Unit to million 7 X Y 1000000 0 Second to minute 8 X Y 60 0 Second to hour 9 X Y 3600 0 Second to day 10 X Y 86400 0 Minute to second 11 X Y 60 0 Inch to foot 12 X Y 12 0 Ounce to pound 13 X Y 16 0 Pound to ton 14 X Y 2000 0 Liter to gallon 15 X Y 3 7854 Cubic inch to gallon 16 X Y 231 0 Gallon to barrel 17 X Y 42 0 Cubic inch to cubic 18 X Y 1728 0 foot Centigrade to 19 X Y 9 0 5 0 32 Fahrenheit Fahrenheit to 20 X Y 32 0 1 8 Centigrade Inch to centimeter 21 X Y 2 54 Meter to foot 22 X Y 3 281 Mile to kilometer 23 X Y 1 6093 Kilogram to pound 24 X Y 2 2046 Pound to kilogram 25 Y Y 0 4536 Degree to radian 26 X Y 3 14159 180 0 FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 APPENDIX F 390 Conversion Factors For example if you enter 8 in the Conversion field the incoming data value is divided by 60 seconds to minutes before being displayed and any Sammi user entry is multiplied by 60 minutes to seconds before being transmitted to the data server FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 aeenoixe Shifting and Mas
175. e Format Editor but also how to test them in the Runtime Environment Internal mechanisms The external mechanisms listed above are only part of the story Inside the Runtime Environment are many internal mechanisms working to produce the effects seen on the screen FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Learning the Format Editor 3 53 You must understand these internal mechanisms before you can create truly useful and workable formats testformat Temperature Control lt t FWDU_SERVER R eae A emp deg F Database Current Temperature MCD DM record 59 74 0 high Enter New Temperature 74 9 record2 26 44 2 low record3 12 33 5 high Network How the Sample Format Works The two dynamic fields on the test format format are created using the Real and Meter display types For test purposes both dynamic fields work by accessing the same record element in an MDB In Run Time Environment the FWDU_SERVER is actually called MCD and this accesses data in the DMS see illustration above The meter accesses the record element in the DMS via the MCD it reflects new values as soon as its dynamic field is refreshed by the MCD The SAMMI concept with various data servers and databases has been replaced with one data server FWDU_SERVER The servername is hidden because there only is the one
176. e Format Editor Control panel Dynamic Object tables To enable the effects of a Dynamic Object DFD you must create a lookup table that specifies certain changes to the DFD depending on incoming data Each row has sixteen fields these are described later in this section The first field holds a number expressing the upper limit of a data range with the limits arranged in ascending order When the Runtime Environment receives a value for a Dynamic Object DFD it compares that value to this first entry When it finds a row whose upper limit value is equal to or greater than the incoming value the display qualities specified in the previous row are applied to the Dynamic Object NOTE If the incoming value exceeds the last range value in the table the row selected will always be associated with the last range For example if the last highest entry in field one is 40 incoming values of 40 1 50 etc default to the display properties associated with the row preceded by 40 A dynamic object table which must be given the extension dob j can be in either of two formats depending on the method most appropriate for your application FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 227 e Table Lookup In this format Sammi uses pre determined values entered in the table e Value Substitution In this format values are sent from an application to fields in the table indicated by variables
177. e I MDB create an End Item ED of type FWDU_SYNOPTIC_DISPLAY 2 From the IMDB invoke the newly created EI by selecting the EI and right click ing on it Then select Tools and then FWDU Editor 3 First time the Format Description panel appears Change the values on the panel as you wish See Chapter 4 for details on this panel 4 Use the Drawing Tools buttons to draw all background objects in the format as explained in Chapter 3 and Chapter 5 5 Save you work Creating dynamic fields DFDs with the Icon Palette Generally to create dynamic fields 1 Select the Display Palette option from the Dynamic Fields menu on the Format Editor Control panel The DFD Palette panel displays a 1 2 3 2 22 e me TEXT INTEGER REAL EQUATION A ey 331 10 a gt i FORMATED 331_1 0 TIME ALARM NUMERIC _ TABULAR E J O roe METER GAUGE BAR BAR CHART LAL WA A TREND CURVE SET _PIE CHART A S 5 x BUTTON sae BUTON RUSTON GROUP i ga ro e i Usm U ma Bwa e LISTS OPTIONS MENUS BROWSER ops ToL od FIX SCALE MOVE SCALE SLIDER METER OMETER DATA PED i gt v DYNAMIC SYMBOL OBJECT OBJECT TABLE ICON 4 2 Select the type of dynamic field you want to add from the scrollable panel of icons by clicking the mouse SELECT button on an icon FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999
178. e a separate object that can be moved copied grouped with other objects edited or recolored You can type special and international characters by using a Compose key along with the appropriate keystrokes see Appendix M Special International Characters for details NOTE Because of X Window System constraints you cannot rescale or rotate text in X bitmapped fonts you can only change fonts However text in scalable vec tor fonts may be scaled flipped and rotated See Appendix B X Bitmapped and Scalable Fonts FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Drawing Methods CHAPTER 5 129 To create text 4 Select the desired font if different from the default Click the mouse SELECT button on the Text Tool button of the Format Editor Control panel Move the cursor into the Drawing Area and click the mouse SELECT button on the starting location for the text Enter the desired text and press the RETURN key The text appears in the current color font and fill style To change the text font or color see Recoloring objects later in this chapter To edit existing text 1 2 NOTE Click on the Text Tool Then click on the text with the mouse SELECT button where you want to start editing You can type in new characters or delete existing characters using the DELETE or BACKSPACE key When you are finished press the RETURN key or click with the mouse SELECT button 1 During ed
179. e areas are Foreground color Used by all objects as the primary color Background color Affects opaque dashed lines and stipple fills Window color Specifies the color of the Drawing Area fb bkgd on the Format Description panel Selecting colors using the Color Palette Instead of using the Color Selection Display panel you may find it quicker to select colors from the Color Palette panel To add this panel choose the Colors option from the pull right menu that appears when you select Colors from the Style menu on the Format Editor Control panel to display the Color Palette panel To select colors from this panel 1 Click the mouse SELECT button on the push button at the bottom of the Color Palette panel for the area for which you are setting the color Foreground Background Window FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 5 110 Drawing Methods 2 Click with the mouse SELECT button the square of color to which you want to change the selected area With the palette displayed on the screen you can easily change color for any new object by selecting the foreground color before drawing the object The palette also works well to recolor objects see Recoloring objects later in this chapter NOTE After you call up the Color Palette panel for the first time it remains on the screen throughout your drawing session unless you remove it by typing the following command
180. e ceneevecces nate echo agast eno aeeretiany 104 Before you begin drawing sccicccci cites tc ccc iestctessigtareeieccteiglaieihttocetenelads 106 Importing a format oxtail Ate Sect eek aes chats ah eee eles 106 Aligning objects to a grid a Acnce eRe es heii Aah ee Mie tla 106 Setting the Snap and Grid function Spacing eeeeeeeeeeeeees 107 Turning the Snap and Grid functions on and off eeeeeeeeeeee 108 Selecting colors using the Color Selection Display panel cccceeeeescceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 108 FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 IV Table of Contents Selecting colors using the Color Palette ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 109 Selecting font styles cata ee anne ails Alias 110 Selecting line styles ay ver acta sca nieces ieee eat eeind netoeansesieereteeease 111 Setting the current line style defaults 0 eee ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 112 Line fill Solid Dashed Double Dashed cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 112 Line cap Butted Projecting Rounded ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 113 Line joint Beveled Rounded Mitered ccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeees 114 D shpattern a pi ecg ies econ eed a eevee Acad endo eee 114 Line ION SATSE seceseces css tes areca see E tates awed 114 Arrowhead settings acaxivehisccdeatdes ieeecic tase edoateecdence Toshi nee yectescencer 115 Constraints aeiiae et eae E Ae e TATA 115 Sel
181. e current hour minute and second in any time zone as well as the current date FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 8 358 Data Access Types Universal The universal data access type is used to link dynamic fields to remote data sources through the Application Programming Interface or API an optional Sammi component To link a dynamic field to a remote source you must enter information in a Data Access Description panel shown below This panel appears automatically when you select Universal as the data access type on the DFD Display panel refer to Chapter 6 for details Usually the API developer or system administrator for your site will supply you with the information that must be entered in this panel E fb uni FE Universal Keys H Data Access Description Read Kevs Write Keys Number of Values EI Key Type HE Data Access End Item SSMB ROV2 SETUP INT MEAS 001 Enter Reset End Item Ea Data Access Description Entries Entry Option Description Read Key Never used by the FWDU Write Key Never used by the FWDU FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manua ROVSING A S 15 August 19991 Data Access Types CHAPTER 8 359 Data Access Description Entries continued Entry Option Description Number of Values With this field you can indicate how many values you want to access for this DFD if more than one is desired For example if you en
182. e everything has been realigned correctly select Redisplay from the View menu or click the mouse OPTION button while the cursor is in the Drawing Area and select Redisplay from the pop up option list 12 To save the test format format and quit the Format Editor From the File menu on the Format Editor Control panel Select Save Select Dismiss Select Exit 13 The following dialog box appears Are you sure you want to quit the Format Editor YES No 14 Click the mouse SELECT button on the Yes button FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 cuaptena Format amp Layer Description 4 85 Format description is the first major step in defining a format for a Sammi window Before you begin drawing static or dynamic objects you should first decide e The layout of the final Sammi window Initial size and position for the window Background color Background images photos schematics etc Should the window have layers similar to transparencies placed on top of each other e The operation of the final Sammi window Automatic paging to other windows Help information Scrollbars Many of these decisions were discussed earlier in Chapter 2 of this guide Notice that we are not yet making all the decisions about the format At this point we are simply describing the basic look and feel of the final Sammi window Se X
183. e field height in characters and the number of values are equal the values exactly fill the field from top to bottom that is all values display simultaneously e If the field height is greater than the number of values the values do not fill the field that is there is blank space after the last value FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Display Types CHAPTER 7 187 e If the field height is less than the number of values the user cannot see all the values resulting in incomplete information Avoid this situation unless you add scroll bars The illustration below demonstrates this the gray area represents the display area 128 5 92 8 821 5 210 0 Height 3 Height 4 Height 2 Values 3 Values 3 Values 4 Comparing Field Height with Number of Values Thus when creating data display types you should always keep in mind the number of values to be displayed and the height required to display them If there is not enough room in the format to display all of them you are needlessly transferring data values that the user cannot see Sammi user entry Set whether an enterable display type is view only or view and change by toggling Yes next to Enterable on the DFD Display panel This feature enables the Sammi user to type data directly into the dynamic field the entry can be written back to the data source if this feature is supported by the data server and the data access
184. e information on command files see Appendix C Command Files e Dynamic Select List Select List specifications can be sent to the Select List Display type from an application When the Select List types in the Select List Display panel is set to dynamic and you then click the mouse SELECT button the Universal Data Definition panel displays Set the Number of Variables field in this panel to the maximum number of entries that the list can ever contain see Chapter 8 for information about this panel NOTE The Data Access Type in the DFD Display panel must be set to Universal for the Dynamic Select List specification See Chapter 6 Display type specifications Enter the following specifications as illustrated on the panel below fb slist FE select list Select List List Category Select Type Popup No Static Single i goa g Grab Focus No v Dynamic Timeout secs Standard List Table Name WSSU ra TONES End Item f Label Name Ee Label W Label Font EN i Label Color Item 1 Top Bottom Margin KE Item 2 Left Right Margin EE Scroll Color Shadow In Shadow Etched In x Border Style lt Shadow Out Shadow Etched Out i i Border Color OK l Cancel Border Width 0 Add buttons Yes Enter Reset FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 331 Entry Option List Category Select Type Pop up Grab Focus Timeout secs
185. e mouse OPTION button in the box beside this label to display an option list Then click the mouse SELECT button on the desired color name Bar Outline Clr Either enter a color for the outline of the bar or click the mouse OPTION button in the box beside this label to display an option list Then click the mouse SELECT button on the desired color name Depth Thickness For a three dimensional effect enter the value in pixels for the depth of the bar Bar Width Enter the width of each bar in pixels Bar Spacing Enter the spacing between each bar in pixels NOTE If you enter 0 zero in both the Bar Width and Bar Spacing fields the Runtime Environment creates bars of equal size within the area of the DFD Show Variables Select whether each bar has a label at the bottom for each vertical or to the left for each horizontal bar by clicking the mouse SELECT button in the box to the right of this field to toggle between Yes and No Variables Font If you choose to show variables either enter a font for the label or click the mouse OPTION button in the box beside this label to display an option list Then click the mouse SELECT button on the desired font name FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Display Types CHAPTER 7 215 Entry Option Ticks Color Ticks Font Axis Color Axis Label Axis Label Color Axis Label Font Thresholds Thresholds Font Barchart Display Entries contin
186. e number of pixels used for the border width a zero means no border For a border width greater than zero select a border style by clicking the mouse SELECT button on one of the following options Shadow In Shadow Out Shadow Etched In Shadow Etched Out Select whether to display the incoming data value digitally beside or below the scale depending on orientation by clicking the mouse SELECT button in this box to toggle between Yes and No If you choose to show the value either enter a color for the background of the box for the value or select a color by clicking the mouse OPTION button in this box to display a list of options If you choose to show the value either enter a color for the foreground of the box for the value or select a color by clicking the mouse OPTION button in this box to display a list of options FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 7 300 Display Types Moving Scale Linear Meter Entries continued Entry Option Description Decimal Digits If you are showing the value enter the number of digits to display after the decimal point Any incoming data value is rounded to this number of digits Conv Factor If you are showing the value enter a conversion code for incoming data see Appendix F for details Data Type Read only Data is automatically taken from measurement End Item when associating measurement End Item Scale Minimum Read only Data is automa
187. e the Undo function immediately to reverse it NOTE You cannot add or delete points from a basic object type that is rectangles curves circles or ellipses While you can add points to a simple line as well as a polyline you cannot delete points from a simple line although you can delete points from a polyline until it becomes a simple line with only two points Copying objects or groups E g E snop 120 Gig Copy Tool The Copy Tool lets you make duplicate copies of objects or groups of objects with two clicks of the mouse The first click selects the object or group to be copied The second click places the duplicate at a new location To copy 1 Click on the Copy Tool with the mouse SELECT button on the Format Editor Control panel Notice that grouping boxes appear on all groups 2 Move the cursor to the Drawing Area and click with the mouse SELECT button on an object or a group of objects to be copied FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 5 136 Drawing Methods 3 Click with the mouse SELECT button at the location in the Drawing Area where you want the duplicate to be placed The original remains unchanged and a dupli cate appears at the new location Moving objects or groups F E Snap Ole Grid Move Tool The Move Tool lets you m
188. e trend graph to the right as the values received exceed the Span value FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV User Manual 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 271 Line Chart Variables Display specifications Enter the following specifications for individual curves as illustrated on the panel below Click on the Curve Definition button of either the Plot or the Trend Display panel to display this panel To add a variable click on the Add Variable button then enter information for the variable in the appropriate fields Once you have entered information for a variable either press the Return key or click the mouse SELECT button on the Enter button Add a variable to the middle of an existing list of variables by either e Clicking the mouse SELECT button on the variable name just above where you want to add a new variable and then clicking the mouse SELECT button on the Add Variable button e Clicking the mouse SELECT button on the Add Variable button then typing in the desired Curve Position In either case the Curve Position field for all variables that follow the added one are automatically updated the variable list is sorted in Bar Position order To change a variable click the mouse SELECT button on the name in the Variables List then make the desired changes To delete a variable click the mouse SELECT button on the name in the Variables List then click the mouse SELECT button on the Delete Variable button If you c
189. e window manager classes see Chapter 3 System Administrator s Guide FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Format amp Layer Description CHAPTER 4 89 Format Description Entries continued Entry Option Meaning Window Control X and Y Locations Width Height init max cur Scale Factor Decoration Timeout Value Grab Focus Enter the initial horizontal X vertical Y coordinates in pixels for the upper left corner of the Sammi window as explained later in this chapter Enter the initial and maximum dimen sions in pixels of the Sammi window as explained later in this chapter The default setting of Width and Height are 610 and 400 in pixels The cur field is an unenterable field and its values corre spond to the existing size of fb bkgd The values may not exceed the values found in the Equipment Constraint End Item Display only field Shows the zoom fac tor of the fb bkgd as a percentage for example 200 is twice the normal size 100 is normal size 50 is half the normal size Select whether a format has decorations when it displays in Sammi by clicking the mouse SELECT button in this box to tog gle between Yes and No If this format is to be used as a temporary pop up or dialog panel enter a numeric value for the number of seconds that it remains visible This becomes the default which can be overridden at runtime with the
190. ecting fill styles cata ee as ee eae eae Se 117 Setting the current fill style defaults cece ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 118 Available fill styles None Solid Stippled eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 118 Fill rule Even Odd Winding cccceecesceceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeesenaeees 119 Pill Pattern SUP PIO isise riiin enaa en aeaieie 119 How to draw objects o eeeeeccceceeeeeeeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesesaaaeaeeeeeeeessaneeeeeees 119 Arcs Wedges Ont ntehi ce a Palette ha hue ee Bate haat acs 120 Circles BMlpSeS marianna eae nn cate ieee 122 Splines open closed lt ase wca ocexnses gap savesestes ioctl een nds enetoveeses esetesexeese 123 Lines single and multiple segment ccccesesseceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 125 POY OIG cscs etcetera es ae ek a Ne ete ed eee 126 Rectangles eterna ene ERE RO ee CR or ERE OnE er nO are ORS PPR ore eA Pe 127 B 3 een ee ern ra gern een ee Or oe ee Oe Ons ee ee ee eed eee ee ene ere eee 128 How to manipulate objects cecceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeees 129 Controlling the drawing sequence Of objects cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 130 Grouping OD SCIS saien ceca ate aaae eared tease caine a aaa aa aniani 131 Ungro ping OD OCIS ssr a NE 132 AGSIZING ROlo E10 LEE A E E eee ee ua eee 133 Resizing dynamic fields Aantal chi heehee th tees She eee at okt 134 Changing points in objects cccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeeeee
191. ects those changes will not be reflected until you select either the Redisplay option from the View pull down menu or the Redisplay selection from the pop up menu This is the default option All redisplay Redraws the entire Drawing Area after each editing operation This has the same effect as performing the Redisplay option of the View menu or the Redisplay selection from the pop up menu Determines which objects are grouped together when you use the Grouping Tool By Intersection All objects intersected or bounded by the grouping box are included in the group By Containment All objects completely enclosed in the grouping box are included in the box This is the default option Determines how objects are colored when they are on an inactive layer True Color All objects are their actual color and fill even if they are on an inactive layer Inactive Color Objects on an inactive layer are unfilled and are shown as outlines only FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 Dynamic Field Description CHAPTER 6 157 Adding a new dynamic field You can add one or more new dynamic fields to any format To do this you must be currently editing the format using the New or Open option from the File menu You can add dynamic fields by any of three methods e Add DFD This option allows you to create a DFD by making entries in each field of the DFD Display panel e Display Palette This
192. ed as a pop up or fixed Fixed Sliders are always displayed and available for user selection Pop up Sliders are displayed when the user picks a dynamic field such as a button that pops the Slider up or when an application sends a Sammi command to pop up the Slider Pop up Slider display types consist of a slider and a Cancel button which allows the user to close the slider without manipulating the slider Fixed Slider display types consist of an optional label and a slider Runtime annotations for the Slider display type do not support the extra two characters appended at the end of the value in other dynamic fields at runtime Because the Slider display type is a widget the foreground and background colors will affect the whole widget and not just the value API information The FWDU_SERVER sends only the current value The limits and measurement End Item type are passed to the FWDU_SERVER at preview and the FWDU_SERVER sends data between max and min FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 337 Display type specifications Enter the following specifications as illustrated on the panel below fb slider Slider Bar Display orientation Max Direction Label C Label Name a L Shadow Width Show Value Decimal Digits 51 1 Increment Rate 4 Min Value Max Value Conv Factor Data Type Popup Timeout Grab Focus Enter Reset Vertical
193. ed from the current format for each of the paging functions listed For example if you want two formats named format and format2 to be linked using the page forward page back commands type format2 as the Page Fwd entry for format and format as the Page Bkwd entry for format2 Thus if the Sammi user enters the page forward command while viewing format format2 automatically replaces format The opposite occurs if the Sammi user enters the page backward command When linking formats in this way you should have a clear idea of logical progression between formats The page forward command should take the Sammi user through a certain sequence of windows the page backward command should take the user back through the same windows in reverse sequence Likewise the page up command and the page down command should move through different levels of the window hierarchy in the reverse sequences The page first command and the page last command should move to the first page and last page of the current window hierarchy respectively None of these paging commands has an intrinsic logic of their own you are left to establish the linkages in a logical manner By linking two formats using the page forward or page up fields you do not automatically apply a reverse linkage in the opposite direction page backward or page down You need to make entries in the respective Format Description panels in order to establish two way linkage The Runtime Environm
194. ed in a separate table Appendix H explains how to change these templates add new messages or change the colours associated with the alarm message levels You can create any number of Alarm fields designed to display different types of alarms see the Alarm Screen Type entry below The message display will conform to the size of the dynamic field itself Therefore when you are creating a dynamic field for alarm messages make sure it is wide enough to hold the longest possible message and high enough to show at least a few messages at a time FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 7 202 Display Types The height limit on an alarm is 44 characters high or 44 alarm messages while the width limit is 131 characters long For example if the longest alarm message is 80 characters then the dynamic field should be set at least 80 characters wide Since the total number of messages available at any given time may exceed the height of the alarm window you can create a scrollbar for changing the view of the window See the Scrollbar section later in this chapter Display type specifications Enter the following specifications as illustrated on the panel below Alarm Display Alarm Screen Type Alarm Active Alarm Events User Defined Enter Reset FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Display Types CHAPTER 7 203 Alarm Display Entr
195. ed version of the universal data type and is used exclusively for Curve Set display types Please refer to the Curve Set section in Chapter 7 for more details LCL Local Dynamic fields that get their data from local sources use the local data access type these sources can be e other dynamic fields alarms e file input used by Text and Text Browser display types for example e static data tables used by Static or Standard Menus and Select Lists for example or e window application procedures procedures that manage specific formats developed using the optional Sammi Development Kit As an example of a dynamic field using another dynamic field as its data source think of the command line in the Sammi Command window it is a dynamic field that gets its input from the pull down menus on the same window When you select the Add Window function the menu option sends the words add window to the command line The Equation display type also uses the local type since data values from other dynamic fields serve as input to the equation If you assign a local data type to a dynamic field but the field does not have a local data source usually a window application procedure defined with the Sammi Development Kit the dynamic field will work but not in the way expected For example if you set a scrollbar as a local data type you can scroll the scrollbar but it will not move anything in the format When you select local you c
196. ee eee es one ea ea 337 SyMool Table 03 ted lt et Se thes he hcl 339 Display type specifications ccceeeeeeeeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeees 339 PAE ac 0 cease the ee ce teest as tenis cuenta gies cabs A T 342 Data Definition Record a sce2ucc 5 oot viene de taeecedoctoecdaede Nebsd ean yacdecdencers 342 Display type specifications ceeeteeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeteeenneeeeeees 343 cea A eect ate aoe Soe cael eR ect be hay ee ee wate aa ee 345 Text Browser Browser sides hist nected ie atl cette tA eet eet tad 346 raed 100 date 11 6 9 sin a a rece er mre 346 Display type specifications ee eeceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeeees 347 Static Browser Data Display panel cccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 351 OF 4 is Bro 0 aterm eee cee ee tan reer mere te a Tne ane ee nen a Gtr Vetere meme TEN 352 Display type specifications cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeneeeeeeees 352 Data Access Types 355 CSU OES ate crates aca lec dtc cal ee AT E T AO 356 LEL Local cetceeemel ae a a estes seat biel lac ites 356 NOP No operation ta cwal nti A eae a eae aay cane eer 357 TME aeea e a cron e A E E A E E RE ee es 357 Universali neina es hades PO eae eee ae Meeker tae eta 358 Using runtime keys ova cic betes rea cwde eased dpe ol ve geet i ieee a veretelddes eet 360 Creating runtime KEY Sites os Mose es ieissa iiaa 361 Substituting variables for runtime keys e
197. eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeeeeeeees 362 Combining runtime keys into SESSIONS eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 362 line EGiOk BASICS 4 cuenta tae aa a ean a EE a aE 365 Text Editor Operations 4c 5 cs he cccetes eer cee fag atv eee geph dus estic 365 The FWDU Text Editor 365 PARIS ANG STICK Ges riain aeaieie wee et erite a eb EENE AT 366 Supported End Items seis teed ete oi ee Ae ils Shek ee ha 366 Equipment Constraints cccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 367 Example of a Equipment Constraint End Item eeeeeee 367 Standard Colors 369 X Bitmapped and Scalable Fonts 371 Formats c2cee tt acne Cece cate ee edt ee isi ele aaa dst AA EEEE 375 Standard Command File 375 EXAMINE Sse dea steti dale cea ttt Gt eet IN Net a E teeta ae heen ar 378 Format Editor option menu file a 8 n wate eel aad 380 Runtime Environment option menu file ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeees 381 FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Table of Contents IX Index comparison method ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeees 383 Sample Runtime Annotations Table 383 LEX MeO ta letscct ne later t entail ra e aaaea ea E Aea aange 385 Pixel Measurements 387 Conversion Factors 389 SAG e e a a E A RETRE 391 Shifting and Masking 391 M AE EE A EE 392 Alarm Formats and Colors 393 Equation Language 395 Operators in decreasing order of precedence
198. eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 279 Standard MON srine ate tee hetero end ea Seton bemtcas 281 Dynamic TING T We sic Os ects ne eta da eee eet eva de oecnte teva reklam eandlu choke eetewace 282 Met r Gauge sssri ea die cea te dec neei eth pace ecetiedi amet EEE ewe venir cutee des 283 API information sec h sc nceekec ce tan hen lets are lei hel hl at oat ete ueBes 284 Display type specifications ceeeeeeeeceeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeees 285 Meter Fixed Scale Linear Aivesiacccncndnancet ee rehaneninbiuesccebedeiieanetaccantweteion 290 APlinf rmation eA naa a uations 2c fovgcans Reset a aiaa 291 Display type specifications cc2e citcccttcortetettiatetpeceeth ciate es tttatecectetede 292 Meter Moving Scale Linear ccecccccccccecccecceeeeeeeeeeeeseseeseesnsnnetaaaeees 297 APLinformatiom eich scsi tat Ae AR aA 297 Display type specifications eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeetetteeeeeeeteees 298 WOBISCE ICON nailer titt atti uti iee ecto ce ete eM L te htt eaten ect 303 Display Type Specifications jcscccces toe cxcaxiices Salers cetviereureitecto i peeeetvene ss 304 Optom LAGU a ae rors eena t versie anaes odes canine Disecdemiun a a aout 308 Display type specifications iicczei sesh teceh es en cteelectivate ler tiel acme hide heiee 310 AELA a sacs Ave ta oe ae rage ec are oka ede eae open ts 311 APLIN Ormatiom caked oti tte te the a had he Nth E et kt hg 312 Pie Chart Display type specifications ccccccee
199. eeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeees 313 Pie Chart Variables Display type specifications ccceeeeee 314 Legend Display specifications eccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 318 BAST E E encase es Wasted ch acevo ves A A E shee 321 Display type specifications ceceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeeeeetees 321 Region 23 agent tied at Aas ak a teh A ts ke 323 PAP IIMTOMIUATION ccs tice Ai cete eke es Ci ke T 323 Display type SPeCIICALONS cc cs c2t ot ctecpiietacctcsecseteatctigteteth eb etetietens 323 Seral Dat e a e e e aa a Dee enn eon ee ene tae aaa 325 Display type specifications icc ici becca cecestaleteuies uerec cia Roc neeecuneds 326 Select Eistar na Me Peet hate a tl aaa eia ean 328 Select List used as an Option List sssssnneneeeeennennseeerrnnsserrrrrnnsee 328 Command entries for Select Lists sed as Option ISIS m s a ENa E Eon ETENE Ere 329 FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 VIII Table of Contents Optional components 00 0 2 cece ee eeeee eee eeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeaaeeeeeeeeeees 329 Display type specifications 2cesncaauiecnircnternuie Abe iea eters 330 Static Select List Item Command Entries ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 334 Sle eee rere eee re ore ee oe re rer ete er er ree ere reer ener ree ter tere eer reer crre 336 PRP WTOC AU OM a sas inana sepia ed anea iadan ea es cideteeueeseee 336 Display type SpeciliCallons eccieeeh
200. eeeeeesseeeeeeees 226 Table lookup xg sien oi cqehenistecti ce rtaledi aa eee a edt iat ten 227 Value SUDSTINUNON ances ater cece eee late ead cab ea 227 Table field definitions 3 ose S th sees cves recency ected peat aeeen ee sce aseeneeeds 228 Display type specifications lt ciccicers ctteccettieieiattietpiaeectenrtcietels tit certeeee 231 EULA Oh eats ats hance cee ace we ee AB Oded ee 233 Display type specifications scenes eee se a ea es 235 Formatted Numeric 2 2ucecconctst heledecheesd thee tel tiedededandeeles 238 APT IMORMMANOM seee aiaee tilted eli eee uta eens atten 238 Display type specifications sac cetisee shes utc eles ect emadeiaecen ences 239 General Action Button GAB BUtton ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeees 240 Functions arnon aeciececsacicecees i a bee Ren coats Sete 241 Characters iOS creates a ata nace vars bee CAERON A n EAEE aAa Eai 242 labels ar e a eh ater leche EE E E aE 243 APFinformatiOn aarne nnana arn iara aE 243 Runtime annotations c siceseieeve ce iatlend doers Meee ieehi eeeieed erties 244 Linking to f nction KEYS asrnane EEE a aE 244 Display type specifications focve cesses aecevecsvice Ag iewn te Vase eeeers 245 General Action Button Grouping cceeeeceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaaaees 250 Display type specifications ccs c ewan oles 251 Graphic Data Field Sica a Re eS Ne Ae hs aa 256 Display type specifications lt c ciicecscseccccssceiteinioceeeiauncte ea riedeteieteerteeis 2
201. eeeenaaeeeeeeeeenees 31 TAS MOU E ee gear n a aden heana rra M deaa ee aeaa ecules eat hee 32 Mo se MOVEMENT 225 tis caer ineniiae ne cet E E a AEDE eei 32 Gu rsor shapes sansara a a ae aa aa EEEa AEA 33 MOUSE DUMONS oft teat a tcte tele Ueandatiad ice hatch patie dedidues ae tecutndatid 33 The Format Editor Control panel cccccceeessecceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 35 Pull down GINS a5 ees te ES A a a claus a eae 36 The Drawing Area fb bkgd cecececeeseeeseeeeeseeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeenseeees 39 Moving PAGS raiione aneda a ok aed cessive Bede ce eee 39 ZOOMING the Drawing Area vciss cis S ties cates tees von cteeee ooceteceiyedebeeacevaceecveds 39 Notes on panning ANd ZOOMING cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeees 41 Other visual elements ccecceeeeeeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeeeeeeeeseesseeeeees 42 Dialog DOXES tate aa Se a ta i a a as ae 42 Pop up OPTION ISIS omena tegecespiens jreverexese aaae 43 General guidelines for using the Format Editor ccceeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 43 Creating new formats a 5 i edacnd outers ene hee dele oe eee 44 FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 ll Table of Contents Creating dynamic fields DFDs with the Icon Palette 44 Creating dynamic fields DFDs with the Add DFD option 45 Saving and testing a format sim cee tgeesaSeeeccerergt idea orexacadt engage ons 46 Viewing or chang
202. een Step Display and Redisplay All The Redisplay All option always displays 100 percent of the plot Step Fraction For Step Display mode only enter a value that represents how much new data is used to refresh the Step Fraction part of the display please refer to Step Display Step Fraction earlier in this section for details X Axis Axis Color Enter the color of the x axis itself or click the mouse OPTION button in the box beside this label to display an option list Then click the mouse SELECT button on the desired color name Title Enter the title to be displayed along the x axis Title Color Enter the color of the x axis title or click the mouse OPTION button in the box beside this label to display an option list Then click the mouse SELECT button on the desired color name X Min Max Enter the minimum maximum x axis values FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 7 268 Display Types Trend display type specifications Enter the following specifications as illustrated on the panel below To enter information for individual curves click on the Curve Definition button For more information please refer to the Line Chart Variables Display specifications section later in this chapter Trend Data Curve Definition Data Quality Yes z X Axis Precision Double Trend Disp OTE Show Tick amp Label Yes Grid Type No grid Color black Size X Major Minor Y Major Minor
203. eld make sure it is only one character high and wide enough to fit the largest possible value If any value calculated during runtime is too wide for the Equation dynamic field a row of asterisks will be shown instead of the value You can help reduce the width requirements of an Equation dynamic field by selecting the Shortest format button from the Equation Display panel as explained below This causes the result to be displayed as a decimal number or as an exponential number e g 1 E 6 for 1 000 000 00 whichever is shorter FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 235 Display type specifications Enter the following specifications as illustrated on the panel below Entry Option Equation String Decimal Digits Display Format Equation Display Equation String Decimal Digits 0 Float Display Type Exponential Shortest format Enter Reset Equation Display Entries Description Enter the equation for the dynamic fields up to 255 characters For long equation entries use the horizontal scroll bar at the bottom of the panel Enter the number of digits to be displayed to the right of the decimal point for the equation results Select the format for displaying the equation results Click the mouse SELECT button on one of the buttons to the right of this field to select a display format Float Exponential
204. end a command and so on Select List used as an Option List Another use of the Select List display type is as a pop up option list for other display types such as Object Icon When the user clicks on the other dynamic field with the mouse OPTION button the Select List display type pops up When you attach the Select List display type to another dynamic field that field becomes the trigger DFD since it causes the pop up action When used in this way the popup Select List ALWAYS grabs input even if you specify Grab Focus NO when you create the Select List When used as a pop up option list the Select List display type can be either a Command Option List that sends a command and or button events to an application The list is attached to the trigger DFD by entering the Select List in the Option DFD Name field and toggling the Cmnd field to Yes on the DFD Display panel for the trigger DFD or Character I O Option List that places a value in the trigger DFD The list is attached to the trigger DFD by entering the Select List name in the Option DFD Name field and toggle the Cmnd field to No on the DFD Display panel For a Select List used as Character I O Option List any entries in the Logical Server Format Name and DFD Name fields are ignored it is not necessary to enter them This type of list places a character string in the trigger DFD In either case the Select List does not pop
205. eneees 134 Copying objects Or groups ccccceesceseecceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeee 135 Moving objects or groups wesc cecececr tics ves deweceesecees learn Maes ei lasieee dees 136 Deleting objects or groups a 2c 2ecersyuas erevocs vice Ag iewnee ieee 137 Deleting all objects 22 2 ee eecceeeeeeecececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaeeeeeeeeseeneeeeeees 137 Rotating amp flipping or mirroring objects ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 138 Changing spline to line or line to spline eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 140 Adding deleting arrowheads cccccsecceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 141 AS VOU WO iscsi repute ance iat ia EE E Dein oe ee eles 142 Recoloring Objects eeii eres test les des rete aa a AE Eein AER EEES 142 Modifying a single attribute ec ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeees 143 Modifying several attributes cceceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeees 144 Undoing mistakes ian ae Ge ata ee a a es 145 Redrawing cleaning up the Drawing Area eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 145 FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Table of Contents V Scaling or shifting the entire format eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeenees 146 Special effects and advanced Methods innra aa ges ecies tated A EE E E agen 147 Using scanned images sinici ii a e EiS 147 Converting static objects to dynamic objects
206. eneral guidelines for using the Format Editor To delete dynamic fields follow these steps 1 Either select the Delete option from the Edit menu or click the mouse SELECT button on the Eraser Tool button of the Format Editor Control panel All existing dynamic fields are shown as double lined bounding boxes in the Drawing Area and the cursor turns into a double cross 2 Click the mouse SELECT button on the dynamic field you want to delete The dynamic field is removed NOTE If you delete a dynamic field by mistake use the Undo function immediately to reverse the operation You can delete more fields by repeating step 2 or you can end the delete function by selecting another editing function FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Dynamic Field Description CHAPTER 6 165 Moving dynamic fields To move an existing dynamic field to another location in the format you must be currently editing the format using the New or Open option To move a dynamic field follow these steps 1 Either select the Move option from the Edit menu or click the mouse SELECT button on the Move Tool button of the Format Editor Control panel 2 Click the mouse SELECT button on the border of the dynamic field that you want to move The dynamic field selected is highlighted fb bkgd Moving a Dynamic Field 3 Move the cursor to the new location for the dynamic field The highli
207. ent just brings up formats using whatever names are listed in the paging fields of the Format Description panel to decide where to go when a paging command is entered If any paging linkage is left blank that particular paging command is not enabled when the current format is displayed When you design your format an obvious way to use the paging commands is to define General Action Buttons that use the page forward page backward page up page down page first and page last commands and label them with meaningful labels See the General Action Button display type section in Chapter 7 FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 4 94 Format amp Layer Description Creating on line help You can provide the Sammi user with on line help by attaching a FWDU_HELP_TEXT to a format To request help the Sammi user holds down the SHIFT key and clicks the mouse OPTION button in the appropriate area of the screen to pop up a window containing the help information if it exists To create on line help follow these steps 1 Create a FWDU_HELP_TEXT End Item in the MDB via the I MDB 2 Invoke the created End Item where after a text editor appears 3 Enter the help text and save your work by pressing the Save button 4 Attach the created End Item as the Help End Item entry in the Format Description panel if you want it to pop up from the window background or the DFD Display panel if you want it to p
208. enu or select the New option to create a new format 2 Select the Read Composite option from the Composites menu of the Format Editor Control panel 3 Either enter the name without extension of an existing composite or select the name from the scrollable list that appears 4 Click the mouse SELECT button on the OK button 5 Move the cursor to the Drawing Area where the cursor changes into a bounding box the size of the composite 6 Move the cursor with the bounding box to where you want to place the composite and click the mouse SELECT button NOTE Composites are read into your format as a group To modify parts of the composite you must first ungroup the composite FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Drawing Methods CHAPTER 5 149 Deleting composites To delete a composite 1 From the Format Editor Control panel select the Delete Composite option from the Composites menu of the Format Editor Control panel 2 Either enter the name without extension of an existing composite or select the name from the scrollable list that appears 3 Click the mouse SELECT button on the OK button When the confirmation panel appears click on the Yes button FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 5 150 Drawing Methods FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 cuaptens Dynamic Field Description 6 151 Dyna
209. er Display Type Select a display type for this dynamic field from a pop up option list by clicking the mouse OPTION button on this field Then click the mouse SELECT button on your choice Data Access Type Select a data access type for this dynamic field from a pop up option list by clicking the mouse OPTION button on this field Then click the mouse SELECT button on your choice Refresh Rate Enter an integer for the refresh rate Refresh Type Select the refresh type by clicking on the box beside this label to toggle between poll and stream Width Height Location Enter integers for the size and location of the dynamic field Width and Height indicate the actual size of the dynamic field in characters or pixels Location indicates the horizontal and vertical offset from the top left corner of the format in pixels You can enter the Width and Height here or set these fields by sizing the dynamic field in the Drawing Area Location may be set by the position in the Drawing Area or by entering the pixel coordinates FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Dynamic Field Description CHAPTER 6 169 DFD Display Entries continued Entry Option Help File Security Level Option DFD Cmnd Enterable Log Entries Confirm Entry RT Annotations Description Use the End Item button if you want to attach help The field is read only Enter an integer for the security level code for this
210. eral Action Button GAB also called Button e General Action Button Grouping also called Button Grouping e Graphic Data Field e Graph Plot Trend Integer e Menu e Meter Gauge e Meter Fixed Scale Linear e Meter Moving Scale Linear e Object Icon e Option List e Piechart FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 7 200 Display Types Real Region Scrollbar Selection List Slider Bar also called Slider Symbol Table Tabular Text Text Browser Data Input Output also called Browser Text Table FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 Display Types CHAPTER 7 201 Alarm optional Sample Format alarmwindow If your system includes the optional Alarm subsystem you have access to several alarm windows supplied for displaying colour coded messages about alarms and system events These windows are suitable for most purposes but you can also use the Alarm display type to create your own message displays The messages fall into two general categories e System events These are special functions performed by the Sammi user such as entering data into a dynamic field logging on off starting Sammi etc The message usually indicates what happened and when For example the following message may appear under certain conditions to indicate that a user who logged in as Sandia changed the value in a dynamic field from 12 to 15 at 3
211. es continued Entry Option Description Border Thickness Enter an integer for the number of pixels used for the border thickness a zero means no border Border Style For a border thickness greater than zero 0 select a border style by clicking the mouse SELECT button on one of these buttons Shadow In Shadow Out Shadow Etched In Shadow Etched Out Notes String Enter the text for notes if any You can format the string in as many lines as desired New lines are specified by entering n anywhere in the text n when found is interpreted as a new line and does not print A double backslash n n is printed as n Spacing and margins for the string is specified as part of the string For example if you want a margin of 1 character on the top bottom and sides of the string with a two line string you would enter n first line of text n second line of text n Notes Color Either enter a color for the notes string or click the mouse OPTION button in this box to display an option list Notes Font Either enter a font for the notes string or click the mouse button in this field to display a list of choices Legend bg Color Either enter a color for the legend s background or click the mouse button in this field to display a list of choices FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 321 Real Sample Format sample_litrl The Real display type displays and accepts
212. es your selection FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Format amp Layer Description CHAPTER 4 97 3 Ifyou are importing an xbm file enter the desired foreground color for the im age in the box beside the Color label under the Window Background Image titles To choose a color either click the mouse OPTION button in the box to the right of Color and then click the mouse SELECT button on a color from the resulting pop up option list or enter a color name exactly as it is shown in Appendix A Stand ard Colors If the imported file is in gi or xwd format the Format Editor ig nores the color designation and uses the xwd or gif colors A special X Window System function converts xwd or gif colors to the closest color avail able on the X server to avoid loss of hues 4 Press the RETURN key The image appears automatically in the background of the fb bkgd_ format Importing a movable static image To import a static graphic object that can be moved and or resized on the format 1 Select Import Image from the File menu in the Format Editor Control panel to retrieve a graphic The window below appears end item_popup es X Patne suport o ce 2 Complete the Pathname to an image End Item See Section Accepted image for mats Pathname Support will filter the End Items The Pathname is by default prefixed with the path to the invoked synoptic display 3 Press OK 4 Posit
213. eside maximum the value that is displayed in the box beside initial Under the word Height in the Window Control section of the Format Description panel enter in the box beside initial the value that is displayed in the box beside maximum NOTE In the Equipment Constraints a maximum for the Width and Height is set For more details see The FWDU Text Editor on page 365 5 Click the mouse SELECT button on 6 the OK button at the bottom of the Format Description panel Notice that the Drawing Area background color changes to lightsteelblue as you selected in step 3 7 Select Save from the File menu in the Format Editor Control panel to save the format in the End Item you invoked You can also use Save As to store the format in a different End Item When you finish the above steps proceed to the next lesson FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Learning the Format Editor 3 59 Part 2 Setting colors and adding text labels This procedure shows you how to add the first text labels to your drawing You are only adding two labels at this point the rest will be added in later lessons This procedure also explains how to use the color palette to set the foreground color before creating an object and how to recolor object attributes Before starting make sure you have successfully completed Part 1 of this tutorial Setting default colors To set the default colors 1 Choo
214. ess Description Entries continued Entry Option Description Key Type This field can be used to distinguish between different modes of data access for certain applications For example one key type might let you access every data value while another might let you access every other data value Check with your site s API developer to find out if this field is supported If not leave it zero 0 Data Access End Item An End Item Use the End Item button to change this field WARNING _ If two or more DFDs on the same format access the same logical server those DFDs must be set as the same Refresh Type either Poll or Stream on the respective DFD Display panels Remember if you are not sure of the correct entries for this panel ask your system administrator and or API developer for assistance Sammi is provided with contributed software applications that you can use to test formats For a description of these applications please refer to the Contributed Software Guide Using runtime keys Runtime keys function as generic variables for which a user can substitute specific values they basically keep you from having to hard wire a specific reference to a data item This is useful if you do not know the specific variable when creating a format or when required to link multiple versions of the same format to different data sources You can use runtime keys in the Data Access Description panel s read key write key and logical
215. ew lines are specified by entering n anywhere in the text label n when found is interpreted as a new line and does not print A double backslash n n is printed as n Spacing and margins for the labels are specified as part of the label text For example if you want a margin of 1 character on the top bottom and sides of the button label with a two line label you would specify the label text as n first line of text n second line of text n Label Color If you enter a label either enter a color here or click the mouse SELECT button to display a list of choices Label Font If you enter a label either enter a font for the label or click the mouse OPTION button in this box to display a list of On Off Text String FWDU command send to the runtimesystem data server Pressing the Edit button the following window appears end SSMBNROV2 COMMANDINGSSHOP4 p1 gt 5 p2 gt E p3 gt 2 p4 gt 1 p5 gt 2 p6 gt 5 l For a detailed description of the Edit_Cmd_popup see Entering a Command on page 195 FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 7 308 Display Types Option List Sample Format sample_menu Any dynamic field you create can have a pop up Option List display type associated with it An Option List is basically a way of viewing all possible entry selections for a given dynamic field on a set list then selecting one The Sammi user will display th
216. f pixel measurements see Appendix E Window size width height On some workstations you can change the size of fb bkgd and thus the size of the final Sammi window by dragging corners of the frame as explained below NOTE Some window managers do not support this method If the following steps do not work see your window manager documentation for instructions on resizing windows 1 Move the cursor to the lower right corner of the fb bkgd_ format 2 Hold down the mouse SELECT button and use the mouse to drag the corner in any direction As you do so the corner moves with the cursor fb bkgd 3 When the fb bkgd format is the desired size release the SELECT button FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 4 92 Format amp Layer Description NOTE When you use the previous procedure to resize the fb bkgd format you must change the maximum width and height fields on the Format Description panel to add objects to the area outside of the original maximum size indicated by a white box After you resize using the method on the previous page the values in the cur fields under the Width and Height should be used in the respective maximum fields to adjust the drawing area with the size of the window You can also resize the fb bkgd format by typing new dimensions next to Width and Height in the Format Description panel The width
217. f sah tates needed OxB9 superior T a sis OxBA masculine O or or superior mee oO Pe numeral OxBB right guillemot ne OxBC 1 4 T 4 14 5 OxBD 1 2 TP 2 5 3 OxBE 3 4 3 4 34 OxBF inverted i lt PA OxCO A with grave A E accent A 3 0xC1 A with acute V A accent a A 5 OxC2 A with A nt circumflex F accent A S A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 Special amp International Characters APPENDIX M 413 Second E character amp Resulting Hex value Description First character third af sah tates needed OxC3 A with tilde A ay A 5 OxC4 A with diaresis lt A A 3 OxC5 A with ring mee A A 5 OxC6 AE A E dipthon oe P 8 TE OxC7 C with cedilla Ne C 5 OxC8 E with grave E Sa accent m 5 E 5 OxC9 E with acute Vv E accent 5 E 5 OxCA E with E aN circumflex vs accent E OxCB E with diaresis lt lt E Py e OxCC I with grave T S accent T FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 APPENDIX M 414 Special amp International Characters Second TE character amp Resulting Hex value Description First character third af sah tates needed OxCD I with acute Vv T accent l i OxCE I with T A circumflex 4s accent l OxCF I with tree T diaresis ije 0xDO
218. f07 For more information on keyboard definitions see the System Administrator s Guide Display type specifications Enter the following specifications as illustrated on the panel below Tos fb button FE General Action Button Display q General Action Button Display Button Type Push Button vy Togale W O Indicator v Togale W7 Indicator Button Label Type Text v Image GIF XWD XBM wv Transparent Button Label e Button Label Selected i I S o L Shadow Thickness EE wen lt Indicator Color I Sensitive Yes Data Type Long Initial State On No Gadget No ize 3 2 m o 7 ai On Text String Edit Sensitive Bitmat End Item Insensitive Bitmap End Item Off Text String Edit Sensitive Bitmap End Item Insensitive Bitmap End Item i Enter Reset FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 7 246 Display Types Entry Option Button Type Button Label Type Button Label General Action Button GAB Display Entries Description Click the mouse SELECT button on one of the buttons in the box to the right of this field to select a button type see explanation in the introduction to this section Push Button Toggle W O Indicator no indicator Toggle W Indicator with indicator Click the mouse SELECT button on one of the buttons in the box to the right of this field to select a button label type Text Image
219. files etc Display data and or allow user entries Display mixed data text and numeric Display symbols that indicate the nature of incoming data Display a message that changes based on incoming data Perform spreadsheet like calculations on other dynamic fields Make background objects rotate blink change appearance Show data as a needle moving across a dial Show data as a moving scale across a reference point Use This Display Type Custom Time demo_ssdtg Text Browser sample_brwser Real Integer Text sample_litrl Formatted Numeric amp Tabular sample_litrl Symbol Table sample_sfs Text Table sample_afs Equation sample_eqn Dynamic Objects sample_dob Meter Gauge Fixed scale Linear Meter sample_meter Moving scale Linear Meter 12 30 34 9 14 94 fe SS Lda A POWER POWER OFF ON PETE Pee Pi B T 100 0 a 50 40 a ses Ba 5 sample_ms1l DOG NH wow Show data as a growing and Bar ie shrinking column on a bar graph sample_bar 5o 40 20 Lo UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 2 26 Getting Started Selecting Data Display Options If Your Objective Is To Allow analog input of numeric data using a Sliding control Plot data points vs time Plot multiple data sets Provide symbols that c
220. for the labels are specified as part of the label text For example if you want a margin of 1 character on the top bottom and sides of the button label with a two line label you would specify the label text as n first line of text n second line of text n Label Color If you enter a label either enter a color or click the mouse SELECT button to display a list of choices Label Font If you enter a label either enter a font for the label or click the mouse OPTION button in this box to display a list of choices FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 7 342 Display Types Tabular Sample Format sample_tabular The Tabular display type displays data output only in a columnar format It can include an optional title optional column headings and optional scroll bars Data Definition Record Sammi uses a Data Definition Record DDR to define the structure for a runtime data buffer which this display type uses for data arrangement You can use any text editor to create a DDR save the file with an extension of ddr The Runtime Environment then reads these files at startup Before creating a Tabular DFD you MUST create a ddr file consisting of record definitions each definition describes the data format of a data buffer passed between the Runtime Environment and an API Application This allows the Runtime Environment to unpack the data buffer and to format the data for display Each
221. fted if any See Appendix G Shifting and Masking for more information Select the type of incoming data value being received by the dynamic field Click the mouse SELECT button on one of the following options Short Long Float Double FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 8 Data Access Types 8 355 Dynamic fields accept user input and interpret display incoming data from a variety of sources providing Sammi s real time monitoring and control capabilities The last two chapters have described general functions of dynamic fields and how to change the way they display data This chapter shows how to link dynamic fields to live data sources This link is made through a data access type that forms part of the dynamic field description which you can select on the DFD Display panel The Sammi data access types are e Curve Set used exclusively for the Curve Set display type it is a subset of the Universal type see below e LCL ocal used for dynamic fields that receive their data from a local data source such as other dynamic fields file input static data tables or window application procedures and Alarm DFDs e NOP no operation used by the display types General Action Button GAB GAB Group and Equations or this type is used by the Sammi format conversion utility when it reads a dynamic field on an ASCII format file that contains an obsolete or unknown data t
222. g bg ac mask blink shift opcode value fg ac_color function bg blink ac ac_color lt function gt shift opcode value hex bitmask 0x00000001 or predefined bitmask RTDA_U1 rtda h foreground color blank use current background color blank blink blank no blink appended characters up to two use current append character color blank use current LEX logical true MTC Multibit Translate and Compare shift value for MTC types comparison operation EQ NE GT GE LT LE for MTC types value to compare against for MTC types The table is in decreasing order of priority 536870912 HITE BLUE 7 D po LEX Deactivated off scan 2147483648 YELLOW RED P y N y DEX non update communication error 1073741824 UE WHITE I LEX Inhibited operator invalidated Use different color for unack until blink works on sun 1 RED BLACK Y i LEX Unacknowledged alarm 1 RED YELLOW Y j LEX Unacknowledged alarm 32 MAGENTA BLACK 7 Cy BEX Commanded device 64 BLUE RED y E LEX Transducer error 256 RED BLACK HH LEX High High 128 RED e BURCK pe 4 Lilly LEX Low Low 8 RED BLACK pe ERS LEX rate of change 4 RED BLACK H LEX High 16 RED BLACK AL LEX Alarm stat
223. g an ASCII editor to create a Standard Menu Table and then selecting Standard as the Menu Type from the Menu display panel For more information on command files see Appendix C FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 7 282 Display Types Standard Command File The hot key specification is not supported in the Standard Menu command file Dynamic menu Menu specifications can be sent to the Menu display type from an application When the Menu Type in the Menu display panel is set as Dynamic and you click the mouse SELECT button on the Enter button the Universal Data Definition panel displays Set the Number of Values field in this panel to the maximum number of entries that the menu can ever contain see Chapter 8 for information about this panel NOTE The Data Access Type in the DFD Display panel must be set to Universal for Dynamic menu specification see Chapter 6 FWDU UM 114 002 ROV User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 283 Meter Gauge Sample Format sample_meter The Meter and Gauge display types are Sammi based representations of analog devices which use a needle to point to the current data value These display types are virtually identical except for their shapes a Meter appears as a square device while a Gauge appears as a round one Both real numbers and integers are acceptable incoming data for this display type Sammi scales both display types to fi
224. g on the Save DFD button on the DFD Display panel Panels remain displayed during DFD operations and are removed only when the Cancel DFD button in the DFD Display panel is selected or when they are being replaced by another panel for instance when DFD types are changed This is the default mode Design mode Inhibits the display of the DFD attributes panels during most DFD operations and automatically saves DFDs when they are added from the palette or by the Read DFD Lib option The panels are displayed only when you select the DFD Attributes option from the Edit menu or when you select the Add DFD option from the Dynamic Fields menu The panels are removed when you click the mouse SELECT button on the Save DFD button or the Cancel DFD button on the DFD Display panel FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 6 156 Dynamic Field Description System Preferences Entries continued Entry Option Redisplay Group Selection Inactive Layer Color Description Determines the amount of the Drawing Area that is redrawn after an editing operation This option has no effect on the Redisplay option of the View menu or the Redisplay selection from the Drawing Area pop up option menu as those two options always redraw the entire Drawing Area Minimum redisplay Redraws only those objects that you have just edited If you move an object or change an object s default that impacts other obj
225. ghted box should move to indicate the size of the dynamic field If it does not repeat step 2 NOTE Turning off the Snap feature bottom of Drawing Tools panel may make it easier to select a dynamic field that is difficult to select Be sure to turn Snap back on if you need it for drawing or alignment 4 When the highlighted box reaches the desired location click the mouse SELECT button again The highlighted box should remain fixed at the desired location You can move more fields by repeating steps 2 3 and 4 or you can end the move function by selecting another editing function FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 6 166 Dynamic Field Description Copying dynamic fields To make a copy of an existing dynamic field you must be currently editing the format using the New or Open option To copy a dynamic field follow these steps 1 Either select the Copy option from the Edit menu or click the mouse SELECT button on the Copy Tool button of the Format Editor Control panel All existing dynamic fields are shown as double line bounding boxes in the Drawing Area and the cursor turns into a hand 2 Click the mouse SELECT button on the dynamic field that you want to copy A new second bounding box appears at the cursor and the appropriate DFD description panels appear if you have selected the production editing mode see page 6 5 for information about how these panels are displayed
226. hadow of the bar For each threshold you want to use enter the following values Label Enter a label for each threshold If you enter the environment variable CUR LIMIT the current threshold displays as the label at runtime NOTE If you enter the Max and Min Values for the top and bottom labels respectively you will have only four other thresholds to label Show The Max and Min values are read only And Yes is always FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 7 208 Display Types set Value Max and min are read only The six Data values automatic taken from measurement end item when associating measurement end item The six Values are Danger Limits High Value Nominal Limit High Value Nominal Limit High Value Nominal Limit High Value Nominal Limit Low Value Danger Limits Low Value Label amp Bar Color Either enter a label and the bar color for the threshold or select a color by clicking the mouse OPTION button in the field below the Label amp Color title and to the right of each threshold FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Display Types CHAPTER 7 209 Barchart Sample Format sample_barchart The Barchart display type is a display only group of either horizontal or vertical bar graphs as shown in the illustration below With either orientation color bars increase or decrease in size to show the current data value for multiple
227. han zero either enter a border color or select a color by clicking the mouse OPTION button in this box to display a list of choices Enter an integer for the number of pixels used for the border width a zero means no border For a border width greater than zero select a border style by clicking the mouse SELECT button on one of the following choices Shadow In Shadow Out Shadow Etched In Shadow Etched Out Select whether to display the incoming data value digitally in a box below or beside the scale depending on the orientation by clicking the mouse SELECT button in this box to toggle between Yes and No If you choose to show the value either enter a color for the background of the box for the value or select a color by clicking the mouse OPTION button in this box to display a list of choices FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 7 294 Display Types Fixed Scale Linear Meter Entries continued Entry Option Foreground Color Decimal Digits Conv Factor Data Type Font Scale Minimum Scale Maximum Description If you choose to show the value either enter a color for the foreground of the box for the value or select a color by clicking the mouse OPTION button in this box to display a list of choices If you choose to show the value enter the number of digits to display after the decimal point Any incoming data value is truncated at this number of digits
228. he mouse SELECT button on the Enter button you will see the following panel x fb listcmd FE List Commands Insert Line Delete Line Static Select List Item Command Entries Enter Reset Item Name Edit Command String aw SSMB ROY2 SETUP SIMPLE DDOS aw SSMB ROV2 SETUP METER_DDOS ELLEELELLL To insert or delete a line from this list place the cursor where desired and click the mouse SELECT button on the Insert Line or Delete Line button Static Select List Item Command Entries Entry Option Description Item Name Enter the text that will display on the Select list for each option FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 335 Static Select List Item Command Entries continued Entry Option Description Command String FWDU command which is sent to the runtime system Pressing the Edit button the following window appears Edit_Cmd_popup aw SSMB ROV2 SETUP SIMPLE_DDOS OK Cancel Type in a command and press OK FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 7 336 Display Types Slider Sample Format sample_slider The Slider display type is an input output display type similar to a Scrollbar display type in appearance but which functions as a stand alone type It can display a data value or allow a user to drag the slider to change a value The Slider display type can be creat
229. hem with this option As you work Any of the operations discussed on the following pages may be performed as you work in the Drawing Area Recoloring objects Recolor Tool Recoloring often involves much more than just changing the color of an object When you use the Recolor function in its simplest form you are actually resetting the object to all current default colors fonts line styles and fill styles The Recolor function allows you to change the font of already entered text For these reasons the Recolor function is a quick and easy way to make multiple changes in appearance to a series of objects even those in groups To use the simple form of the Recolor function to modify objects 1 Set all colors lines styles and fill styles exactly as you want them to be applied to the object s being changed 2 Select the Recolor button under the Drawing Tools on the Format Editor Control panel 3 Move the cursor to the Drawing Area and click on the object to effect the change Repeat this step for any other object you want to change NOTE If an object fails to change either it already has the default attributes or you did not click on the correct area First try turning off the Snap option on the Format Editor Control panel Then try clicking directly on a corner outline or control point For text try clicking at the beginning of the line FWDU
230. hey can be easily retrieved and inserted into any format that you are creating FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 5 104 Drawing Methods Drawing tools available With the Drawing Tools buttons on the Format Editor Control panel you can e Draw objects such as Rectangles or squares Lines with single or multiple segments Polygons open and closed Circles by radius or by diameter Ellipses by radius or by diameter Splines open and closed Arcs or wedges Text words numbers symbols e Manipulate objects or groups by Defining the grid and snap values for easy alignment Setting their line orientation control diagonal horizontal vertical Adjusting their shapes or sizes Changing their attributes Grouping ungrouping them Moving copying them Scaling them Deleting them Flipping them horizontal vertical Rotating them clockwise counterclockwise Changing splines to polylines or polylines to splines FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 Drawing Methods CHAPTER 5 105 With the pulldown and pop up menus on the Format Editor Control panel you can e Set the following attributes Text font Resetting their drawing order front to back Line thickness Line fill style solid dash Line cap and joint style Line dash pattern Line ar
231. hoices Either enter a color or click the mouse OPTION button in this box to display a list of choices Either enter a color or click the mouse OPTION button in this box to display a list of choices Add this button which allows the user to write the data after changes by clicking the mouse SELECT button in this box to toggle between Yes or No FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 7 350 Display Types Text Browser Data Input Output Field Display Entries continued Entry Option File Select Button Dynamic Browser Max Characters Dynamic Browser Data Processing Method Description Add this button to display a file selection dialog box which allows the user to save the file to a new location or under a new name Enter the maximum number of characters that are retrieved from the runtime buffer during a refresh cycle If the text does not contain any return characters n it displays as one long line Trailing blanks are stripped to the last printable character This entry applies only when you select the Dynamic type see Type above This function is provided for backwards compatability with browsers created in Release 2 0 You most likely should set this as Standard which means an application provides the maximum characters of data that is formatted with carriage returns Special should only be used with applications designed to provide data in a different manner please co
232. ick the mouse SELECT button in the box to the right of Width in pixels and enter 350 This sets the width of the area for the meter FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 3 70 Learning the Format Editor 5 Either press the TAB key or click the mouse SELECT button in the box to the right of Height in pixels and enter 250 This sets the height of the area for the meter NOTE You can change the size of any DFD at any time by clicking the mouse SELECT button on the Resize Tool button on the Format Editor Control panel Then click the mouse SELECT button on the corner of the outline of the DFD you want to resize and move the cursor to adjust the DFD to the desired size and click the mouse SELECT button again 6 Either press the TAB key or click the mouse SELECT button in the box to the right of Enterable to toggle to No This DFD is display only Entering data on the Meter Display Panel Now move the cursor to the Meter Display panel and follow the steps listed below fb meter FE Meter Meter Display Meter coor peT ill Meter Yes j g C Dial Color Scale Color De Wide Scale No J Show Ticks No L Tick Incr C HifLo Marks Yes Needle Color i Show Value Yes i Decimal Dgt EE i Min Value B 1 Max Value come _ Limits i Conv Factor WE i Data Type O H E i VRAN n Laber Label Color H Border Color
233. ide of the Drawing Area so that its upper left corner is near the ruler on the top line at the one inch mark then click on the mouse SELECT button This positions the Meter DFD FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Learning the Format Editor 3 69 Entering data on the DFD Display Panel Now move the cursor to the DFD Display panel ipa fb dfd DFD Display DFD Name pnn Display Type Data Access Type Refresh Rate zz Refresh Type Poll Width Chr Pixels EE Il Height Chr Pixels HE Location X Y E ET Help File r Security Level 0 Option DFD a Cmnd No Enterable yes Confirm Entry No Log Entries No RT Annotations no Notify upon Select No FG Color lightsteelbluel BG Color Font courier bold 12 pt Save DFD Cancel DFD 1 Enter the word testmeter in the box next to DFD Name Do not press the RETURN key yet 2 Either press the TAB key or click the mouse SELECT button in the box to the right of Refresh Rate and enter 5 This sets the time between field refreshes to 5 seconds 3 Either press the TAB key or click the mouse SELECT button in the box to the right of Refresh Type to toggle to Poll This sets the way the network checks for refreshing Poll means that data is read at certain intervals When set to stream the dataserver only sends data when needed You can not see and difference when previewing 4 Either press the TAB key or cl
234. ield Description Display Types and Compatible Data Access Types Universal Local NOP Time Curve Set Alarm Bar Barchart Curve Sets Custom Time Dynamic Object Equation Formatted Numeric Gauges General Action Button Button Group Graphic Data Field Integer Menu Meters Meters Fixed Scale Meters Moving Scale Object Icon Options Pie Charts Plot Real Region Scroll Bar Selection List Slider Symbol Table Text X X X x x KM KM gt lt KoKo o gt lt x x x KK FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 Dynamic Field Description CHAPTER 6 173 Linear Local NOP Time Universal Text X Browser Text Table X Trend X If you set the General Action Button Data Access Type to NOP you should set the Refresh Rate to 0 zero and the Poll Type to Stream This reduces the load on the Runtime Environment and enhances overall performance FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 6 174 Dynamic Field Description Specifying refresh rate and type For each dynamic field that accepts data from applications you must specify a refresh rate and a refresh type The refresh rate controls how often data will be supplied to the dynamic field and the refresh type controls how data will be supplied The refresh rate is expressed
235. ield editing by clicking on the Cancel DFD button at the bottom of the DFD Display panel FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Getting Started 2 49 Other format editing operations While editing a format you can perform several editing operations Moving static objects To move a static object or dynamic field 1 Click the mouse SELECT button on the Move Tool button or select the Move option from the Edit menu on the Format Editor Control panel 2 Move the cursor to the Drawing Area and click the mouse SELECT button on the object to be moved 3 Move the outline of the object to the location where you want it located and click the mouse SELECT button again Deleting static objects To delete a static object or a dynamic field 1 Click the mouse SELECT button on the Eraser Tool button or select the Delete option from the Edit menu on the Format Editor Control panel 2 Move the cursor to the Drawing Area and click the mouse SELECT button on the object to be deleted It disappears from the screen NOTE If you make a mistake immediately select the Undo option on the Edit menu or click the mouse OPTION button and select the undo option from the resulting list Adding static objects and dynamic fields DFDs Use the Drawing Tools buttons to draw all static background objects in the format Most drawing is done by clicking a Drawing Tool button then clicking at the desired location i
236. ier bold 12 pt Save DFD Cancel DFD When the DFD Display panel first appears most fields may already contain default values this depends on the method you have used to create the DFD You can change any of these by clicking on the field and using the editing keys described in Chapter 2 Press the RETURN key when you have finished You can select many of these entries from pop up option lists by moving the cursor into the box beside the entry name and clicking the mouse OPTION button then moving the cursor to the selection that you want and clicking the mouse SELECT button More information on specific entries is provided after the DFD Display Entries table FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 6 168 Dynamic Field Description DFD Display Entries Entry Option Description DFD Name Enter a name for the dynamic field You must include this name in cases where other dynamic fields such as an Equation refer to this dynamic field If the dynamic field is a Menu display type the DFD Name must be SMAINMENU to produce a pop up menu or SMAINPANEL to produce a menu bar NOTE Providing a unique DFD name for each dynamic field is highly desirable and may speed data server integration NOTE Be sure the entries that you select for the display type and data access type are compatible as explained in the Defining the display type and data access type section in this chapt
237. ies Entry Option Description Alarm Screen Type Select the type of alarm window being created By selecting one of the options below you can set the initial filters for the window so that it shows only a given type of message Click the mouse SELECT button on one of the buttons in the box below this field to select Alarm Active Alarm Events User Defined This is a filter window that the user can define FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 7 204 Display Types Bar Sample Format sample_bar The Bar display type provides either a horizontal or a vertical bar graph as shown in the illustration below In either orientation a colour bar increases or decreases in size to show the current data value Show value decimal min max conversion type 31 5 a Slider color fill Scale labels colors 100 80 20 0 y 31 5 Vertical Horizontal Bar Bar For example if the incoming data value is 31 5 the bar expands proportionally to line up with 31 5 on the scale as based on defined minimum and maximum scale limits Either real numbers or integers are acceptable as incoming data for this display type Sammi scales the bar graph automatically to fit the area covered by the dynamic field When creating a bar graph therefore you can make the dynamic field any size please refer to Chapter 6 for details You can set the positioning and labelling of tick marks on the bar g
238. ification of the commercial tool Sammi from Kinesix The Format Editor is used for creating and editing synoptic dis plays The major new features in the FWDU compared to the standard Sammi product are The FWDU interfaces to the MDA File saves and read are directed to the mission data base application The FWDU checks each display for consistency errors and reports them at save time The FWDU can preview displays The FWDU handles On board Commands and Pre defined Commands The FWDU generates cross reference lists in the MDB The FWDU automatically files out several attributes in each DDO based on the attached End Item The FWDU can generate display reports The FWDU has an improved user interface The FWDU automatically files out the logical server fields More details about the FWDU Format Editor can be found in the remainder of this document FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 1 12 Welcome to the Format Editor FWDU Text Editor The FWDU Text Editor is a basic editor for writing and modifying text files used by the FWDU The Text Editor reads saves the files from into the mission database The Text Editor has some in telligent functionality which at save time and at read time checks the text and modifies it if neces sary The basic functionality of the FWDU TExt Editor is described in Chapter 9 The FWDU Text Editor Tools Interacting with the FWDU The FWDU is a par
239. in rtda dat file and has a value of is displayed as GREEN The mask value for background color is found in bits 8 11 with bits with bits 0 7 holding Zeros 1111 0000 0000 Bits 8 11 of the mask are ANDed to bits 8 11 of the quality word 00100010110010011100101000010110 1111 1010 1010 1010 converts to a decimal 10 so the background color is determined from record 10 eleventh record of the rtda dat file and has a value of BLACK This approach to runtime annotations allows an almost limitless number of records when the file is created it must have as many records as the highest possible value of the quality word FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Sample Runtime Annotation Table APPENDIX D 385 Substitutions for null 0 and blank s entries are given below If fg_color or char_fg_color 0 in the mask or is a blank in that entry in the table the DFD foreground color is used If bg_color or char_bg_color 0 in the mask or is a blank s in that entry in the table the DFD background color is used If both char1 and char2 0 the bounding box drawn around enterable DFDs at runtime will not contain appended characters If char1 0 or s and char2 is not 0 a two character bounding box is drawn in runtime with char1 displayed as a blank space If neither char1 or char2 0 a two character bounding box is drawn in runtime LEX method lt mask gt where f
240. in this chapter Constraints Another option that affects how some line segments are drawn is the Constraints option You can have three possible constraints e No constraints With this option set you can easily draw lines at any angle e Horizontal vertical constraints With this option set you can draw exact alternating horizontal and vertical lines e Diagonal constraint With this option set you can draw lines at precise alternating 45 degree angles FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 5 116 Drawing Methods To display the Constraints panel 1 Select the Constraints option from the Style menu on the Format Editor Control panel The Constraints panel appears No contraints Horizontal Diagonal Vertical constraints constraints Line Constraint Buttons 2 Click the mouse SELECT button on one of the push buttons The button that indicates your selection appears pushed in 3 Click the mouse SELECT button on the OK button to close the pop up panel To close the pop up panel without making changes click the mouse SELECT button on the Cancel button NOTE Constraints may work differently on different platforms On some if you start in the wrong direction after clicking a point the rubberband line gets started in the wrong direction On others you must be careful to click directly on top of the expanding rubberband line to set a point FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 U
241. ind this stipple does not show through If you set the fill type to transparent or opaque stipple you should also select a stipple pattern see the Fill pattern Stippled section FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 Drawing Methods CHAPTER 5 119 Fill rule Even Odd Winding Even Odd Winding fill fill The fill rule is used to control the filling of certain complex polygons such as a five point star that have overlapping areas Two options are available e Even odd Overlaps are not always filled e Winding Overlaps are always filled Fill pattern Stippled The fill pattern is used to produce different textures or patterns for filled objects including circles arcs polygons or rectangles In order for a fill pattern to work you must first set the fill type to transparent stipple or opaque stipple as described earlier How to draw objects Once you have set the defaults for line style fill style and other attributes you are ready to begin drawing All static objects drawn in the Drawing Area p bkgd will appear in the Runtime Environment in the same size and location that you draw them here within a window of the same proportions as the Drawing Area fb bkgd To draw an object you must select the correct tool from the Drawing Tools section of the Format Editor Control panel then click on two or three points in the Drawing Area to describe the locati
242. index lookup symbol entry records entry format is sym_name fg_color bg_color lt optional gt blink sym_name is the name of the bitmap file for the symbol MUST be quoted fg_color is the foreground color bg_color is the background color blink is an optional keyword If present the symbol will blink when it is displayed Unless blink is specified fg_color and bg_color can be any standard color If blink is specified fg_color and bg_color can only be black white red green blue yellow cyan or magenta Records are 1 5 Symbol table indexes corresponding to the symbol entry records are index 0 record 1 index 1 record 2 index 2 record 3 index 3 record 4 and index 4 record 5 Data values are converted to long integers shifted and masked and the resulting number is used as the index into the symbol table If the resulting index is 0 valcls is selected and if it is 4 valopn is selected If the index is out of range an error symbol is selected ROVSING A S valcls red white valtran3 magenta white valtran2 magenta white valtranl magenta white valopn blue white UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 APPENDIX L 406 Sample Symbol Text Tables Text table value lookup file example valuetxt safs example definition file for value lookup text table header record MUST BE BEFORE symbol entry records
243. ing Zero No Data Type Long Shift Right E Mask Hex SC Reset Display Format Integer Display Entries Description Select a conversion code for incoming data see Appendix F for details Read only These values are Engineering range High Value and Engineering range Low Value automatic taken from the specified measurement End Item in fb uni Enter the minimum value allowed for user entry if such input is allowed zero indicates no limit FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV User Manual 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 275 Entry Option Display Type Leading Zeros Data Type Shift Right Mask Integer Display Entries continued Description Select the format in which you want the integer value to display Click the mouse SELECT button on one of the three options Decimal base 10 Hex base 16 Octal base 8 Click the mouse SELECT button to toggle between Yes to display leading zeros or No to not display leading Zeros Select the type of integer value you want displayed Click the mouse SELECT button on the field to toggle between the following options Short Long For certain applications where you want to isolate specific bits in a data value enter the number of bits to shift right For more information see Appendix G Shifting and Masking For certain applications where you want to isolate specific bits in a data value enter the mask value to apply to the data value afte
244. ing existing formats cccceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 46 Viewing and modifying the Format Description panel 47 Inserting UNIX files into the MDB eeececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeees 47 Modifying static background objects ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 47 Modifying dynamic fields DFDS e cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 47 Other format editing operations sc sece aed ees cies sakspenvesceiccinaetvvervaee ct 49 Moving static objects 2ccccz sec sgcte Grane ia ceac ade cigauden jun Tiseedseanel vores econ ets 49 Deleting static objects 20 0 cece cecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseneeeeees 49 Adding static objects and dynamic fields DFDs seeee 49 Viewing dynamic fields DFDs iccccccsis seasons clad cede dae abceeeadeatsetluoee 49 Copying formals mrin oie Manto i E taeda cess 50 Deleting formats orig celeste tek ehccdeade woes ee oeedsceteasee tener cieee ates 50 Quitting the Format Editor Si uscineceos caceeseetnes Vas Reqartevti ence alaerond aunsenceshroneeneies 50 Learning the Format Editor 51 About the sample format 0 cccccceeeeeeseeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeenaaeaeeeeeeeeeeeaes 52 External look and Op Graton ca cxcgis see rence ecetes te ote ae ee eee ener 52 internal mechanisms siian aeaa ea aaae a a aerae KES Eaa AE Ea aa 52 What you Will eai a aa aa a aa 54 Lesson 1 Building a fortial a4 Ae a acest 54 Lesson 2
245. ing objects with more than two control points as explained in Chapter 5 Used with SHIFT key to view on line help information hold down SHIFT key before clicking OPTION MENU NOTE While in the Format Editor using the SHIFT OPTION MENU for help only displays the standard option menu Always use the SELECT button for clicking and dragging the mouse cursor unless otherwise directed Clicking means to press the button and release it while in one position Dragging means to hold down the button while you move the mouse FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 Getting Started 2 35 The Format Editor Control panel The Format Editor provides a Control panel that appears when you first start the program This panel has several areas The Main Menu for accessing the different commands The Drawing Tools buttons to create static objects for formats See Chapter 5 The Snap and Grid buttons for turning those functions on and off See Chapter 5 The command line where you enter Sammi commands The area above the command line where error messages status information and command feedback are displayed FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 2 36 Getting Started Pull down menus The following table is a summary of each of the menus and their options Format Editor Control Panel Menus Menu option Command equivalent Purp
246. ing the following comparison If value of record i lt data value lt value of record i 1 select symbol from record i see below sym_name is the name of the bitmap file for the symbol MUST be quoted fg_color is the foreground color bg_color is the background color blink is an optional keyword If present the symbol will blink when it is displayed Unless blink is specified fg_color and bg_color can be any standard color H f blink is specified fg_color and bg_color can only be black white red green blue yellow cyan or magenta Entry records must be arranged so that the values associated with the symbols INCREASE from the first record to the last record 0 valcls red white 0 valtran3 magenta white 0 valtran2 magenta white 0 valtranl magenta white 0 valopn blue white Here is how the value lookup works for this example file incoming value selected symbol reason 0 5 valcls 0 0 lt 0 5 lt 5 0 14 995 valtran2 10 0 lt 14 995 lt 15 0 20 0 valopn 20 0 lt 20 0 lt infinity 109 2 valcls infinity lt 109 2 lt lt 0 0 FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Sample Symbol Text Tables Editor APPENDIX L 405 Symbol table index lookup file example indexsym safs example definition file for index lookup symbol table header record MUST BE BEFORE symbol entry records SYMBOL
247. inside the DFDs bounding border in pixels Enter the conversion code for incoming data see Appendix F for details Read only Is read from the End Item Enter an integer for the number of pixels used for the shadow thickness a zero means no shadow This tells the Runtime Environment which direction the pie slices fill Click the mouse SELECT button in this box to toggle between Clockwise and Counter clockwise Enter the number of degrees on the pie s circumference to indicate the starting point for the first variable Enter an integer for the number of pixels in the border a zero 0 means no border For a border thickness greater than zero 0 select a border style by clicking the button next to one of the following options Shadow In Shadow Out Shadow Etched In Shadow Etched Out Pie Chart Variables Display type specifications Enter the following specifications for each variable pie slice as illustrated on the panel below To display this panel click the mouse SELECT button on the Variables UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 315 Definition button on the Pie Chart Display panel pal fb pie var FE Bar Display Pie Chart Variables Display Digital fg Color EH Digital bg Color Add Variable Delete Variable Fill Style Variables List Pie Chart Title po Fill Pattern pi 5 ia N EE Var3 25 E alee el e m wil u m Variable N
248. ion Delete Session Select a session then click this button to remove that session No of Formats Lists the number of formats attached to the current Attached session Key A set of fields listing each runtime key for the current session you can enter or change the keys displayed in these fields Runtime keys are sorted in ASCII order Value A set of fields listing the values assigned to their related runtime keys you can enter or change the values displayed in these fields OK Apply all changes to the Session Manager Delete Key Remove the selected runtime key and its value Undo Last Reset the latest runtime key if deleted Dismiss Delete the window NOTE The generic session cannot be deleted FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manua ROVSING A S 15 August 19991 Chapter 9 The FWDU Text Editor 9 365 The Editor Basics The FWDU Text Editor is a simple text editor which reads and saves text files to the mission database At save time some syntax checking is done and sometimes parts of the text is converted z fwdu_editor File Help valvelusym safs definition file for symbol from status value for table lookup valve symbols header record SYMBOL value lookup valve symbol data records SSMB ROV2 SETUP VALCLS red white SSMB ROV2 SETUP VAL TRAN3 orange white SSMB ROV2 SETUP VAL TRAN2 yellow white SSMB ROV2 SETUP VAL TRANL green white X SSMB ROY2 SETUP VAL OPN
249. ion from the File menu on the Format Editor Control panel Select the Dismiss option from the File menu on the Format Editor Control panel The Drawing Area goes blank In the command line on the Format Editor Control panel type quit lt RETURN gt or select the Exit option from the File menu of the Format Editor Control panel The following dialog box appears Are you sure you want to quit the Format Editor Click the mouse SELECT button on Yes FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 cuaptens Learning the Format Editor 3 51 Once you understand the Format Editor s basic functions described in the first two chapters you are ready to practice with working examples This chapter teaches you how to build a sample format in a series of self paced lessons The lessons should be completed in the order presented without skipping since each involves components created in previous lessons Each lesson is designed to be completed in one session therefore do not start a lesson unless you intend to complete it However you may quit after any particular lesson and later resume with the next lesson Each of the Format Editor display panels discussed in this chapter is like a standard window that can be moved resized or overlapped on most platforms The following lessons assume you are using a window management system that allows you to manipulate windows dynamically by simple mouse movements s
250. ion of the bar color at the thresholds Click the mouse SELECT button on the buttons to the right of this field to toggle between the following options Bottom When a threshold is exceeded the bar color changes to that of the threshold Middle When the value reaches or exceeds the high low high medium high high or the value drops below the low high low medium or the low low the bar color changes to that of the threshold The bar is the DFD Foreground Color when the value is between the low high and the high low thresholds NOTE If you select Middle and use less than six threshold values keep in mind that the middle is set by splitting the difference between the values entered in Threshold fields 3 and 4 Thus you must enter six total values to get the proper results You can duplicate values to fill out all six thresholds For example you can enter 100 00 100 00 60 00 40 00 20 00 and 0 00 for the values Label Location By default labels and tick marks are located to the right of vertical bar graphs or above horizontal bar graphs You may invert this location or keep it the same by clicking the mouse SELECT button in the box to the right to toggle between Top Right and Bottom Left Orientation Set the orientation of the bar by clicking the mouse SELECT button in the box to the right to toggle between Vertical and Horizontal Depth Thickness For three dimensional effects enter the value in pixels for the width of the s
251. ion the graphic on your format by moving the outline to the position that you want using the mouse and clicking the mouse SELECT button Specifying an application type Notice that all your entries so far in the Format Description panel have been accomplished by pressing the RETURN key or clicking on the OK button at the bottom of the panel e The RETURN key causes everything you typed into the Format Description panel to be accepted and applied to the format you are creating If you have made multiple entries they are all accepted and applied simultaneously FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 4 98 Format amp Layer Description e The OK button causes everything you typed into the Format Description panel to be accepted and applied to the format you are creating then removes the Format Description panel You can provide this type of functionality to any new formats you are creating by filling in the Application Type entry on the Format Description panel for each new format being created The two application types are explained below e APP_OP_ENT This method enables the RETURN key so that the Sammi user can enter data by typing it in and then pressing the RETURN key This is the standard method of entering data in most computer programs including the Format Editor You can also create push buttons menu options or function keys that per form the same function For example the Enter but
252. ions for each display type associated with a dynamic field Chapter 8 Data Access Types explains how data access works and how to create data access descriptions that can link dynamic fields to live data e Appendices provide additional reference information you may need to understand technical aspects of the Format Editor We recommend that you start by reading Chapter 2 carefully then follow the lessons in Chapter 3 for a quick introduction to using the Format Editor Once you understand how the Format Editor works you can use the remaining chapters and appendices for reference on specific functions Basics of the Format Editor The Format Editor helps make difficult computing tasks simple by letting you design and build graphical user environments that present data on the computer screen in intuitive easy to read formats For example you could use the Format Editor to design e Computerized maps that show current activity at various locations around the country or around the world e Animated drawings schematics or blueprints with imbedded live data that change dynamically over time FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 Welcome to the Format Editor 1 15 e Control panels with knobs and buttons that really work to control processes instruments or equipment at any remote location Improved computer interfaces that merge data from a wide variety of sources on a c
253. is Option List at runtime by clicking the OPTION button directly on the dynamic field Option Lists and Select Lists are similar but Select Lists offer more functions please refer to the Select List section in this chapter for details You can create two types of option lists e Standard Option List This type inserts the user s selection directly into another dynamic field in the same format most option lists you probably have used in the Format Editor work this way Thus a Standard Option List should only be used with dynamic fields that accept user entries Real Text Integer Custom Time etc e Command Option List This type sends the user s selection directly to an application specified as the logical server for data access to this dynamic field thus the user s selection is not inserted into the dynamic field The illustration below shows a Standard Option List that has been linked to an Integer dynamic field this list will pop up when the user clicks the mouse OPTION button on the Integer dynamic field Sammi Window Dynamic Field Integer 12 11 start Aa 12 fast K 13 slow IJ 14 stop bw Cancel Dynamic Field Option Notice the Option List includes not only the appropriate entries for the Integer dynamic field 11 12 etc but an explanation of each entry start fast etc The Integer dynamic field was deliberately created
254. is closed white red blink valve is half open magenta white valve is fully open blue white blink FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 APPENDIX L 408 Sample Symbol Text Tables FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 APPENDIX M Special amp International Characters M 409 You can create the following special and international characters using the Text tool or within any DFD that accepts text entry except for Text Browser by using a Compose key sequence To create a symbol 1 Press the Compose key 2 Press the appropriate key or keystroke to produce the first character and hold it down then complete the action by pressing the key or keystroke to produce the second character The resulting special or international character is created The superior 1 2 and 3 require a third keystroke to complete the character To create the character from a program use the hex value from the list below Second sobs character Resultin Hex value Description First character See i 8 third if character needed OxA0 Non sa si breaking space P OxAl Inverted pP pP 5 i 5 OxA2 Cent sign 4 C or Ken f 7 OxA3 Pounds o T or sterlin T was i OxA4 currency 0 or X or symbol O or X or g Kok OVNE A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 Agust 1999 APPENDIX M
255. ither enter a color for the scale tick marks and tick mark values by clicking the mouse OPTION button in this box to display a list of choices Click the mouse SELECT button in this box to toggle between Yes and No Indicate whether the scale should be highlighted between the left side or right of the scale to the current needle position as shown in the previous illustration Because this feature tends to slow displays down use it sparingly See also the Threshold Coloring Mode NOTE If your gauge is too elliptical the Wide Scale feature is disabled Show Ticks Tick increment Hi Lo Marks Needle Color Indicate whether tick marks should be displayed by clicking the mouse SELECT button in this box to toggle between Yes and No Enter a number representing the amount between tick marks Indicate whether high low value markers should be used as discussed earlier by clicking the mouse SELECT button in this box to toggle between Yes and No Enter a color for the needle or select a color by clicking the mouse OPTION button in this box to display a list of choices This choice only applies if Wide Scale is set to no FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV User Manual 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 287 Entry Option Show Value Decimal Digits Min Value Max Value Meter Gauge Entries Continued Description Indicate whether the incoming data value should be displayed below the dial by clicking the m
256. iting the text may get garbled Sometimes you can correct this with the Redisplay function See Redrawing all objects ater in this chapter 2 On some workstations the cursor character advance is incorrect for proportional fonts 3 If you have difficulty locating the DELETE or BACKSPACE key or its equivalent on your keyboard ask your system administrator How to manipulate objects Once you have drawn any of the objects described on the preceding pages you have complete control over them You can move copy flip rotate recolor adjust and resize objects NOTE in any manner desired The appropriate procedures are described below Manipulated objects that are stacked on one another are selected from the top to the bottom When you select a single object to manipulate using the move copy delete rotate flip resize or recolor functions click on an area on the object that does not coincide with another object If you inadvertently select and manipulate the wrong object immediately use the Undo option from the popup menu displayed by pressing the mouse OPTION button in the Drawing Area or by choosing Undo from the Edit menu FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 5 130 Drawing Methods Controlling the drawing sequence of objects Typically when objects are drawn on top of each other the first one drawn is the first one displayed followed by the second one drawn
257. ixed scale linear meter include Label This is located under the meter which for example you can use to indicate its function or differentiate it from other meters Digital representation The current value is also displayed digitally in a box to the right of the vertically oriented meter or below the horizontally oriented meter High and Low Limit Indicators These small triangular shaped outlines located on the numeric scale reposition dynamically to record the highest and lowest values reached by the data since the last initialization of the meter Threshold Indicators high high medium high low high high low medium low low low These bands of color on the numeric scale represent thresholds that can be preset set dynamically by the application Bar Color Changes When a threshold has been passed during normal operations the bar changes to the color defined for that threshold You define the behavior of the coloring of the bar in one of two ways Bottom reference Each time a threshold is reached or exceeded the color of the bar changes to that of the threshold Middle reference The bar is displayed in the threshold color when the value meets or exceeds the thresholds specified for high low high medium and high high or when the value falls below the thresholds specified by low high low medium and low low When the value is between the high low and low high or when no thresholds are defined the bar di
258. k the mouse SELECT button on the Polyline Tool button on the Format Editor Control panel 2 Inthe Drawing Area click with the mouse SELECT button on the first point and on any intermediate points in a bending line FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 5 126 Drawing Methods 3 Click the mouse OPTION button on the last point 64 4 t 3 Drawing a Polyline When you click the last point line segments are drawn using the default colors and line styles To change colors or line styles see Recoloring objects later in this chapter Polygons Drawing Tools ya Vinee AAE Polygon Tool With the Polygon Tool you can draw multi sided polygons by clicking on the desired location of the polygon corners in the Drawing Area Set the line or fill style defaults for the polygons using the methods discussed earlier in this chapter You can also use the Line Orientation Control functions for more accurate drawing of horizontal vertical or diagonal lines within the polygon FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Drawing Methods CHAPTER 5 127 To draw polygons 1 Click the mouse SELECT button on the Polygon Tool button 2 Inthe Drawing Area position the cursor on the desired location of the first corner and click with the mouse SELECT button 3 Move the cursor to any intermediate corners of the polygon and cli
259. king or pressing RETURN correctly 7 Select Save from the File menu on the Format Editor Control panel to save the format When you finish the above steps proceed to the next lesson FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 3 62 Learning the Format Editor Part 3 Changing the font style To change the font of the text you entered in the last part of this lesson 1 Select Font from the Style menu on the Format Editor Control panel to display the Current Font Selection panel Current Font Selection fixed ABCDabcd fixed Kni 6x12 8x13 8x13 bold 9x15 v 4 OK Cancel 2 When the list of fonts appears scroll through the list to find the entry for courier bold 18pt 3 Click the mouse SELECT button on this entry 4 Click the mouse SELECT button on the OK button to close the Current Font Selection panel 5 Click the mouse SELECT button on the Recolor Tool button on the top row far right under Drawing Tools of the Format Editor Control panel This sets the recoloring function by which you can change the color or appearance of drawn objects or the font of text LA Recolor W Snap Grid The Recolor Tool FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 Learning the Format Editor 3 63 NOTE Move the curs
260. king G 391 Several of the display types discussed in Chapter 7 of this guide allow you to selectively shift and mask the incoming data value This means instead of using the raw value exactly as it is received from the data server you can mask out selected bits and use what is left Typically an incoming value consists of 32 bits as shown below The bits along this data value range from most significant on one end to least significant on the other end You can set Sammi to automatically edit out certain bits by using the shifting and masking functions described below Most Least 000000000000000100010010100000000 32 bit data value binary format Shifting The Shift Right function causes the entire data value to be shifted by a certain number of bits For example if you entered a Shift Right value of 3 all 32 bits in the data value would be shifted toward the least significant end by three bits This would cause three bits to be dropped from one end and three zeros 0 to be added to the other end as shown below SHIFT RIGHT 3 00000000000000000010001001011101 010 Three zeros Three bits are added are dropped FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 G 392 Masking After any desired shifting has been accomplished a mask value may also be specified to selectively mask off some of the remaining bits The mask value is entered as a hexadecimal number but is applied to
261. l ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 6 152 Dynamic Field Description General procedures Dynamic fields are created and manipulated using the Edit menu and the Dynamic Fields menu at the top of the Format Editor Control panel piUndo File Edit View Composites Dynamic Fields Style Help Move Resize b T oe E Snap Pale VY amp LA Grid Recolor Copy TDFD Attrib Static Attrib Ipa PMET Layer Delete Edit Menu of Format Editor Control panel Actions available from these two menus are Option Undo Resize Move Copy Static Attrib DFD Attrib Edit Menu Selections Action Reverse the last edit operation This option is the same as the Undo option on the option list Change the size of an object This option has the same function as the Resize button on the Format Editor Control panel Move an existing object to another location within the format Make an exact copy of an existing object After the copy is made you may relocate it to another area on the format Edit the attributes of an existing static object Edit the attributes of an existing dynamic field FWDU ROVSING A S User Manual 15 August 1999 UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2
262. l to toggle between Grid On and Grid Off and Snap On and Snap Off as indicated by the indicator lights Selecting colors using the Recolor Color Selection Display panel Any new objects you draw in the Drawing Area appear in the default colors shown in the Color Selection Display panel You can always change an object s color later see the Recoloring objects section later in this chapter To save time you may prefer to set default colors before drawing begins Snap rid FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 Drawing Methods CHAPTER 5 109 To display the Color Selection Display panel 1 Choose the Select option from the pull right menu that appears when you select Colors from the Style menu on the Format Editor Control panel to display the Color Selection Display panel Color Selection Display Foreground Background as window M white black lightsteelblue black black _ black white white white red red red green green green blue blue blue cyan cyan i cyan magenta magenta magenta lt gt g Ret ed OK Cancel Color Selection Display Panel 2 Under each title box Foreground Background Window click on the name of the color you want to use for that area The patch of color beside each of the three titles changes to the color you select Thes
263. l components You can include the following optional components for a Select List display type as desired e Title The Select List display type may or may not have a title e Scrollbars If the list of choices is longer than the window in which they appear the Select list has a vertical scrollbar which allows the user to search for a specific item If the number of characters in the choices is greater than the width of the win dow in which they appear the Select list has a horizontal scrollbar that allows the user to read across an item A Select List display type can have either neither or both kinds of scrollbars The presence or absence of scrollbars is determined by the Select List display type you do not have to include a Scrollbar display type e Cancel button The Select List display type may have a Cancel button Its function depends on whether the Select List permits a single choice or multiple choices See the discussion on Single and Multiple Selections below for information e OK button The Select List display type may have an OK button This button allows you to confirm your choice s before the selected action is executed FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 7 330 Display Types e Standard Select List You can enter select list specifications into a command file cmd by using an ASCII editor to create a Standard Select Type from the Select List Display panel For mor
264. larm which results from the nature of the data itself FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 424 Glossary flag An option attached to a command that modifies the command s behavior in some way Typically preceded by a hyphen format A discrete element of a user interface displayed on the screen created using the Format Editor The Sammi Command Window is a format for example See also composite and window FWDU Flight Window Definition Utility The modified Sammi Format Editor host A system on which software is physically running A remote host is a system running software which the user reaches over a network icon A window reduced to a small symbol of itself An action or program going on inside the window when it is iconified typically continues but the output is not visible until the window is de iconified See window I MDB Interactive MDB Browser See MDB integer A number with no decimal For example 2 and 1000 are integers 2 0 and 100 4436 are not See also real numbers interface An application through which another application is made accessible to the user or to a third application A Sammi application for example provides an interface between the user and the application which he or she is monitoring or with which he or she is interacting ISS International Space Station layering A way of creating a complex format Layering is similar to a sli
265. lay types such as Object Icon When the user clicks on the other dynamic field with the mouse OPTION button the Menu display type pops up When you attach the Menu display type to another dynamic field that field becomes the trigger DFD since it causes the pop up action When used in this way the popup Menu ALWAYS grabs input even if you specify Grab Focus NO when you create the Menu When used as a pop up option the Menu display type can be either a e Command Option that sends a command and or button events to an application The menu is attached to the trigger DFD by entering the Menu name in the Option DFD Name field and toggling the Cmnd field to Yes on the DFD Display panel for the trigger DFD or Character I O Option that places a value in the trigger DFD The menu is attached to the trigger DFD by entering the Menu name in the Option DFD Name field and toggle the Cmnd field to No on the DFD Display panel For a Menu used as Character I O Option any entries in the Logical Server Format Name and DFD Name fields are ignored it is not necessary to enter them This type of menu places a character string in the trigger DFD In either case the Menu does not pop up unless the user has write privileges for the FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 7 278 Display Types format and trigger DFD See the System Administrator s Guide for mo
266. lds on the specific display type panel When a user enters a value outside these limits an error message displays Runtime annotations You can use runtime annotations when you want a dynamic field to blink change color and or show a two character appended text code such as LO or HI To use this feature each incoming data value must be accompanied by a quality word a 32 bit unsigned integer with bits specifically set to indicate data quality This quality word must be provided by an application NOTE On the Bar Barchart Piechart and Linear Meter display types runtime annotation is limited to changing the color of the bar or pie unless they have their Show Value field set to Yes To use runtime annotations create a lookup table as shown below Then set this feature by toggling the RT Annotations box on the DFD Display panel to Yes When you select this option the application notifies the Runtime Environment that your dynamic field expects a quality word with the data value from the lookup table Create or edit the lookup table using any ASCII text editor Save the table under the filename rtda dat in the SSAMMI data directory FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Display Types CHAPTER 7 189 All dynamic fields using runtime annotations share the same table to make the runtime effects consistent throughout the user interface Blink Bit mask no blink Appended character color
267. lect either Major or Minor tick marks for the X axis Click the mouse SELECT button in this group to select either Major or Minor tick marks for the Y axis Click the mouse SELECT button in the box to the right of this field to toggle between Step Display and Redisplay All The Redisplay All option always displays 100 percent of the trend If you select the Step Display mode enter a value that represents how much new data is used to refresh the Step Fraction part of the display please refer to Step Display Step Fraction earlier in this section for details Enter the color of the x axis itself or click the mouse OPTION button in this box to display an option list Enter the title to be displayed along the x axis Enter the color of the x axis title or click the mouse OPTION button in this box to display an option list Enter the starting Time Offset and Span both are measured in seconds The Time Offset value is the number of seconds back in time from the current time to use as the starting time of the x axis The Span value is the number of seconds displayed along the x axis Sammi uses these values as the upper and lower limits of the x axis and adds appropriate tick marks and labelling between these points along the x axis NOTE If you set the Time Offset value to zero and the Span value to a positive value the Runtime Environment initializes the starting value to the first point received and then automatically scrolls th
268. lick on the Delete Variable button without highlighting a variable in the list the variable at the end of the list is deleted When you have added and saved all the variables by pressing the Return key or clicking the mouse SELECT button on Enter close this panel by clicking on the Dismiss button fb curve var FE Bar Display Line Chart Variables Display Add Variable Delete Variable Variables List Curve Position BEE anol Y Axis op Title Color green Minimum L 0 000 Maximum Marker style Suppress curve no Data Ac End Ite Rene TEET End Item Enter Reset Dismiss FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 7 272 Display Types Line Chart Display Entries Entry Option Description Y Axis Title Enter the title to be used for the y axis scale NOTE Each curve defined must havea y axis title in order for Sammi to recognize the curve definition Color Either enter the color to be used for this y axis title scale and curve or click the mouse OPTION button in this box to display an option list Only one color is entered for each title scale curve so the user will be able to see at a glance which curve goes with which scale NOTE If two or more curves share the same scale the color of the highest number curve is used for the scale Data Access End Item Here you specify a measurement End Item per curve example is of type demo_egse_float_measurement E
269. line thickness The line ending is rounded e Projecting The line is filled past the end point a distance of half the line thickness The line ending is square The line cap control also applies to each of the line segments in dashed lines For this reason using a round or projecting style on very thick dashed lines may obliterate the gaps between dashes FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 5 114 Drawing Methods Line joint Beveled Rounded Mitered Mitered Rounded Beveled joint joint joint Line Joint Styles The line joint control sets how the joint will look where two lines meet in any new objects drawn This is only important for angled joints using thick lines where the shape of the joint is visibly apparent including those on rectangles and polygons The available joint styles are mitered pointed rounded and beveled flat Dash pattern The dash pattern control sets the pattern for dashed lines in any new objects drawn This function applies only if you selected dashed or double dashed transparent or opaque as the line fill style NOTE Dashed lines cause much slower performance in the X Window System than solid lines particularly for circles arcs ellipses and splines Line thickness The line thickness control is used to set the width of the line for any new objects drawn NOTE For the fastest display operation use the smallest thickness top line under
270. lly oriented barchart Normally this field is filled as you add a variable but you can change the position of the variable by entering another number This causes the variable list to re sort in bar position order Foreground Color Either enter a color for the foreground for the variable name or click the mouse OPTION button in the box beside this label to display an option list Then click the mouse SELECT button on the desired color name Background Color Either enter a color for the background for the variable name or click the mouse OPTION button in the box beside this label to display an option list Then click the mouse SELECT button on the desired color name Data Access End Item per variable 1 Select a variable Press the End Item Button The following window appears end item_popup 2 Complete the Pathname a measurement End Item or use Pathname Support 3 Press OK button The Data Access End Item field above is filled FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 7 220 Display Types Limits Button If a measurement End Item is attached you can choose from the measurement End Items nominal limit set range 1 5 by pressing Limits button The following window appears Limits_popup esha heed FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 221 Curve Sets Curve Sets are NOT SUPPORTED by the FWD
271. low F fb afs FE Text Table Dislay Entry Option Text Table Name Table Access Status Text Display Direct Index Table Access LoLo CEECEE E Indirect List J Shift Right ME si aa v Short Float Data Type Long Double Enter Reset Table End Item SSMB SETUP SYMBOL_TABLE Status Text Display Entries Description End Item of type FWDU_SYMBOL_TABLE_TEXT Select the method of access to be used with the index Indirect List Indirect index lookup only lookup method See the Lookup table and indexing section earlier in this chapter for details Click the mouse SELECT button on this box to toggle between the following options Direct Index Indirect Index Enter the list of row numbers to be looked up for final converted values of 0 through 7 see the Lookup table and indexing section earlier in this chapter for details Status Text Display Entries continued FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 7 354 Display Types Entry Option Mask Hex Direct index lookup only Shift Right Direct index lookup only Data Type Description Enter the hexadecimal value that is to be bitwise ANDed with the right shifted data value If Mask is 0 the incoming data value will not be shifted or masked See Appendix G Shifting and Masking for more information Enter the number of bits by which the incoming data value is to be right shi
272. lue is truncated that is the extra digits are discarded when the value is converted to an unsigned long integer For example an incoming value of 2 987 is truncated to 2 not rounded to 3 NOTE If the floating point number is too large or too small to fit into an unsigned long integer the value resulting from the conversion is incorrect Direct index The final converted value can be used directly as the row number to be looked up in the table Indexes are zero based if the converted value is 0 the first row is used if itis 1 the second row is used and so on If the converted value is larger than the number of rows no symbol is shown and an error symbol is displayed In the index lookup example shown earlier the largest value that can be used for lookup is 4 index to row 5 Indirect index Alternately the final converted value can be used to look up a cell in an eight celled array Each cell contains a specific row number from the table For example the illustration below shows cells numbered 0 through 7 containing a random sequence of row numbers FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Display Types CHAPTER 7 195 If the final converted data value is 3 the value from cell 3 the fourth cell in the array is found This cell in turn contains the number 2 which points to row number 2 the third row in the lookup table cell number Oo 1 2 3 4 5 7 cell contents 4 42 3 2 1 2 O
273. mage field FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 7 258 Display Types Graphic Data Field Display Entries continued Entry Option Scrollbars Scrollbars Color Inner Border Width Inner Margin Width Border Style Border Width Description Select whether scrollbars are to be added to the DFD by clicking the mouse SELECT button in this box to toggle between As Needed If the graphic is larger than the area of the DED scrollbars are automatically added to the DFD No No scrollbars are used no matter what the size of the graphic Clip the image to fit the DFD If you selected As Needed for Scrollbars either enter a color for the scrollbars or click the mouse OPTION button in the box beside this label to display an option list Then click on the desired color name with the mouse SELECT button Enter the integer number in pixels for the inner border width This is the width of the shadow around the actual graphic Enter zero 0 for no inner border Enter the integer number in pixels for the inner margin width This is a margin inside the border that is left blank For a border width greater than zero select a border style by clicking the mouse SELECT button on one of the following buttons in the box to the right of this label Shadow In Shadow Out Shadow Etched In Shadow Etched Out Enter the integer number of pixels for a border width Enter zero 0 for no border
274. mands can not be selected but a beep is heard instead then make sure you have selected the correct type of command Sammi Commands How enter the command that Sammi should send to the Sammi Runtime Environment Only Sammi commands should be entered in this mode References to other displays should be entered with their full MDB pathname The complete list of commands can be found in the Command Reference After entering the command press the OK button At this point the existence of found MDB pathnames is checked Use preview to test the command Onboard Predefined Commands A predefined command is at runtime handled by the MCD The list of valid commands is listed in the Onboard Predefined Commands List Press on the wanted command in the list The command is automatically copied to the Command You can also enter the command manually When the correct command has been selected then press OK Only commands found in the list are allowed The list is based on the commands entered in the Equipment Constraints See the section about the FWDU Text Editor for information about how to enter and modify the list Onboard Software Commands Onboard Software Commands are also handled by the MCD at runtime In this mode you can get a template for a swop_command ucl_automated_procedure using the Onboard Command Help After selecting Onboard Software Command press on the SW Onboard Help button Pressing this button the following window appear
275. may not be enough room for all the elements or there may be barely enough room to draw the graph When creating a plot or trend therefore make sure the dynamic field is optimally sized to produce the best display Zoom A zoom by bounding box feature allows the user to interactively define an area on a plot or trend during runtime which is then zoomed The user must click the mouse button MB 2 to start the bounding box then drag open the box to enclose the desired area and click MB 2 again when the box is the desired size The selected area is zoomed and displayed in the graph zoom popup window or locally inside the plot trend Refer to the graph command in the Command Reference to set the desired graph zoom type Double buffering This option draws a plot or trend to a temporary buffer then copies that buffer to the screen once the drawing is done this greatly reduces screen flicker The tradeoff is that this uses more memory Step Display Step Fraction If you set the Display Mode for a plot or trend to Step Display the default Step Fraction is 2 This means that either 20 of the Span for Trends or 20 of the display between FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 7 262 Display Types the X min and X max for Plots is refreshed at a time while the remaining 80 is retained Temp vs Pressure
276. me will be added to the cross reference list Besides the above a definition of the pre defined commands will also be included in the equipment constraints COMMAND _ LIST BEGIN Start definition lt a command gt One line for each command Any number of commands can be added here END End the definition Example of a Equipment Constraint End Item Example of Equipment Constraints Taken from the FWDU qualification data X_SIZE 640 Y_SIZE 480 FWDU_PREDEFINED_ITEMS OPS LIBRARY Pre defined commands list COMMAND _LIST BEGIN ANNOTATE HELP EXIT FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 9 368 FWDU Text Editor MARK MUR LIMITS END FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Standard Colors A 369 APPENDIX B The standard X Window System colors are listed below You can usually select these colors from a pop up option list when using the Format Editor If a pop up option list is not available you must type the color names as shown below 0 black 21 salmon 1 white 22 sienna 2 red 23 brown 3 green 24 sandy brown 4 blue 25 gold 5 cyan 26 goldenrod 6 magenta 27 khaki 7 yellow 28 tan 8 aquamarine 29 thistle 9 mediumaq 30 wheat uamarine 10 turquoise 31 darkslateg ray 11 darktur 32 dimgray quoise 12 medium 33 lightgray turquoise 13 cadetblue 34 gray 14 cornflow 35 cadetblue1 erbl
277. me key values You can create two types of sessions transient and permanent A transient session only exists when one or more formats is attached to it A permanent session exists even if no formats are attached to it A session operates using these rules e When a format is added any runtime keys in its DFD readkeys writekeys or logical server field are evaluated first by searching the format s session then by searching the generic session e Any format added to the screen as the result of the paging command must be a part of the parent format s session This means that if the initial format has other formats associated with it that are accessed through paging the other format s are a part of the same runtime key values as the initial format e Any format added as a replacement for another format using the replace window command also inherits the initial format s session e Any format added to the screen as the result of a push button may inherit its parent format s session This relationship is created by the format designer using the Format Editor e The user can modify runtime keys for a session while in the Runtime Environment that is change the value to which the runtime key refers All formats which are attached to that session are automatically assigned to receive the new runtime key values e The user can add duplicates of the same format to different sessions in the Runtime Environment the runtime keys
278. mi windows and to specific dynamic fields within the windows Access to a Sammi window is governed by the Security Level entered on the Format Description panel Access to individual dynamic fields is governed by the Security Level entered on the DFD Display panel Security levels are defined by the system administrator using procedures described in the System Administrator s Guide If you do not know the correct security level codes ask your system administrator A value of 0 establishes unrestricted access that is any user can add delete copy or change the format FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Format amp Layer Description CHAPTER 4 93 Linking formats through paging One of the more useful features of the Format Editor is that it lets you construct multiple linked formats that can be paged in the Runtime Environment like the pages in a book The Sammi user can page forward backward up down first or last to other windows via the six commands page forward page up page back page down page first and page last NOTE If you leave these fields blank no paging can occur Also every format used for paging must have at least one dynamic field on it in order to page properly The Paging entries in the Format Description panel are used to link the current format to other formats for paging purposes To enable paging you must type in the name of the other formats that will be access
279. mic field is displayed in the Format Editor Control panel message line when your cursor is moved to the white double outline bounding box FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 6 164 Dynamic Field Description The selected field turns white and the appropriate description panels appear You can change any of these panels by clicking on the entry to be changed and entering the new information Tochange entries on the DFD Display panel see Entering dynamic field entries later in this chapter Tochange entries on a dynamic field display type panel see the appropriate specifications in Chapter 7 To change entries on the Data Access Description panel see the appropriate specifications in Chapter 8 3 Click the mouse SELECT button on the Save DFD button to save your entries and quit changing the dynamic field You may continue to change dynamic fields by returning to step 2 above WARNING If you do not click the mouse SELECT button on the Save DFD button before you change to another editing function any changes that you have made are lost When you are finished changing all dynamic fields desired select another editing function Deleting dynamic fields You can delete any dynamic field that has already been created and saved To do so you must be currently editing the format using the New or Open option from the File menu of the Format Editor Control panel see Chapter 2 G
280. mic fields are the most important part of any format that you design using the Format Editor For each dynamic field you must make a number of important decisions including e How should the dynamic field work Should it provide on line help pop up option lists or logging If dynamic data are involved how should they be accessed and updated Should the user be allowed to change the data Should such changes be confirmed and or logged in an event file e How should the dynamic field look What display type should be used meter graph etc What should be its size and position in the format What color should it be What font should be used for text The illustration below shows how such decisions are applied to a typical dynamic field You enter the parameters on the Dynamic Field Description DFD Display panel which also includes general information about the dynamic field the display type and data access type Formati Position On Line Help Option Li Size Color Font Runtime Annotation Confirm data entry kd Le Display Type Integer Operator Entry Data Access Universal Confirmation Logging Understanding Dynamic Field Description This chapter explains how to enter general information about the dynamic field Chapters 7 and 8 provide more detail on display types and data access types FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manua
281. mouse SELECT button in the box to the right of this field to toggle between Yes and No Marks Colour Either enter a colour for the high and low marks or select a colour by clicking the mouse OPTION button in the field to the right of the Marks Color Fill Indicate whether the bar should be filled with the Default Fill Clr or whether the position is to be shown as a moving line only Click the mouse SELECT button on the buttons to the right of this field to toggle between Yes and No Fill Direction The default bar movement is from bottom to top vertical bars or left to right horizontal bars You can invert this direction if desired Click the mouse SELECT button on the buttons to the right of this field to toggle between Up Right and Down Left Default Fill Clr When the Color Fill Mode is default either enter a color for the fill color of the bar or select a color by clicking the mouse OPTION button in the box to the right of this label Color Fill Mode Select how the bar fills its color Click the mouse SELECT button on the buttons to the right of this field to select one of the following three options Default The default fill color fills the bar Dynamic The whole bar color changes to the threshold FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Display Types CHAPTER 7 207 color Multiple Only the part of the bar beyond a threshold changes to the threshold color Threshold Ref Act
282. ms as Data Sources on page 66 2 Click the mouse SELECT button on the Save DFD button at the bottom of the DFD Display panel 3 Click the mouse SELECT button on the Cancel DFD button to clear the extra panels NOTE Before you perform the following step you may want to reposition your DFD You do this by clicking on the Move Tool button on the Format Editor Control panel then moving the cursor into the Drawing Area and clicking on the DFDs you want to move 4 Select Save from the File menu in the Format Editor Control panel to save the format 5 Select Dismiss from the File menu in the Format Editor Control panel to clear the format from the Drawing Area 6 Select Exit from the File menu in the Format Editor Control panel to quit the FWDU Lesson 2 Using Sammi to test the format Part 1 Testing the format To test the format 1 Invoke the FWDU_SYNOPTIC_DISPLAY End Item from the I MDB which has FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 3 72 Learning the Format Editor attached measurement End Items to the various DFD s 2 Select Preview from the View menu A new window will now appear showing the display as it will look when running together with the MCD he data values are of cause not real data but random values generated by the FWDU_SERVER Part 2 Changing the format and retesting This procedure explains how to change an existing format and simultaneously te
283. mt stmtlist print expr list The syntax and semantics of eqn control flow facilities are basically the same as in C The while and if statements are just as in C except there are no break or continue statements FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 APPENDIX I 398 Equation Language Input and output and print There is no input primitive per se Input is accomplished by referencing the numeric value of other dynamic fields of the same window Consider these dynamic fields as instantiated global constants These values may not be changed Output is generated with the print statement The arguments to print are a comma separated list of expressions and strings in double quotes as in C print value is x The at operator retrieves a value from a named dynamic field The syntax is lt dfd name gt where dfd name Name of a dynamic field df d name may be any valid DFD name that is contains only A Z a z 0 9 _ underscore For example print number_dfdl number_dfd2 This command retrieves and adds the values stored in number_dfdl1 and number_dfd2 then displays the sum in the equation dynamic field User defined functions You can define your own functions in the equation A function definition is specified and the function is used later in the expression The function definition specification is func lt function name gt statement lis
284. n the Drawing Area as described in Chapters 3 and 5 To add new dynamic fields DFDs see the section Chapter 2 General guidelines for using the Format Editor Viewing dynamic fields DFDs If you would like a static view of your dynamic fields to see how they appear select the View DFDs option from the View menu If you would like an animated preview of your display to see how they appear select the Preview option from the View menu NOTE Random values derived from the End Items definition in the MDB are sent to the dynamic fields so they appear animated FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 2 50 Getting Started Copying formats To create a new format very similar to an existing format copy the existing format then modify the copy and save it as a new format Follow these steps 1 2 3 Open the synoptic display format you want to copy Make any changes desired before saving Use the Save As functionallity from the File menu on the Format Editor Control Panel to save the synoptic display in another End Item You may select an new created FWDU_SYNOPTIC_DISPLAY type End Item or an already ex isting End Item of same type Deleting formats Use the I_MDB to delete FWDU_SYNOPTIC_DISPLAY s Quitting the Format Editor To exit the Format Editor completely 1 4 If you have been creating or editing a format and want to save your changes select the Save opt
285. n 2 2 or later can change between any standard fixed font and any scalable font however a static text object created in earlier versions of Sammi cannot be changed to a scalable font Any attempt will result in an error message e The standard fixed fonts provided with Sammi are shown on the next page Fonts are used for any text display in Sammi and may be set individually for a wide range of text displays FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 UserManual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 APPENDIX B 372 X Bitmapped and Scalable Fonts fixed 6 X 12 fixed 8 X 13 fixed 8 X 13 fixed bold 9 X 15 fixed ABXAE T H greek medium 12 pt SKAMNOI greek medium 14 pt OXTYcQ greek medium 18pt courier medium 8 pt courier medium 10 pt courier medium 12 pt courier medium 14 pt courier medium 1 8pt courier medium 24pt courier bold 8 pt courier bold 10 pt courier bold 12 pt courier bold 14 pt courier bold 18 pt courier bold 24 pt helvetica bold 8 pt helvetica bold 10 pt helvetica bold 12 pt helvetica bold 14pt helvetica bold 18 pt helvetica bold 24pt FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 X Bitmapped and Scalable Fonts APPENDIX B 373 APY SEodyNLOKALVOTOPOTLDMEWCO123456789 abcdefghijkImnopgqrstuvwxyz0123456789 abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz0 123456789 abcdefghijklImnopqrstuvwxyz0123456789 abcdefghijklmnopaqrstuvwxyz0123456789 abedef ghijllmnopgrstuuunayg0 123456 789
286. n Lists General Action Buttons Scroll and Slider Bars Some display types are not linked to live data but instead perform purely mechanical functions For example the Equation display type works like a calculator to show the results of calculations on other dynamic fields General Action Button and Menu display types are used to activate a variety of functions Scroll Bar display types are used with other dynamic fields to move through data that is larger than one screen and Option List display types allow end users to make entries to a data field without typing The following chart Selecting Data Display Options lists the appropriate display types to be used for various desired effects Each item in the list includes the name of a sample format that you can use as a model or a template for viewing or producing the desired effect For example to create a meter you should use the Meter display type an example of which appears in the sample format named sample_meter View any sample format in the Format Editor or copy it for use as a template see General Guidelines for Using the Format Editor later in this chapter You can find specific information on each display type in Chapter 7 of this guide FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Getting Started 2 25 Selecting Data Display Options If Your Objective Is To Display current system time and date Display editable text data static text
287. n incoming data values A group of static objects and or DFDs can be turned into a Dynamic Object that can be rotated or scaled NOTE The Graphic Data static object cannot be made into a Dynamic Object DFD These special effects are produced by Sammi as it compares incoming data to a lookup table FWDU_DYNAMIC_OBJECT_TABLE_TEXT to find out how to change the appearance of the object s You must Create a FWDU_DYNAMIC_OBJECT_TABLE_TEXT End Item in the MDB via IMDB Invoke the End Item e Edit the End Item in the fwdu_editor e Save the End Item in the MDB The table format depends on which lookup method you select table lookup or value substitution these two methods are discussed later in this section To create a Dynamic Object DFD using a desired object or group of objects go to the Dynamic Field option on the Format Editor Control Panel and either e Select Display Palette Select the Dynamic Object icon from the palette and place it on top of the desired object or group see Chapter 6 or e Select Add DFD Then click to set the upper left and lower right corners of the DFD to enclose the object or group Enter Dynamic Object in the Display Type field of the DFD Display panel Number of objects The Dynamic Object display type determines the number of background objects that it controls as a result of any of five separate actions 1 The Dynamic Object dynamic field is edited and saved using the Save DFD b
288. n the Drawing Area by clicking the mouse SELECT button again If you are in Production Editing Mode the DFD Display the dynamic type description and Data Access Definition panels appear If you set the Editing Mode on the System Preferences panel to Design the next step does not apply Make appropriate entries in these panels Click the mouse SELECT button on the Save DFD button of the DFD Display panel to save your entries If you wish you can add more dynamic fields by returning to step 2 WARNING If you do not click the mouse SELECT button on the Save DFD button before you change to another editing function any changes that you made are lost To quit adding dynamic fields select another editing function FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 6 162 Dynamic Field Description Read DFD Lib option To use the Read DFD Lib option follow these steps 1 Select the Read DFD Lib option from the Dynamic Fields menu on the Format Editor Control panel The following window appears Read_Lib_popup Sel X Patinane Support caresi l al 2 Enter a FWDU_LIBRARY_ BINARY Press OK 3 Move the cursor to the Drawing Area Note that a bounding box is attached to the cursor and follows it as you move about the Drawing Area This bounding box is the actual size of the pre defined dynamic field 4 Position and set the dynamic field on the Drawing Area by clicking the mous
289. n the box beside this label to toggle between Visible Layer initially appears when format is displayed in the Runtime Environment Invisible Layer does not appear when format is displayed in the Runtime Environment FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 4 102 Format amp Layer Description Layer Display Entries continued Entry Option Meaning Declutter Click the mouse SELECT button in the box beside this label to toggle between Disabled and Enabled When this field is Disabled Min Declutter and Max Declutter below have no meaning Min Declutter Specify the minimum zoom factor for this layer Initially this value is set to 0 zero which means no declutter Max Declutter Specify the maximum zoom factor for this layer Initially this value is set to 0 zero which means no declutter NOTE If Declutter is set to Enabled the layer will be viewable in the zoom range between the values in the Min Declutter and the Max Declutter fields FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 5 Drawing Methods 5 103 Introduction Chapter 3 described how you use some of the Format Editor s Drawing Tools this chapter offers an in depth discussion of those tools Use the Drawing Tools to create visual elements on a format such as lines boxes text etc Typically these visible elements are not part of the background image or not p
290. n zero all button types except transparent can have a three dimensional appearance This field controls the width in pixels of the shaded area around the button s borders that creates the three dimensional look These borders use the area within the button that is a bigger shadow width does not make the button bigger rather the shadow makes less area available for the button label Indicator Color Either enter a color for the indicator color or select a color by clicking the mouse OPTION button in the field to the right of the Indicator Color Sensitive Controls the initial mode of the button Click the mouse SELECT button in the box to the right of this field to toggle between Yes which means the button is sensitive accepts events at startup or No which means the button will be insensitive ignores events and a text label is grayed or ghosted out If the label is an X bitmap the insensitive X bitmap is displayed see On Off Sensitive Insensitive Bitmaps entry Any API application or server can override this setting FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 7 248 Display Types General Action Button GAB Display Entries continued Entry Option Initial State On Data Type Gadget Description Controls the initial state of the button Click the mouse SELECT button in the box to the right of this field to toggle between Yes which means the initial state will
291. nd Item Minimum and Maximum Value Read Only Is read from the End Item Engineering Range s High and Low Values FWDU UM 114 002 ROV User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 273 Line Chart Display Entries continued Entry Option Description Marker Style Select the type of marker to be used for data points in each curve Click the mouse SELECT button in this box to select one of the following options No marker Box Triangle Cross Hair Lines To Axes Crosspoint Marker X shaped Marker NOTE If none of the above options is desired the user may enter any printable character surrounded by single quotes in this field Suppress Curve Click the mouse SELECT button in this box to toggle between Yes to produce a scatterplot which leaves the data points unconnected and No to produce a curve Sammi will draw a visible curve through each set of data points FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 7 274 Display Types Integer Sample Format sample_litrl The Integer display type shows and accepts whole numbers from the user or an application Display type specifications Enter the following specifications as illustrated on the panel below FE Integer Display Entry Option Conversion Factor Maximum Minimum Value Value Enter Integer Display Conversion Factor JT Maximum Value Minimum Value Decimal Hex Octal Lead
292. nd draw the desired size DFD 3 Inthe DFD Display panel click the mouse OPTION button in the box beside Display Type to display a list of DFD types Select the DFD type by clicking the mouse SELECT button on the name in the list FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 2 46 Getting Started To create a duplicate DFD from one that exists 1 Retrieve the DFD using the DFD Attrib option on the Edit menu This loads the DFD Display panel with the DFD information 2 Now repeat steps 1 and 2 on creating dynamic fields The DFD Display panel appears with the information from the original DFD Saving and testing a format Once you have created a format with its dynamic fields you must save and test it 1 To save the completed format in the MDB select the Save or Save As option from the File menu on the Format Editor Control panel The Save As option al lows you to save the to format an existing display end item and automatically clears the format from the Drawing Area The Save As pops up the following window SaveAs_popup S X Peten swport __carcet_ 2 Type the Pathname that you want to save to You can also use Pathname Support PNS instead PNS is an interactive browser where all valid End Items can be seen and selected Note that only End Items of valid type are shown in the PNS NOTE You can use Preview in the View menu to test and animate your format dynam ically Vie
293. nd holding down the mouse SELECT button while moving the slider along the track with the mouse The Increment Rate does not apply to this situation Enter a lower limit for the scale Enter an upper limit for the scale Enter a conversion code for incoming data see Appendix F for details Read only Data is automatically taken from measurement End Item when associating measurement End Item Data is Engineering Range Low Value Read only Data is automatically taken from measurement End Item when associating measurement End Item Data is Engineering Range High Value Read only Data is automatically taken from measurement End Item when associating measurement End Item Select whether or not this is a pop up Slider by clicking the mouse SELECT button in this box to toggle between Yes and No Enter a value for a time in seconds for the Slider to disappear if a selection is not made A timeout of zero requires the user to click the mouse SELECT button on the Cancel button to make the Slider disappear For a pop up Slider select whether or not it grabs the input focus When the Slider grabs the focus the user must make a selection and or click on the Cancel button before continuing Click the mouse SELECT button in this box to toggle between Yes and No FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 339 Symbol Table Sample Format sample_sfs The Symbol Table display type
294. ndexing section earlier in this chapter If the symbol table name specifies the value lookup method is to be used this entry is ignored Otherwise click the mouse SELECT button in this box to toggle between the following options Direct Index Indirect Index Enter the list of row numbers to be looked up for final converted values of 0 through 7 as described in the Lookup tables and indexing section earlier in this chapter Enter the hexadecimal value that is to be bitwise ANDed with the right shifted data value If Mask is 0 the incoming data value will not be shifted or masked See Appendix G Shifting and Masking for more information Enter the number of bits by which the incoming data value is to be right shifted if any See Appendix G Shifting and Masking for more information Select the type of incoming data value being received by the dynamic field by clicking the mouse SELECT button on one of the following options Short Long Float Double FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 7 306 Display Types Entry Option Select Type Select List Border Color Border Thickness Border Style Object Icon Display Entries continued Description Select the type of Object Icon by clicking the mouse SELECT button on one of the following options Single The command associated with the On selection is sent whenever the user clicks the mouse SELECT button on the Object Icon
295. ne direction click the mouse SELECT button on one of the sides top bottom left right of the bounding box To resize objects in two directions click the mouse SELECT button on a corner of the bounding box To shrink a bounding box move the cursor toward the center of the bounding box To expand the bounding box move the cursor away from the center of the bounding box 3 Click the mouse SELECT button again when the bounding box is the desired size Either the object is redrawn or for a group of objects all objects in the group except text are redrawn to match the new proportions of the bounding box You can continue resizing other objects by repeating steps 2 and 3 If you are dissatisfied with the results immediately reverse the operation with the Undo function FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 5 134 Drawing Methods Resizing dynamic fields You can use the procedure described in the last section to resize DFDs also with the following exceptions If you are in Production Editing mode when you resize a DFD the DFD Display panel and the AFD panel of the display type appear Once you resize a DFD you must click the mouse SELECT button on the Save DFD button of the DFD Display panel in order to preserve your changes e To continue resizing you must click the mouse SELECT button on the Resize button again NOTE If you are running the Format Editor in de
296. never a line appears as part of an object it uses the default characteristics shown in the Current Line Style panel You can always change line styles later see Recoloring objects later in this chapter To save time however you may prefer to set line styles before drawing begins To display the Current Line Style panel select the Line Style option from the Style menu on the Format Editor Control panel The Current Line Style panel appears Current Line Style Line Fill Style Dash Patterns aS EERE soc EEEEEE a a aw mio Line Cap Style noe li C Line Thickness es Line Joint Style F ES A l ia Leading Arrow ce Trailing Arrow OK Cancel Current Line Style panel FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 5 112 Drawing Methods The different styles are Line fill solid dashed double dashed Line cap butt rounded projecting Line joint mitered rounded beveled Dash pattern Line thickness Arrowheads A detailed explanation of these controls follows Setting the current line style defaults To set the defaults for each of the controls on the Current Line Style panel 1 Click on one of the radio buttons under each of these controls with the mouse SELECT button The indicator appears next to your selection 2 Click on the OK button with the mouse SELECT button to close the pop up panel To close the pop up
297. ng help file scroll bar How should display type look els color labs Cp Dynamic Field Description DFD scale Z tick marks r C Po How should dynamic field look Back d Bad size color font How should gata be processed ackgrouni position display type max min values Image conversion factor How should dynamic field work shifting masking 33 5 data access type display enter lookup tables etc 44 2 refresh rate type logging 123 5 runtime annotations A i ext entry confirmation li Dynamic Fields Data Access Definition Background Objects n What is the source of data Drawing Tools Logical server RPC node etc 7 5 X A 7 Database record element Draw objects Manipulate objects Number of values circle ellipse group ungroup rectangle move copy flip polygon arc fill color thickness text etc font etc FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 1 16 Welcome to the Format Editor Windows The Runtime Environment displays data using the standard movable windows environment of the X Window System Each window may include static components that do not change and dynamic components that are changed by incoming data or by Sammi users Formats For each window that will appear in the Runtime Environment you create a correspondi
298. ng format using the Format Editor The format serves as the basic blueprint for the final Sammi window including its size color position and all of its components The Format Editor allows you to construct formats using a set of Drawing Tools Drawing Area and a series of ready made display components as described next The format itself does not become an active window until Sammi is started and an add window command for your format is issued Static components Each format that you create using the Format Editor may include static visual elements that are not designed to move or change when they appear in Sammi There are two types of static components e Background images are graphical images derived from various sources such as business logos maps photographs and blueprints that have been scanned into the computer using a digital scanner Typically a background image serves as a back drop for the information being presented in a window For example you could scan in a picture of a control panel then overlay various dynamic components such as dials and push buttons described next e Static objects include text labels and geometric shapes such as circles ellipses arcs curves lines polygons and rectangles You can use these shapes to construct simple diagrams or pictures of process components that will help make the interface more visually useful to the operator With the Format Editor you draw most static objects with a few
299. nk I 2 dd da dd dd d d 40 7 0 red d noblnk 2 22 dd ddd dd d d 60 8 0 red d noblnk 3 2 dd ddd dd d d 80 9 0 red d noblnk 0 2 dd ddd dd d d 100 test file for dynamic objects value substitution gravity value substitution 0 0 d d noblnk dd dd d dd dd 240 vO d 1 0 d d noblnk dd dd d dd dd 480 5 d 2 0 d d noblnk dd dd d dd dd 960 0 d 4 0 d d noblnk dd dd d dd dd 960 9 d 6 0 d d noblnk dd dd d dd dd 960 1 d 7 0 d d noblnk dd dd d dd dd vO 0 d FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 aenoixe Sample Symbol Text Tables L 403 This appendix contains samples of both a symbol lookup table and a text lookup table The End Items within current CCU CDU of type FWDU_SYMBOL_TABLE_TEXT are extracted from the MDB at startup so the SAMMI runtime system are aware of the existents of safs files The included safs files are located in FWDU_HOME lib FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 APPENDIX L 404 Sample Symbol Text Tables Symbol table value lookup file example valuesym safs example definition file for value lookup symbol table header record MUST BE BEFORE symbol entry records SYMBOL value lookup 10 Ss 20 symbol entry records entry format is value sym_name fg_color bg_color lt optional gt blink value is the minimum value in a range of values Data values are compared with symbol values The symbol is selected us
300. nk or noblink 5 Fill style Enter a value of 0 to 3 These correspond to the fill patterns found on the Current Fill Style panel with the left pattern having a value of 0 and the right pattern having a value of 3 6 Stipple pattern Enter a number from 0 to 21 These correspond to the fill patterns on the Current Fill Style panel The first row reading from left to right corresponds to the values 0 10 the second row to values 11 21 7 Line fill style Enter a number from 0 to 2 These correspond to the line fill styles on the Current Line Style panel with the top fill style having a value of 0 the second a value of 1 the third a value of 2 8 Dash style If you selected 1 or 2 for Line fill style enter a value of 0 to 5 These correspond to the dash patterns found on the Current Line Style panel with the top dash style having a value of 0 and the bottom a value of 5 If you selected 0 for line fill enter d 9 Line thickness Enter a value If you enter a value from 0 to 7 these correspond to the line thicknesses found on the Current Line Style panel with the top line thickness having a value of 0 and the bottom having a value of 7 Any value of eight or greater directly specifies a pixel thickness 10 x scale To enlarge shrink or distort the dynamic object enter the 11 yscale scaling percentages for both the horizontal x and vertical y scale For example entering 125 100 would enlarge the dynamic object by 2
301. ns and data access panels appear when you create or edit the display type For more details please refer to Chapter 3 When entering specifications on a panel you can type information directly into some fields while other fields are view only Certain field can have a toggle option clicking in the field toggles between set responses Fields could also have an associated list of choices such as fields that require a colour or font name click the mouse OPTION button to display a list and then click on the desired choice to enter it into the field Some DFDs will allow you to select a data type these types are FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Display Types CHAPTER 7 199 Short 2 byte integer Long 4 byte integer Float single precision 4 byte floating point Double double precision 8 byte floating point For DFDs that support text entry you can type special and international characters using a Compose key along with appropriate keystrokes See Appendix M for details Once you have completed all fields on this panel click the mouse SELECT button on the Enter button The Reset button restores all entries on the panel to the values they contained the last time they were saved The remainder of this chapter is an alphabetical reference to the display types e Alarm Optional e Bar e Barchart e Curve Set e Custom Time e Dynamic Object e Equation e Formatted Numeric e Gen
302. nsult your API developer for details Click the mouse SELECT button in this box to toggle between the following options Standard Special FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 351 Static Browser Data Display panel If you choose the Static for the type on the Text Browser Data Input Output Field Display panel the following panel appears when you click the Enter button This panel is completely free form whatever you enter in the box will display whenever the Text Browser displays Static Browser Data Display Enter Reset FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 7 352 Display Types Text Table Sample Format sample_afs The Text Table display type shows messages that change depending on the value of incoming data For example the message in this display type might say Tank is FULL which later changes to Tank is EMPTY Displayed messages are limited by the width of the dynamic field in characters so you must be careful to make the dynamic field as wide as the longest message to be displayed see Chapter 6 Dynamic Field Description The lookup table shall be stored in the MDB Lookup table End Item type is FWDU_SYMBOL_TABLE_TEXT and can be edited with a safs editor The Runtime Environment knows which message to display by comparing the incoming data value to the lookup table The exam
303. nt Fill Style panel 1 Click the mouse SELECT button on one of the push buttons under each of these controls Each button that you select changes to its selected pushed in state Click the mouse SELECT button on the OK button to close the pop up panel To close the pop up panel without making changes click the mouse SELECT button on the Cancel button Available fill styles None Solid Stippled The fill style is used to control the fill for any new objects drawn in the Drawing Area Sf b bkgd Available options are No fill The outline of the object is drawn using the default line styles and foreground color The area inside the outline of the object is transparent allowing any other object drawn within the outline to show through Solid fill The outline of the object is not drawn The area inside the object is filled with the default foreground color Objects or parts of objects behind this object do not display Transparent stipple The outline of the object is not drawn The area inside the object is stippled dotted with foreground color based on the default stipple pattern The gaps between stippling are transparent allowing objects behind this one to show through Opaque stipple The outline of the object is not drawn The area inside the object is stippled with foreground color based on the default stipple pattern The gaps between stippling are filled with background color Any object or part of an object beh
304. ntime to an API created application without replacing the runtime key For example entering station 1 sun2 does not replace the runtime key sun2 with its designated runtime key variable since the backslash is placed before the symbol the entire read key is sent to the application Runtime keys can be grouped together into a unit called a session Creating a session allows you to manage runtime key sets as one you can then assign or reassign a session to a format or formats For more information refer to the Combining runtime keys into sessions below FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 8 362 Data Access Types Substituting variables for runtime keys Several Sammi commands allow users to manipulate runtime keys add window format session session and set runtime key For more information on these please refer to the Command Reference A user can also display a format for setting runtime keys called the Session Manager Refer to the next section for details on this format Combining runtime keys into sessions You can group runtime keys together into a unit called a session Sammi is supplied with a generic session or a group of runtime keys not grouped into any other sessions Users can add as many sessions as desired A user can access the Session Manager in the Runtime Environment to create and remove sessions and add delete and modify a session s associated runti
305. numbers Smallest format means use either decimal or exponential to produce the shortest display not supported on the PS 2 running AIX or Lynx Data Type Read only The value is taken automatically from the End Item FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 323 Region Sample Format sample_region The Region display type allows you to define an area which then can serve as a pre defined zoom area You can also set the area s pattern color fill and visibility The fill style and pattern can change based on incoming data values from an application also runtime annotations can change the foreground and background colors You can change the visibility through layering and decluttering API information The runtime data buffer requires a long value Display type specifications Enter the following specifications as illustrated on the panel below Region Display Fill Style Fill Type E Static Display Name Yes Fill Pattern E TE a Ez Enter Reset fo 10200094 02020 H FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 7 324 Display Types Entry Option Fill Style Fill Type Display Name Fill Pattern Region Display Entries Description Select a fill style by clicking the mouse SELECT button on one
306. o 0 If the final converted data value is larger than 7 or if the contents of any index cell is larger than all the row numbers in the table an error symbol is displayed The table can have any number of rows but a maximum of eight symbols can be selected since there are only eight cells Thus the indirect index is a useful way to select subsets of symbols from a larger table of lookup symbols Entering a Command Several of the dynamic fields allow you to type in a command for example the General Action Button GAB When the edit command button is pressed an Edit_Cmd_popup dialog appears The name and position of the edit command button depends on the dynamic field See the description of the individual dynamic field for a description of the location of the button s The Edit_Cmd_popup looks as follows end SSMBNROV2 COMMANDINGSSWOP4 p1 gt 5 p2 gt E p3 gt 2 p4 gt 1 p5 gt 2 pB gt 5 It is possible to enter 3 types of commands Sammi commands e Onboard Predefined Commands e Onboard Software Commands First select the type of command you want by clicking on the type Note that the red radio button gets selected FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 7 196 Display Types NOTE If the Edit_Cmd_popup seems to behave strange e g pathnames are reported not to be found syntax errors are reported that are not there pre defined com
307. oduce and display its own value To do this it multiplies the value in field1 by 5 then adds the value in field2 The actual equation used to produce the example result is print field1 5 field2 Of course since field1 and field2 are both dynamic fields receiving data from outside sources their values can change continuously Each time their values change the Equation display type is recalculated and redisplayed The Equation display type gives Sammi windows many of the capabilities of a spreadsheet When you use the Equation display type the dynamic fields in Sammi behave like the cells in a spreadsheet NOTE The names of dynamic fields referenced in an equation cannot contain characters other than alphabetical characters numbers and the _ under score character and must begin with an alphabetical character A common mistake is referencing a dynamic field whose name contains a dash The Equation display type translates this as a minus FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 7 234 Display Types In the example diagram notice several important features about how the equation was stated e An equation is a series of statements separated by semicolons e The word print displays the result of the equation in the Equation dynamic field Other such keywords are explained below and shown in an accompanying table later in this section e You reference other
308. oes appear the Option List overlays other window components until the Sammi user selects an option from the list then it disappears again Depending on your specifications the Option List can be either a scrollable list box or a radio box with buttons that can only be selected one at a time See the illustration below page_up A page_up page down Q page_down page_forward O page forward page back V O page_back Cancel OK Cancel Scrollable List Box Radio Box Option List Option List FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 7 310 Display Types Display type specifications Enter the following specifications as illustrated on the panel below DFD Options List Box Enter Reset Value Entry Option Type String Value DFD Options Entries Description Select the type of option list to be displayed by clicking the mouse SELECT button in this box to toggle between List Box and Radio Box Enter each of the selections exactly as you want them to appear on the option list If only part of the selection must serve as the actual entry make sure it is placed at the beginning of the line and that the target dynamic field for this option list is only wide enough to accept the valid characters as expl
309. of the following buttons No Fill Solid Fill Transparent Stipple Opaque Stipple Click the mouse SELECT button in this box to toggle between static and dynamic If you select Static the Fill Pattern you set is used Dynamic will use runtime data annotations to determine the fill type Click the mouse SELECT button in this box to toggle between whether to display the Region display type name entered on the DFD Display panel by selecting Yes or No Click on the desired fill pattern FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 325 Scrollbar Sample Format ndbm01 With the Scrollbar display type you can provide any dynamic field with a scrollbar that allows users to change the view The most common types of display types that could use a scrollbar are data fields which show sets of data and alarm message displays which show lists of messages A dynamic field which uses a scrollbar is called a target dynamic field You could draw dynamic fields large enough to show all data at a glance but this takes up space The scrollbar therefore is a space saving device that allows you to show more data in a limited area than would normally fit The illustration below shows both a vertical and a horizontal scrollbar but you do not necessarily need both in every situation Real Display Types Dr ae xN E Horizontal 12 5 143 3 92 8 Venea e 125 6 234 2 821 5 ir shifte col
310. of zero requires the user to click the mouse SELECT button on the Cancel button or to make a choice from the list for the list to disappear Select List Display Entries continued FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 7 332 Display Types Entry Option Standard List Table Name Label Name Label Font Label Color Top Bottom Margin Left Right Margin Scroll Color Border Style Description Read only Use the End Item button to specify an End Item of type FWDU_LIST_TEXT If you want a title placed at the top of this list enter the text string here The text string can be up to 32 characters in length including new line characters You can lay out the label in as many lines as desired New lines are specified by entering n anywhere in the text label n means a new line and does not print A double backslash n n is printed as n For example you want a two line label enter the text string as n first line of text n second line of text n The text string is automatically centered If you enter a title either enter a font for the title or click the mouse OPTION button in this box to display a list of choices If you enter a title either enter a color or click the mouse OPTION button in this box to display a list of choices Enter a value in pixels for the top and bottom margins This number represents the number of pixels down from the top and up from
311. olmage v GIFF Image Grah Focus No v X Bitmap XWD Image Paging CS End item an sy End item item up Down itll i eae ms Ena item E End ltem Entering data in the Format Description pane NOTE Most of the parameters on the Format Description panel have default values entered Although most of these are satisfactory for this tutorial you can change some of their values For a more detailed discussion of this panel see Chapter 6 FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 3 58 Learning the Format Editor To describe the format 1 Enter the following next to Description in the Format Description panel Temperature Control This description is displayed in the title bar of the format when you run it in the Sammi Runtime Environment 2 Click the mouse OPTION button on the box to the right of Color under Window Background to view a list of background colors 3 Click in the scroll bar track with the mouse SELECT button until you see the lightsteelblue label then click on it with the mouse SELECT button 4 Adjust the width and height of the format by entering initial and maximum values for each The default size of a format is 610 pixels wide and 400 pixels high These values are changed when you adjust the size of the Drawing Area in step 2 of the previous section Creating a format Under the word Width in the Window Control section of the Format Description panel enter in the box b
312. ology presented in Chapter 1 Planning the interface Before using the FWDU Format Editor to design new Sammi formats you must first decide how you want the ultimate product to look and what it should accomplish Your planning should consider a number of different factors e What display control functions should be included Who will be the users of this new system What types of data are essential to them Where will the data come from What types of control and updating functions should these users have e How should data be represented Should data values be displayed literally perhaps as numbers or text or represented graphically as a gauge needle position e What presentation aids should be used Could the user benefit from buttons men us on line help or other available features e How should the interface be structured Should data be presented in a single window or in a series of pageable windows which show different levels or categories of data e What are your prototyping review requirements Will the design need to be ap proved by managers committees or end users Will you need working demonstration models e How will formats be tracked Each format is stored as a file on disk Do you want to adopt a standard file naming scheme for keeping track of formats Each of these considerations is discussed in more detail on the following pages The following discussion should help you pinpoint what you are trying to ac
313. omputer network into a simple readable form Display formats built with the Format Editor become active when you use them in the Runtime Environment subsequently referred to as Sammi Since Sammi operates under the X Window System each display format is presented inside a movable window that can be manipulated with a pointing device such as a mouse or trackball Thus the Format Editor is the display builder used to create user interfaces and Sammi is the display manager used to provide runtime operation of the interfaces created using the Format Editor The most valuable feature of the Format Editor is its ability to simplify the interface design process The Format Editor lets you scan in maps drawings or other background images add drawn objects to the background image and then add dials graphs or other built in display elements In the past up to 90 percent of the effort required to develop mouse and window interfaces was taken up by the design and building of the user interface The Format Editor makes interface design simple so that designers can concentrate on what they do best creating better applications The basic concepts of how you use the Format Editor are illustrated below Sammi Sammi Runtime Environment Format Editor Format Description How should Sammi window look size colors ite position background imag amp Window How should Sammi window work Display Type Definition pagi
314. on Value Show Threshold Threshold Color Threshold Reference Max and min are read only The six Data values are automatic taken from measurement End Item when associating measurement End Item The six values are Danger Limits High Value Nominal Limit High Value Nominal Limit High Value Nominal Limit High Value Nominal Limit Low Value Danger Limits Low Value Max and Min are read only always Yes Either enter a threshold color for each threshold that you want displayed or select a color by clicking the mouse OPTION button in this box to display a list of choices The range of numbers included with each threshold is indicated by a band of color on the numeric scale Select a threshold reference by clicking the mouse SELECT button to select one of the following options Bottom The bands in this mode start at the thresholds and cover the range of numbers to the next highest threshold Middle The bands in this mode for the high low high medium and high high thresholds start at the thresholds and cover the range of numbers to the next highest threshold The bands for the low high low medium and low low thresholds start at the thresholds and cover the range of numbers to the next lowest threshold The band of color that covers the range of numbers between the low high and the high low thresholds is the DFD Foreground Color FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV User Manual 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 297
315. on Number of Variables Shape Type Access Type Title Name Pie Chart Display Entries Description This is a display only field The value is calculated when you define the variables on the Pie Chart Variables Display panel To access this panel click the mouse SELECT button on the Variables Definition button Select the shape of the pie by clicking the mouse SELECT button in this box to toggle between Circle and Ellipse Select the access type for the pie by clicking the mouse SELECT button in this box to toggle between Static The pie chart is defined on the Pie Chart Variables Display panel and does not update during runtime Dynamic The pie chart updates during runtime depending on the incoming data Enter the text for the chart title optional FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 7 314 Display Types Entry Option Title Color Title Font Inner Margin Conv Factor Data Type Shadow Thickness Fill Direction Starting Angle Border Thickness Border Style Pie Chart Display Entries continued Description If you entered a string in the Title Name field either enter acolor for the chart title or click the mouse OPTION button in this box to display a list of choices If you entered a string in the Title Name field either enter a font or click the mouse OPTION button in this box to display a list of choices Enter the width of the margin
316. on and shape of the object File Edit View Composites Dynamic Fields Style Help a E Snap es ea hoot p le 7 Tal Sallad amp Grid NK oe SIIDIST edi zal Bin ered a KINESIX lt messages Gppec_here gt lt command line gt enter commands here Format Editor Control panel FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 5 120 Drawing Methods Most objects can be drawn with two or three clicks of the mouse SELECT button Lines polygons and splines however can be drawn using any number of points For this reason the last point on a polyline polygon or spline must be indicated by a click of the mouse OPTION button As you draw or manipulate objects numeric coordinates appear in the Format Editor Control panel above the command line with the following labels You can use these coordinates to precisely measure and control cursor movement The current mouse cursor position in x y pixels dx dy The horizontal vertical movement in cur sor position since the last click in pixels dist The distance in pixels traveled since the last click theta The angle of movement from the point of the last click If the Color Palette panel is displayed on screen you can quickly select foreground colors for each object just before you draw them Remember that the default attributes discussed earlier in this chapter always apply when you dra
317. on to perform a specific function For example you might create buttons that add windows to the screen silence alarms set an attribute etc Each button in the Sammi Command window was created using this display type You can create two variations of buttons visible and transparent Both are illustrated below Show N Italy Detail 4 Italy Show Italy Detail Visible Transparent Push Buttons Push Buttons e Visible buttons Sammi can provide several types of visible buttons containing the text or symbol of your choice Standard push buttons with text or symbols may be created Toggle buttons with or without indicators may also be created with text or symbols All buttons may be specified with variable sized three dimensional shading which gives them the appearance of being raised or pressed in depending on their current state e Transparent buttons You can also define a transparent area of the screen that acts like a button when clicked on This is useful if you want to create your own fancy buttons or to have some part of a background image such as a country on a map that can be clicked on to activate other windows or functions In the illustration above the dashed lines show the actual borders of the transparent buttons The two transparent buttons at the upper right contain background objects drawn with the Format Editor Drawing Tools The map of southern Europe is part of a background image imported in
318. op up from a dynamic field The Format Editor allows you to create one general help file per format and an additional help file for each dynamic field Adjusting the window background color When you create a new format fb bkgd appears with a colored background usually black You can change this background to another color by entering a color in the Window Background Color field of the Format Description panel To choose a color either click the mouse OPTION button in the box to display a list of color choices or enter a color name exactly as it is shown in Appendix A Standard Colors The selected background color does not appear in fb bkgd until you press the RETURN key or click on the OK button at the bottom of the Format Description panel Using background images You can import scanned images into the fb bkgd_ format to serve as the window background Typical background images can include any of the following Maps Blueprints Schematics Control panel layouts Organization or product logos Photographs Any of these images can be scanned in using commercial scanning hardware and software Depending on the type of scanning equipment used these may be imported as color or monochrome images The scanning process converts lines or shaded areas in the scanned image into individual FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 Format amp Layer Description CHAPTER 4 95 tiny dots that are reprod
319. op up menu is not available during unfinished operations or operations that use the mouse OPTION button for other purposes Drawing polylines polygons and open and closed splines use the mouse OPTION button to complete the figure the front and back commands use the mouse OPTION to reverse operations the Mirror Tools and the Arrow Tool use the mouse OPTION button for their own purposes Redrawing cleaning up the Drawing Area Occasionally as you draw and manipulate objects some objects are not completely redrawn or erased completely You can redraw all objects in the Drawing Area using the Redisplay option To redraw all objects 1 Click the mouse OPTION button anywhere inside the Drawing Area A popup menu displays Undo Redisplay Zoom In Zoom Out Zoom Box Full View Reset Initial Reset Maximum Pan To Remove All 2 Move the cursor over the Redisplay option on the menu and click the mouse SELECT button All objects are redrawn FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 5 146 Drawing Methods Scaling or shifting the entire format You can scale and or move all static objects and dynamic fields in a format simultaneously NOTE Re scaling does not work on text of a standard fixed font To scale enter the following command in the Command line of the Format Editor Control scale format lt x scale gt lt y scale gt lt x position gt lt y position gt where
320. option displays a panel of buttons from which you select a specific existing DFD type e Read DFD Lib This option displays a selection list of existing DFD libraries from which you can make a selection The latter two methods provide more default parameters on the DFD Display panel than appear when you choose the Add DFD option Add DFD option To use the Add DFD option follow these steps 1 Select the Add DFD option from the Dynamic Fields menu on the Format Editor Control panel 2 Inthe Drawing Area click the mouse SELECT button to position the upper left corner of the DFD 3 Move the cursor down and to the right to size the DFD and click the mouse SELECT button again Or you can specify the width and height of the DFD by entering in the values in the DFD Display panel see the next step 4 To display the DFD Display panel double click the mouse SELECT button on the upper left corner of the DFD FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 6 158 Dynamic Field Description 5 Now make the appropriate entries in the DFD Display panel and press the RETURN key zil fb dfd DFD Display DFD Name Display Type Data Access Type Refresh Rate HE Refresh Type Poll Width Chr Pixels EE E Height Chr Pixels HE Location X Y E E End Item Help File Security Level oO Option DFD a Cmnd No Enterable yes Confirm Entry no Log Entries No
321. opy 36 File Dismiss 36 File Exit 36 File Import Image 36 File Open 36 File Save 36 File Save As 36 Fill pattern setting 60 Fixed Scale Linear Meters 17 Fixed Scale Linear meter 290 Fixed scale Linear Meter 25 Fixed scale meter 23 Flip 104 Float 199 fmt_load 357 fmt_unload 357 font styles selecting 110 Foreground color 109 Format Description panel 41 47 86 90 98 109 format description entering 86 Format Editor Control Panel 35 Format Editor Control panel 30 51 55 Format naming tracking 29 Format String 223 Format creating 56 Format importing 106 Format saving and testing 46 Format scaling 146 format shifting 146 Formats 16 Formats copying 50 Formats deleting 50 Formats viewing or changing 46 Formatted Numeric 25 185 238 Formatted Numeric Output 17 23 Fornat Editor starting 30 Full View 40 FWDU_SYMBOL_TABLE_ TEXT 191 G M 240 Gauge 17 23 25 183 283 General Action Button 18 185 240 General Action Button Grouping 250 General Action Button Groupings 26 General Action Buttons 24 26 201 M 43 generic session 364 GIF 243 Grab Focus 89 Graphic Data Field 17 256 graphical user environments 14 Graphs 260 Greenwich Mean Time 222 357 FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV iSSUE 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 Index 429 Grid 35 74 grid 104 Grid Off 108 Grid On 108 Grid aligning objects to 106 Group 104 group 153 Group Selection 156 Grou
322. or into the Drawing Area The cursor changes to a cross Click on the two text strings you just created inside the Drawing Area Each one should change to the new font If you have made errors click the mouse SELECT button on the Eraser Tool immediately to the left of the Recolor Tool then move the cursor to the Drawing Area and click the mouse SELECT button on any object or text you want to erase Select Save from the File menu on the Format Editor Control panel to save the format Part 4 Creating a Real Dynamic Field Definition DFD This procedure lets you add the first dynamic field to the test format format This discussion is broken into several subsets to cover the three different panels that you must complete Before starting make sure you have successfully completed all previous parts of this lesson You should have the test format format displayed l Select Add DFD from the Dynamic Fields menu in the Format Editor Control panel In the Drawing Area click the mouse SELECT button to the right of the text string Enter New Temperature Move the mouse toward the lower right As you do so notice the borders of the dynamic field now appear as an expanding box and the DFD Display panel appears While expanding the box also notice the values beside Width and Height on the DFD Display panel are changing When the value in the box to the right of Width shows 4 characters Chr and the value in the box to the
323. or the background or click the mouse OPTION button to display a list of choices Enter a number greater than zero 0 for the initial value of the variable This defaults to zero 1 Press the End Item button The following window UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 317 appears end item_popup 2 Type the complete the Pathname or use Pathname Support 3 Press the OK button The Data Access End item field is filled FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 7 318 Display Types Legend Display specifications Enter the following specifications for the legend as illustrated on the panel below To display this panel click the mouse SELECT button on the Legend Box Definition button of the Pie Chart Display panel When you have finished entering the legend definitions use the Dismiss button to close the panel fb legend Tie string Legend Display Title Color Title Font r E eae ves i i Yi Ea Ean Title Name Sow ore F ooo ae Variables Font GM vari 440 Show Value Yes MUNN va 35 Display Type Value MMMM Vor3 25 seid a Digitals Font Notes String Decimal Digits fu emg mataas m e fa 4 ef Inner Margin 10 E E E oot Border Thickness BEC 1 1414 1 1 1 1 7 Border Style Shadow In Shadow Etched In v Shadow Out Shadow Etched Out Notes String
324. ormat Editor to make sure you understand all of its components A quick tour of the Format Editor Before you start using the Format Editor please be sure you understand the features described on the following pages If you have already started the Format Editor you can practice working with some of these features Using the keyboard The workstation keyboard is used in Sammi to enter commands or data Since the correct keystrokes vary from one workstation to the next we have provided a chart below to help you determine the correct keystrokes for each possible operation For example to tab up on a Sun workstation press SHIFT R8 hold down the SHIFT key and press the R8 key To tab down ona DEC press SHIFT KP2 hold down the SHIFT key and press the number 2 on the numeric keypad Standard Sammi Keystrokes Sun Function Keyboard Display Fl command window Add a win F2 dow Delete a F3 window Confirm F4 Cancel F5 Page for F6 ward Page back F7 Page up F8 Page down F9 Add win dow sample_ F10 main Quit KP1 Sammi Confirm KP2 Cancel KP3 Erase to KP4 end of line FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 2 32 Getting Started Sun Function Keyboard Erase field KP5 Home KP7 Cursor up KP8 Tab up ShfKP8 Previous KP9 word Cursor left KP10 Tab left ShfKP10 Cursor R12 right Tab right ShfR12 Insert R13 mode on off Cursor R14 down Tab down ShfR14 Enter R15 Backs
325. ose File Open NA Edit an existing format File Save NA Save the format EI to the MDB File Save As NA Save the format as another EI in the MDB File Insert File NA Insert a format from the filesystem File Import Fmt NA Import an entire format into the Drawing Area File Import Image NA Import an image into the Drawing Area File Dismiss NA Exit current format File Attributes NA Display the Format Attributes panel File Exit quit Exit FWDU r z fb cmnd none CDU SYNOPTIC_MODE Read Write x File Edit View Composites Dynamic Fields Style Help Open mes EOC t Bl bl aae cor Ae So Thek Fm Insert File Import Fmt KINESIX FWDU V3 Import Image gt Sammi 3 0 12 Dismiss Attributes Exit fb bkgd none FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Getting Started 2 37 Format Editor Control Panel Menus Menu option Command equivalent Purpose Edit Undo n a Undo last command Edit Resize n a Change size of objects including DFDs Edit Move n a Reposition objects includ ing DFDs Edit Copy n a Copy objects including DFDs Edit Static Attrib n a Change the attributes of an existing static object Sub options are Color Line Style Fill Style Font All all of the above Edit DFD Attrib change dfd lt DFD name gt Edit an existing DFD Edit Layers n a Add the Layers Display panel Edit P
326. ouse SELECT button in this box to toggle between Yes and No If Show Value is Yes enter the number of digits to be shown after the decimal point The incoming data value is rounded to this number of digits Read only Data is automatically taken from measurement End Item when associating measurement End Item Data is Engineering Range Low Value Read only Data is automatically taken from measurement End Item when associating measurement End Item Data is Engineering Range High Value If a measurement End Item is attached you can choose from the measurement End Items nominal limit set range 1 5 by pressing Limits button The following window appears Limits_popup Ea d Conv Factor Data Type Label optional Label Color The conversion code for incoming data see Appendix F for details Read only Data is automatically taken from measurement End Item when associating measurement End Item If you want a label for this meter gauge enter a single line text string If you enter a label either enter a color or select a color by clicking the mouse OPTION button in this box to display a list of choices FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 7 288 Display Types Meter Gauge Entries Continued Entry Option Description Border Color For a border width greater than zero either enter a border color or select the border color by clicking the mouse OPTION b
327. ove objects or groups of objects with two clicks of the mouse SELECT button The first click selects the object or group to be moved The second click places that object at a new location and removes it from its previous location To move an object or group 1 Click with the mouse SELECT button on the Move Tool of the Format Editor Control panel Grouping boxes appear on all groups 2 Move the cursor to the Drawing Area and click with the mouse SELECT button on an object or group of objects to be moved 3 Move the cursor to the new location in the Drawing Area and click the mouse SELECT button The object or group is removed from the Drawing Area at the old location and redrawn at the new location If you move something by mistake immediately reverse the operation with the Undo function FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Drawing Methods CHAPTER 5 137 Deleting objects or groups Eraser Tool With the Eraser Tool you can delete an object or group of objects with the mouse To make a deletion 1 Click the mouse SELECT button on the Eraser Tool on the Format Editor Control panel Grouping boxes appear on all groups 2 Move the cursor in the Drawing Area and click the mouse SELECT button on an object or group of objects to be deleted The object or group disappears If you delete something by mistake immediately
328. oxes are not shown Even if you save the format with the objects grouped the grouping box will not be shown in the Sammi window at runtime You select a group for performing an action on such as flipping moving resizing copying etc by clicking the mouse SELECT button either on the grouping box or on any object that is part of the group Ungrouping objects KA E2 EA Resize Ungroup Tool Any set of grouped objects can be ungrouped so that you can work with them individually To ungroup objects 1 Click the mouse SELECT button on the Ungroup Tool button on the Format Editor Control panel 2 Move the cursor to the Drawing Area and click the mouse SELECT button on the outline of the grouping box When the grouping box disappears the objects are no longer grouped FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 Drawing Methods CHAPTER 5 133 Resizing objects Resize Tool With the Resize Tool you can resize any graphical object or group of objects except text using standard fixed fonts to any proportion To resize an object or group of objects 1 Click the mouse SELECT button on the Resize Tool button on the Format Editor Control panel 2 Move the cursor to the Drawing Area over the object that you want to resize and click the mouse SELECT button A bounding box for the object or group of objects appears Toresize in o
329. p Tool 131 147 Grouping Tool 81 groups copying 135 groups deleting 137 groups moving 136 H Help 38 Help File 87 169 l Icon Palette 44 Image Color 90 Image Name 90 Image Type 90 image scaling 95 Inactive Layer Color 156 Index Comparison 189 Index Lookup Method 352 Index Lookup Method 193 Indirect index 194 Initial Visibility 101 Integer 23 25 186 234 274 308 Integers 17 Interface planning 21 Intersection 131 156 Invisible 101 K Key Type 360 Keyboard using 31 keydefs dat 32 244 L Layer 153 layer description description 99 Layer Display 100 Layer Display panel 153 Layer List 100 Layering 27 layers 29 LCL 355 LCL Local 356 LEX 189 Line cap 105 Line Chart Variables Display panel 261 271 Line Constraints panel 38 Line dash pattern 105 Line fill style 105 Line joint 105 line orientation control 104 Line Orientation panel 74 Line thickness 105 Line Tool 80 125 Linear Meters 23 183 Lines 104 Lines single and multiple segment 125 line to spline 140 Local 18 171 355 Local Data Access Description panel 356 Log Entries 169 188 Long 199 lookup table 23 Lookup tables 191 M Main Menu 35 main menu 30 Mask 232 275 305 354 Mathematical operators 236 Menu 24 26 184 menus 28 Menus pull down 36 message line 30 Meter 17 23 25 53 183 283 Mirror Tools 138 Mouse 32 Mouse buttons 33 Mouse movement 32 mouse OPTION MENU button 34 mouse SELECT
330. pace Bksp Delete Del When multiple windows are shown on the same monitor or on a set of monitors simultaneously any keys that you press will apply only to the window with the focus that is to the window in which the cursor is located You can change the window focus by moving the mouse cursor into a window and pressing the mouse SELECT button The process that is controlling the active window handles any keyboard input NOTE All keys are reprogrammable The keys are programmed using the keydefs dat file in the SFWDU_HOME 1ib directory If the keystrokes shown in the above table do not work ask your system administrator for help The mouse Many operations in the Format Editor must be performed using a pointing device such as a mouse or trackball Use of the mouse is discussed below Mouse movement You can use the mouse to move the cursor anywhere on the screen If your workstation has multiple monitors rolling the mouse or trackball continuously in one direction moves the cursor across each of the screens FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Getting Started 2 33 Cursor shapes Normally the mouse cursor looks like a slanted arrow As you work with the Format Editor however the cursor may change shape to indicate that a special operation is underway Typical cursor shapes are shown below RIA Copy Select Draw Create Text Move Delete Typical Cursor Shapes Mouse b
331. panel NOTE The name and type of an editable DFD are displayed in the message area of the Format Editor Control panel when you move the cursor into the DFD FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 6 154 Dynamic Field Description Setting operational preferences You can define or redefine the operational mode of the Format Editor with the System Preferences panel To display this panel select the Preferences option from the Edit menu on the Format Editor Control panel To make a selection click the mouse SELECT button on one of the buttons below each title System Preferences Editing Mode Redisplay Group Selection Production Minimum By Intersection Design All By Containment Inactive Layer Color True Color Inactive Color OK Cancel When you finish making your selections click the mouse SELECT button on the OK button to save your preferences or to close the panel without changing the current settings click the mouse SELECT button on the Cancel button FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 Dynamic Field Description CHAPTER 6 155 System Preferences Entries Entry Option Description Editing mode Determines which panels are displayed when you edit a DFD Production mode Displays the DFD attributes panels during all DFD operations When you finish editing a format you must explicitly save the DFD by clickin
332. panel without making changes click the mouse SELECT button on the Cancel button Line fill Solid Dashed Double Dashed With the line fill control you can set lines to look solid or dashed You can also specify whether dashed lines are transparent or opaque A dashed line is transparent Only the foreground color is used Underlying objects can be seen between the empty spaces between the dashes A double dashed line is opaque Both foreground and background colors are used Underlying objects cannot be seen If you select either dashed line fill control make sure you also select a dash pattern as explained later in this section NOTE Dashed lines cause much slower runtime performance in the X Window System than do solid lines particularly for circles arcs ellipses and splines FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Drawing Methods CHAPTER 5 113 Line cap Butted Projecting Rounded The line cap control determines how the ends of a line will look in any new object drawn This is only important for thick lines where the shape of the line ending is visibly apparent The supported cap styles are x x x I I 1 I I I 1 I I 1 I 1 I I 1 I 1 1 I 1 1 I 1 1 I 1 1 I 1 I I 2 vi X 2 Butted Rounded Projecting Line Cap Styles e Butted The line is truncated at the end point where you make your last click e Rounded The line is filled past the end point a distance of half the
333. per for details You must factor in the slider length when calculating the Init Max value add the slider length set in the next field to the maximum number of items to calculate an Init Max value If you do not you will get unexpected results when scrolling Enter the slider length to be used for paging the data in the target dynamic fields equal to the number of visible columns or rows of data For example if the slider length is 4 the data display will shift by four rows at a time during paging While the slider length can be changed dynamically by an application as data is made available to the target dynamic field s this is not recommended The slider length should always be set to the height number of rows or width number of columns of the target dynamic field If it is not set to this value the scrollbar will scroll past the last data item or may never reach data items Enter the DFD Name of each display type linked to this scrollbar FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 7 328 Display Types Select List Sample Format sample_slist The Select List display type allows a user to choose or complete an action by selecting from a list of options An example of the Select List display type appears when you use the add window command and press the RETURN key without a format name The Select List display types can place a selected string of characters up to 40 into a field s
334. ples below show two different formats that you can use for the lookup table Value Lookup Method TEXT value lookup 0 00 CRITICAL fuel tank is empty red blink 0 10 WARNING fuel is low red white blink 0 11 Fuel tank is less than half full green white 0 50 Fuel tank is over half full green white 0 90 Fuel tank is over 90 full blue white 1 00 Fuel tank is full blue white Index Lookup Method TEXT index lookup Display me if table index is 0 red white blink Display me if table index is 1 orange white Display me if table index is 2 magenta white Each example above has a title line indicating the lookup method being used followed by each of the messages to be displayed in the dynamic field in quotation marks and corresponding foreground background colors You can also set the message to blink by adding the word blink at the end of the line The value lookup method includes a numeric value as the first entry in each row of the table whereas the index lookup method does not See the Lookup table and indexing section earlier in this chapter for a complete explanation of these lookup methods Display type specifications In addition to creating a lookup table enter the following specifications on the Status FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 353 Text Display panel as illustrated be
335. preceding the desired key with an symbol For example type testl in the Read key field to set a generic data source parameter During runtime a user can then define test1 to equal a specific text string value using a special format called session or a Sammi command set runtime key Runtime keys can be grouped into sessions A session can then be assigned to one or more formats Multiple sessions can be created but only one can be attached to a format at a time The user can swap out one session for another during runtime Please refer to Chapter 8 Data Access Types for more information on runtime keys Border styles When you create most dynamic fields you have the option of adding a border by creating a border width greater than zero You can select one of the four possible appearances Shadow In Shadow Out Border Styles Shadow Etched In Shadow Etched Out Lookup tables and indexing For the symbol table and text table display types you must attach a FWDU_SYMBOL_TABLE_TEXT End Item The fwdu_editor appears if you invoke a FWDU_SYMBOL_TABLE_TEXT FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 7 192 Display Types ol fwdu_editor File Help valvelusym safs definition file for symbol from status value for table lookup valve symbols header record SYMBOL value lookup valve symbol data records SSMB ROV2 SET
336. ps proceed to the next lesson Part 5 Finishing the background This procedure allows you to finish drawing the background by coloring copying and realigning objects Before starting make sure you have successfully completed all previous parts of this lesson 1 Click the mouse SELECT button on the Grouping Tool second row middle under Drawing Tools on the Format Editor Control panel KA E2 EAA Resize Grouping Tool 2 Click the mouse SELECT button just to the upper left of the screw shown in the Drawing Area FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 3 82 Learning the Format Editor 3 Draw the expanding box down across the screw until it is completely enclosed then click again The screw should now be entirely in the grouping box If not select Ungrouping Tool just to the right of the Grouping Tool and click the mouse SELECT button on the border of the grouping box to ungroup Repeat this step until you have enclosed the screw 4 Click the mouse SELECT button on the Copy Tool first row under Drawing Tools on the Format Editor Control panel next to the Eraser Tool a E Snap 2 Gea Recolor Copy Tool 5 Click the mouse SELECT button on the border of the grouping box in the Drawing Area Notice that the mouse pointer changes shape and an outline box appears attached to it 6 Mo
337. pter for details e Use the Universal Data Access types to control their state selected unselected or on off and whether they are sensitive or insensitive sensitive accepts events or insensitive ignores events and looks grayed out Send commands e Support runtime annotations FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 243 Have labels that are Text bitmap or transparent Toggle Buttons can have two labels either text or transparent one for the selected state and one for the unselected state or four bitmap labels one for the selected state and one for the unselected state and two additional bitmaps for the insensitive states If you do not specify a label for a state the counterpart state s label is used Toggle Buttons can include indicators which are small squares or diamonds on Mutually Exclusive Radio Buttons displayed on the left side of the button area Text labels can be multi lined and formatted with spacing around the top bottom and sides of the text Labels Push buttons can have two labels Sensitive and Insensitive whether the button can or cannot be selected respectively Toggle buttons can have four labels Unselected Sensitive Selected Sensitive Unselected Insensitive and Selected Insensitive You must use all text or all graphics for these types you cannot mix text and graphics You can use GIF Graphical Interface Format GIF87a and G
338. r Select list command record Slocal emd mm ww uy Item target record del win MDB PATH sample_color End Item path in the MDB Test table for a select list used as an On Off option list LIST_TABLE On First item entry record BETES a OMe TE Second item entry record item Use list item string ORE First item entry record A EIUN yN Second item entry record item Use list item string A command file may contain one menu or selection list FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Standard Command File APPENDIX C 379 Test table for menu MENU_TABLE Slocal cmd we uW y Second item del win MDB PATH qa_meter Third Menu table with Onboard Pre defined commands MENU_TABLE 1 He lp FWDU SERVER wee we N HELP 1 Mark Display FWDU SERVER Woe wee wh W MARK W 1 Open Marked Window List FWDU SERVER wee woe N MUR qa_integer1 First item entry record Slocal cmd woe woe y Second item del win MDB PATH ga_int Third item ga_reall First item Slocal cmd woe woe mym Second item del win MDB PATH gqa_real1l Third item qa_meter1 First item item Onboard Onboard Onboard entry record entry record entry record entry record entry record entry record entry record entry record FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2
339. r Foreground Color lightsteelbluel 0 Decimal Digits 2 Conv Factor Data Type Font courier bold 12 pt Scale Minimum 0 00 Limits Scale Maximum Increment 1 Show Scale Values Yes Scale Font courier bold 12 pt Scale Decimal Digits MZ Show Ticks Yes Tick Color HifLo Marks Color Hi Lo Marks l No black Label String eo Label Color Label Font courier bold 12 pt Threshold Threshold Value Show Threshold Threshold Color Reference High High EE Yes o black Middle Medium High am Yes Low High mT No High Low Tt 0 90 No TENA Medium Low Yes Low Low a MBS N FWDU UM 114 002 ROV User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 293 Entry Option Orientation Background Color Indicator Color Fill Color Border Color Border Width Border Style Show Value Background Color Fixed Scale Linear Meter Entries Description Set the orientation of the meter by clicking the mouse SELECT button in this box to toggle between Vertical and Horizontal Either enter a color for the background or select a color by clicking the mouse OPTION button in this box to display a list of choices Either enter a color for the indicator or select a color by clicking the mouse OPTION button in this box to display a list of choices Either enter a color for the fill or select a color by clicking the mouse OPTION button in this box to display a list of choices For a border width greater t
340. r more information Runtime annotations The General Action Button display type supports runtime annotations An application quality value determines the color of the label text and the label s background and whether the button should blink Annotated characters are not supported Linking to function keys Normally buttons are activated when the Sammi user clicks the mouse SELECT button on their screen image However buttons may also be linked to function keys on the user s workstation so that the button is activated when the user presses the corresponding key This only works if the window containing the button has the keyboard focus at the time the user presses the key Thus the same key can be used for different buttons in different windows To create such a link enter a local function reference as the DFD Name on the DFD Display panel Local function references are constructed by typing a dollar sign the letters 1 f and an arbitrary number between 00 24 For example 1 07 The local function reference is mapped to a key in the keyboard definitions file SAMMI data keydefs dat For example the keydefs dat file could define the F2 key to execute the local function If07 FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 245 F2 NoSymbol _ 1f07 If the F2 key is pressed it would have the same effect as if the user clicked on the General Action button DFD whose name is 1
341. r shifting For more information see Appendix G Shifting and Masking FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 7 276 Display Types Menu Sample Format sample_menu The Menu display type defines either a pop up menu or a menu panel as shown in the illustration below The menu panel appears as a fixed bar across the top of the Sammi window while a pop up menu appears only when the user clicks the mouse OPTION button anywhere inside the window Both types of menus perform the same functions use the type most suitable to your purposes Sammi Window Start Stop Exit Menu Panel Pop Up Menu Typically menus can be dedicated to any of the following functions e Issuing Sammi commands Menu options can be designed to trigger any Sammi command add window silence alarm etc including the Sammi system command which can be used to start external applications and issue operating system commands See the Command Reference for a list of all commands Issuing application specific commands Menu options can be designed to communicate with applications from within the Sammi program e Inserting data Any menu option can be designed to insert a string of characters into any data field on a format Each of these functions works by sending a simple character string to the appropriate location As discussed above the target location could be Sammi an applica
342. raph by entering minimum and maximum values for the overall scale and individual values for each tick mark For example in the illustration above the minimum value on the scale is 0 the maximum value is 110 and the tick marks values are 0 20 80 and 100 Given these values Sammi automatically positions the tick marks and labels along the bar at appropriate locations Also you can specify the bar colours and the direction in which it moves left to right top to bottom etc You can show the current data value at one end of the bar graph too API information The FWDU_SERVER sends only the current value The limits and measurement end item type are passed to the FWDU_SERVER at preview and the FWDU_SERVER sends data between max and min FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Display Types CHAPTER 7 205 Display type specifications Enter the following specifications as illustrated on the panel below rp EA fb bar FE Bar Display Label Location Top Right Bar Display Show Value No ae os Decimal Dgt Orientation Vertical Min Value Eva ag Depth Thickness Max Value 300 00 Limits iska Conv Factor WE Thresholds ive Data type Label Show Value Label Bar Color i Yes Sh LT 30 ve j 3 ___ Hi Lo Marks Yes o6 Yes MEZA Marks Color pe 60 deg oo I ON _ No MEAT Dot a Fill Yes 40 deg 0 eek E i uo E SEE i O Fill Direction Up Right Yes 20 deg Def
343. re information on security Command entries for menus used as options For a Menu used as a Command Option which pops up when the mouse OPTION button is clicked in a trigger dynamic field the presence or absence of the logical server name causes different actions e Ifa logical server name is present the command entries associated with the selected item are sent to the specified server If the logical server is an application the server is notified that the command data for the selected item is available with the S2_SEND_CMD event within the application If entry in the logical server name is local cmd the command items are sent to the Sammi Command processor e If there is no entry in the Logical Server Name field of the Static Menu in the Menu Definition panel the logical server of the trigger DFD is notified that the command data for the selected item is available with the S2_BTN_EVENT event in the application In this case if the trigger DFD is not connected to a server the commands associated with the selected item are discarded Display type specifications Enter the following specifications as illustrated on the panel below Ba ws e fb menu FE menu Menu Display Shadow Thickness Orientation l Vertical Standard Menu Table Name SSMB ROV2 SETUP MENU End Item Enter Reset FWDU UM 114 002 ROV User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 279
344. real numbers that is single and double precision floating point numbers as input from the user or an application Display type specifications Enter the following specifications as illustrated on the panel below fb real FE Real Display Real Display Decimal Digits KL Conversion Factor IZ Maximum Value Minimum Value a Decimal Display Format v Exponential v Smallest Data Type Roat Enter Reset Real Display Entries Entry Option Description Decimal Digits Enter the number of digits to be shown after the decimal point in the displayed value The incoming data value is rounded up or down to this number of digits Conversion Factor Enter the conversion code for incoming data see Appendix F for details Maximum Value Read only Data is automatically taken from End Item when associating measurement End Item Data is Engineering Range High Value FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 7 322 Display Types Real Display Entries continued Entry Option Description Minimum Value Read only Data is automatically taken from End Item when associating measurement End Item Data is Engineering Range Low Value Display Format Enter the desired format for displaying numbers which can be either decimal exponential or both Decimal format is the normal method of displaying numbers Exponential format is a shorthand way of displaying very large or small
345. references n a Add the System Prefer ences panel for entering specific global system parameters Edit Delete delete dfd Erase an existing object or DED View Front n a Bring an object to the front top of the format View Back n a Send an object to the back bottom of the format View View DFDs update dfd Show how DFDs will look in Sammi View Preview n a Preview current format View Redisplay n a Redraw all objects in the Composites Read Com posite Composites Save Compos ite read format p write part Drawing Area Read a grouped set of objects from MDB Save a grouped set of objects to MDB ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 2 38 Getting Started Menu option Command equivalent Purpose Dynamic Fields Display Palette add window fb dfdpal Show the DFD Pal ette Dynamic Fields Read DFD Lib n a Read a DFD from the MDB in to current format Dynamic Fields Save DFD Lib n a Save the dynamic field into the MDB Dynamic Fields Add DFD add dfd Create a new DFD Style Font n a Add the Current Font Selection panel Style Colors n a Add a panel for selecting a color either Select Adds the Color Selection Display panel Palette Adds the Color Palette panel Style Line Style n a Add the Current Line Style panel Style Fill Style n a Add the Current Fill Style panel Style Snap Grid n a Add the Current Spacing panel Style Constraint
346. reverse the operation with the Undo function Deleting all objects NOTE The pop up menu described below is not available during unfinished operations or operations that use the mouse OPTION button for other purposes Drawing polylines polygons and open and closed splines use the mouse OPTION button to complete the figure the front and back commands use the mouse OPTION to reverse operations the Mirror Tools and the Arrow Tool use the mouse OPTION button for their own purposes With the Remove All option you can clear all objects and groups from the Drawing Area FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 5 138 Drawing Methods To erase all objects from the Drawing Area 1 Click with the mouse OPTION button anywhere inside the Drawing Area The pop up menu shown here appears Undo Redisplay Zoom In Zoom Out Zoom Box Full View Reset Initial Reset Maximum Pan To Remove ANS 2 Move the cursor to the Remove All option and click the mouse SELECT button All objects disappear from the Drawing Area If you delete everything by mistake immediately reverse the operation with Undo Rotating amp flipping or mirroring objects Mirror Tools With the Mirror Tools you can create a mirror image of an object or group of objects that has been flipped or rotated from the original The original m
347. rowheads Object fill type none solid stipple Object fill rule even odd winding Stipple pattern Color foreground background window e Select other convenient functions such as The DFD palette Import other formats into the current format including all static objects and dynamic fields With the mouse OPTION button in the Drawing Area fb bkgd you can e Undo the last operation e Redraw all objects Zoom and pan on objects as well as return to a full view of format e Reset format to initial or maximum size e Remove all objects FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 5 106 Drawing Methods With the command line of the Format Editor Control panel you can e Scale and or move all the static and dynamic objects except bitmaps and bitmap text in a format e Pan move the cursor around the Drawing Area fb bkgd and zoom magni fy into detailed graphics for more accurate precise drawings e Add the Color Palette panel Before you begin drawing Before you start drawing static objects you can save time by using some of the functions discussed on the following pages Importing a format You can import all the static objects and dynamic fields of a format into another format using the import function To import a format follow these steps 1 Either select Import Fmt from the File menu whereafter a Format_popup appears 2 Comple
348. rs such as when the graphic indicator passes a threshold This feature provides an additional level of information to the data dis play For example if a temperature reading is dangerously high the graphic indica tor may turn red and start blinking and the characters HP may display next to the digital representation of the value e Show borders that give the image a three dimensional appearance FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 7 284 Display Types API information The FWDU_SERVER sends only the current value The limits and measurement End Item type are passed to the FWDU_SERVER at preview and the FWDU_SERVER sends data between max and min FWDU UM 114 002 ROV User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 285 Display type spec ifications Enter the following specifications as illustrated on the panels below fb meter FE Meter Reset Meter Display p Ip Meter Color Fi Meter Ye _ C Dial Color Scale Color Wide Scale f Show Ticks L Tick Incr HifLo Marks L Needle Color blue Yes T 100 00 L Label Color white Border Color _ Border Width EC Enter Border Style V Shadow In w Shadow Etched In Shadow Out Shadow Etched Out Threshold Markers Value Show Color High High e Medium High orange Low High CRC High Low Medium Low Low Low Threshold Coloring Mode wv Right
349. rsor 4 Click the mouse SELECT button again fb bkgd Sizing a Dynamic Field FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 6 176 Dynamic Field Description You can repeat these steps as often as necessary to get the desired results For both Width and Height the pixel dimensions may be ignored since they are calculated as you stretch the dynamic field outline However character dimensions are crucial for those display types that show alphanumeric data Alarm Selection List Custom Time Text Equation Text Browser Formatted Numeric Text Table Integer Time Real For these display types the width in characters should reflect the largest possible data value i e maximum number of characters likely to be displayed in the dynamic field The height should equal the total rows of data you intend to display The Width and Height in characters depends on the pixel dimensions and font selected Resizing dynamic fields With the Resize Tool you can resize any dynamic field to any proportion To resize a dynamic field 1 Click the mouse SELECT button on the Resize Tool button on the Format Editor Control panel Resize Tool 2 Move the cursor to the Drawing Area The cursor changes to a hand with a pointing finger and the dynamic fields become transparent areas with double outlines FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A
350. rsor slowly toward the lower right and watch the expanding circle enlarge FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 3 80 Learning the Format Editor 4 Click the mouse SELECT button again once a small circle of approximately 1 2 inch 20 pixels diameter has formed 5 Click the mouse SELECT button on the Line Tool top row under Drawing Tools on the Format Editor Control panel Drawing Tools yea ee Vial g Ass 5 Line Tool 6 Click the mouse SELECT button once on the upper left circumference of the circle drawn in the step above 7 Extend the rubberband line diagonally across the circle and click the mouse SELECT button again on the lower right circumference of the circle Drawing the Circle Drawing a Line Across Circle Circle Line Click Points FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Learning the Format Editor 3 81 At this point your drawing should have one small circle in it with a diagonal line that makes it look like the head of a screw If not repeat the previous steps until the screw is drawn correctly If necessary you can erase the line or circle using the Eraser Tool first row second from right under Drawing Tools on the Format Editor Control panel and start over 8 Select Save from the File menu in the Format Editor Control panel to save the format When you finish the above ste
351. rver to which the command text string is sent For predefined commands use FWDU_SERVER and for Sammi commands use local cmd lt format name gt If the command text string is to be sent to a particular format enter the name of that format The maximum length is 32 characters Do not use this for onboard pre defined commands lt dfd name gt If the command text string is to be sent to a particular DED enter the name of that DFD The maximum length is 12 characters Do not use this for onboard pre defined commands Y N If the command text string is an executable Sammi command enter Y Otherwise enter N For on board pre defined commands only use N FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Standard Command File APPENDIX C 377 Third record lt command gt or lt text string gt lt command gt The command string for a Sammi command that will be executed when the item is chosen from the select list or menu lt text string gt The text string is to be sent to the logical server or to the selected DFD when this item is chosen from the Select List The maximum length of this string is 80 characters If you define the lt command gt or the lt text string gt as item the string defined for the lt list item string gt from the first item record will be substituted for item before the command or string is sent to its target The next page gives the
352. s Onboard_Cmd_popup Enter a full MDB pathname for a swop_command ucl_automated_procedure End Item type or use Pathname Support When a correct pathname has been entered then press OK FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Display Types CHAPTER 7 197 Now the following window appears Onboard_Commanding_ popup TEMPLATE for SSMB ROV2 COMMANDING SWOP4 xx send SSMB ROV2 COMMANDING SWOP4 pl gt 5 p2 gt EMPTY p3 gt p4 gt p5 gt 221 44 p6 gt 5 p7 gt 12 12 1998 00 00 2 500 p8 gt SSMB ROV2 EMPTY E LONG_REAL_TYPE LONG_REAL_TYPE LONG_REAL_TYPE 221 44 5 INTEGER_TYPE TIME_TYPE 12 12 1998 00 00 2 500 PATHNAME_TYPE SSMB ROV2 STATE_CODE_TYPE GREEN STRING_TYPE Parameter ignored Parameter not an IN parameter For each found parameter the following is listed NAME IN OUT type TYPE DEFAULT VALUE and CONSTRAINTS If we take a look at parameter P1 we see the parameter is an IN parameter of type INTEGER having the default value of 5 Non IN parameters are ignored see P10 parameter To help you in creation of a onboard command the onboard command help provides you with a template with all default values put in see last line in above figure Legal Onboard Command types STRING TYPE parameters are in enclosed by See P2 parameter TIME TYPE parameters have the format DD MM YY YY HH MM SEC S 1000 S1000
353. s E ae FWDU UM 114 002 ROV User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 281 Menu Definition Entries continued Entry Option Description Cascade Level You must set a cascade level for all menus Enter a value starting at one The value is one more than the actual number of levels to create the next cascade level A value of zero signifies the last entry for the menu An empty entry on the same level is used as a separator blank line between items on the same level You can use the left and right arrows to change the level Label Text Enter the text that will display on the menu for each option If this is a menu panel and you do not enter a logical server or a DFD name the text will be centered on the panel If you enter a logical server or a DFD name the text will be left justified Hot Key Specify a hot key for each menu item The hot key is used as direct keyboard access to a menu item Enter the ASCII keyboard equivalent to the key that you want defined as the hot key Hot keys do not work with Cascade Level 1 Text String FWDU command send to the runtimesystem data server Pressing the Edit button the following window appears I For a detailed description of the Edit_Cmd_popup see Entering a Command on page 195 NOTE Edit only via Edit button Standard menu You can enter menu specifications into a command file cmd by usin
354. s Once you have entered all the information for a layer either press the RETURN key or click the mouse SELECT button on the Enter button FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Format amp Layer Description CHAPTER 4 101 To add a layer into an existing list 1 Click the mouse SELECT button on the Add button 2 Type in the information for the new layer changing the Position field to the number at which you want the new layer to be located 3 Either press the RETURN key or click the mouse SELECT button on the Enter button The Position field for all layers that follow the one you add are automatically updated and the Layer List is sorted in position order To delete a layer click the mouse SELECT button on the name in the Layers List Then click the mouse SELECT button on the Delete button When you have added and saved all the layers you want close this panel by clicking the mouse SELECT button on the Dismiss button Entry Option Active Layer Name Selected Layer Name Position Runtime Attributes Initial Visibility Layer Display Entries Meaning Display only This field is determined when you click on the Active button Enter the text for the layer name The default value for this field is LAYER where corresponds to the number of the field When a new layer is added this field is the next sequential number for the layer Click the mouse SELECT button i
355. s input from the user or applications Unlike other display types the Text display type does not require you to enter additional specifications Instead the field uses the default colors and font entered in the DFD Display panel see Chapter 6 Dynamic Field Description FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 7 346 Display Types Text Browser Browser Sample Format sample_browser The Text Browser Data Input Output Field display type basically functions as a single line or multi line ASCII text editor It allows a user to enter edit text or receive text from an application or other source You can select the source or destination of this ASCII text by using one of three methods e Dynamic Loaded by an application Standard Read from a disk file Static Defined at format creation time You can also use this to create or modify menu tables selection list tables option list tables or any other text file required by Sammi NOTE The Text Browser does not scroll properly through files containing the Tab character Also it does not support eight bit ASCII characters languages which require the use of the ISO 8859 1 standard The Text Browser Data Input Output Field display type features e A three dimensional appearance e An optional multi line label at the top Optional File Write and Cancel buttons e Optional scroll bars You can set scroll bars to appear or let Sammi autom
356. s n a Add the Line Constraints panel Style Recolor n a Displays the Recolor Style panel Help n a Add a help window FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 Getting Started 2 39 The Drawing Area fb bkgd The Drawing Area fb bkgd is the blank canvas on which you can draw static objects and dynamic fields for new formats Formats to be changed also appear here for modification The size of the Drawing Area and the positioning of elements within it correspond exactly to the size and layout of the final Sammi window as displayed in the Runtime Environment When a format first displays in the Format Editor Drawing Area it is at its maximum size as defined in the Maximum Width and Maximum Height fields on the Format Description panel The default Maximum Width is 610 pixels and Maximum Height is 400 pixels When you zoom in on the format scrollbars appear on the Drawing Area Moving panels To move a panel to a different position follow these steps 1 Move the cursor to the name printed in the window manager title bar at the top of the panel 2 Hold down the mouse SELECT button 3 Drag the mouse in the direction you want the panel moved As you move the mouse an outline of the panel moves across the screen 4 Release the mouse SELECT button when the outline reaches the desired location The panel reappears at the new location NOTE Some workstation window managers
357. s the adjoining field See Appendix E for an explanation of pixel measure ments e Click the mouse SELECT button in the Drawing Area at a point for the upper left corner of the DFD then using the mouse move the cursor down and to the right to define an area in the Drawing Area Location can only be set by initially clicking the mouse SELECT button in the Drawing Area to specify the upper left corner for the DFD For Location both values are measured in pixels with the two values indicating horizontal and vertical offset respectively from the top left corner of the format The location field of the DFD display panel may be modified to adjust the upper left corner of the DFD FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 Dynamic Field Description CHAPTER 6 175 Sizing a new dynamic field An easy way to indicate size is to draw an outline of the dynamic field inside the Drawing Area For new dynamic fields follow these steps 1 Select the Add DFD option from the Dynamic Fields menu of the Format Editor Control panel 2 Move the cursor to the upper left corner of the area where you want the dynamic field to be located and click the mouse SELECT button once Notice that Location is now fixed 3 Move the cursor until the dynamic field outline is the desired size or until the desired Width Height settings appear see discussion below Note that the Width Height settings change as you move the cu
358. se the Select option from the pull right menu that appears when you select Colors from the Style menu on the Format Editor Control panel to display the Color Selection Display panel Color Selection Display Foreground Background Window white black lightsteelblue black black _ black white white white red red red green green green blue blue blue cyan cyan cyan magenta magenta magenta _ g e 2 Bonet OK Cancel 2 Click the mouse SELECT button in the scrollbar through under Foreground until steelblue appears Click the mouse SELECT button on steelblue The patch of color beside the word Foreground changes to steel blue Click the mouse SELECT button in the scrollbar trough under Background until midnightblue appears Click the mouse SELECT button on midnightblue The patch of color beside the word Background changes to midnight blue Click the mouse SELECT button on the OK button to change the current foreground background and or window color and to close the Color Selection Display panel Cancel will close the Color Selection Display panel and not change any colors FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 3 60 Learning the Format Editor Setting the fill pattern To set the default fill pattern 1 Select Fill Style from the Style menu on the Format Editor Control panel to display the C
359. seeeensawees 196 Onboard Software Commands c cccccse ese eeeseeesseeseseeenesennes 196 FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 VI Table of Contents Display type reference cccccccceeeeseeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeessaaaeaeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeees 198 Alarmi optional sich sate acekce e a E ca biel east aa ula d 201 Display type specifications oo scecviaseecerecevectel aatiacsn ce saat eneiaeeass 202 GD saad ETTET bhuuad eeteasanes bye endededeibasanthiwe sekeddiadedneneuteioeladebeadieiae yess 204 ARPA TOIT AU OM asss inana epic cen ea soba adani ear es iaer E AEN 204 Display type specifications cecseee shee Aes one eS te 205 BaleWant i 2 ee Siete A E od les 209 APHinformatlOM Sues cities ccc ce cen epic ea eos Het den tyae eB cme sede 210 Display type specifications 3 cai ccces ws sve teies etree eceay etek artes ete oreeets 211 Barchart variables display type specifications cceeeeeeeeeees 217 GUIVE SOG aiei nae led tts hie katate eae cheeses tient ta 221 CUSTOM TMG 204 000 oy A ea ee aa cane ote 222 Display type specifications o 5 ccedue tates usec ae i lea dal ate 223 DYNAMIC ODICCIS inaa a a a a SAS telat oi 225 Number of objects sic fectiese ioe aitecddeeee wes vee ece cd orcceaercue si easeed ievewene ney 225 Grouping Dynamic Objects xcs desi cues ches An acttedecwctet inneeenguned encteve exdens 226 Dynamic Object tables eeeeesecceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeseeaaeeee
360. ser Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Drawing Methods CHAPTER 5 117 Selecting fill styles Certain objects including circles ellipses arcs rectangles and polygons can be filled with a solid color or a stipple pattern Any new object of this type uses the default fill attributes shown under the Current Fill Style panel These attributes control e Fill type none solid transparent stippled opaque stippled e Fill rule even odd winding e Stipple pattern You can always change fill styles for any object later see Recoloring objects later in this chapter To save time however you may prefer to set fill styles before drawing filled objects NOTE Filling objects with solid or stippled fills tends to slow down system perform ance Solid fill provides somewhat faster system performance than stippled fills To display the Current Fill Style panel select the Fill Style option from the Styles menu on the Format Editor Control panel The Current Fill Style panel appears Current Fill Style OK Fill Style Fill Rule Cancel L xX K Fill Pattern EE Cen E M Mh S Current Fill Style panel FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 5 118 Drawing Methods Setting the current fill style defaults To set the defaults for each of the controls on the Curre
361. server fields Also you can use runtime keys within command strings generated by General Action Button Menu and Select List DFD types for details refer to the relevant section on each display type in Chapter 7 FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manua ROVSING A S 15 August 19991 Data Access Types CHAPTER 8 361 Creating runtime keys Use a runtime key to specify a variable for all or parts of a desired item For example you can replace all of a read key using a runtime key or just part You can also specify multiple runtime keys in the field for the desired item To specify a runtime key type the symbol followed by a name for the runtime key For example type station1 in a read key field Later a user can set the key station to equal a specific variable such as controller32 Placing a space after a runtime key acts as a delimiter it ends the runtime key statement Thus you cannot use spaces in a runtime key name unless you use double quotes to enclose that space You can also use non alphanumeric characters as delimiters For example you can use a period as a delimiter to specify the following runtime keys DIVISION DEPARTMENT USER At runtime these keys can be replaced by KINESIX DEVELOPMENT CASEY To use non alphanumeric characters as part of the runtime key name without including it as a delimiter use the backslash character The backslash is also useful to send a read or write key that uses a ru
362. sign mode these exceptions do not apply Changing points in objects EE Add Delete Move point point point Point Tools With the Point Tools you change the size or shape of most objects by adding deleting or moving the control points on them In addition you can add or delete points on lines polygons and splines The three Point Tool buttons are grouped together in the middle of the top row on the Format Editor Control panel The three Point Tools are Add Point Tool Delete Point Tool Move Point Tool FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Drawing Methods CHAPTER 5 135 To adjust an object s shape or size 1 Click the mouse SELECT button on one of the Point Tool buttons on the Format Editor Control panel As soon as you select one of these buttons control points appear on all objects in the Drawing Area 2 Move the cursor to the Drawing Area and click the mouse SELECT button on the control point you want to add delete or move If you are deleting a control point the point disappears and the object is redrawn If you are adding or moving a control point a rubberband line appears to let you relocate and set the point 3 If you are adding or moving a control point click the mouse SELECT button again at the new location to set the point The object is redrawn Any time you are dissatisfied with the results of these operations you can us
363. sion addition subtraction gt gt greater greater or equal lt lt less less or equal equal not equal same precedence amp amp logical AND both operands always evaluated logical OR both operands always evaluated assignment right associative Built in functions which take a single argument are described below Built in functions abs x Ixl absolute value of x atan x arc x arc tangent of x cos x cos x cosine of x exp x e exponential of x int x integer para of x truncated towards zero log x log x logarithm base e of x log10 x log 0 x logarithm base 10 of x sin x sin x sine of x sqrt x Vx square root of x FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Equation Language APPENDIX I 397 Logical expressions have a value 1 0 true and 0 0 false As in C any non zero value is taken to be true As is always the case with floating point numbers equality comparisons are inherently suspect Egn also has a few built in constants shown below Built in constants DEG 1807 degrees per radian E e base of natural logarithms GAMMA Y Euler Mascheroni constant PHI V 5 1 2 the golden ratio PI T ratio of circumference to diameter Statements and control flow Eqn statements have the following grammar stmtlist nothing stmt stmtlist stmt expr variable expr while expr stmt if expr stmt if expr stmt else st
364. specified as part of the label text For example if you wanted a margin of 1 character on top bottom and sides of the General Action Button Grouping label and you wanted a two line label you would specify the label text as n first line of text n second line of text n FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 7 252 Display Types General Action Button Grouping Display Entries continued Entry Option Description Radio Grouping If set to Yes the General Action Button Grouping enforces Radio behavior on all its members If set to No toggle type General Action Buttons exhibit the same behavior as if they were not included in a grouping Always One If set to Yes the grouping enforces the active radio or toggle button to be selected automatically after having been unselected if no other radio or toggle button was activated If set to No the active toggle or radio button may be unselected This resource is important only when Radio Grouping is set to Yes Adjust Margin If set to Yes the inner margins of all buttons contained within the General Action Button Grouping are forced to the same value The inner margin corresponds to the button s top bottom left and right margins Horizontal Orientation A horizontal orientation causes the top and bottom margin for all buttons in a particular row to be forced to the same value the value is the largest margin specified for one of the buttons
365. splays in the color defined in the Fill Color field FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV User Manual 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 291 e Runtime annotations cause the graphic indicator to change colors and or to blink and or to append text characters such as HI or LO next to the digital representa tion of the value whenever an event occurs such as passing a threshold This feature provides an additional level of information to the data display For example if a temperature reading is dangerously high the graphic indicator may turn red and start blinking and the characters HT may display next to the digital representation of the value e Borders give the image a three dimensional appearance API information The FWDU_SERVER sends only the current value The limits and measurement End Item type are passed to the FWDU_SERVER at preview and the FWDU_SERVER sends data between max and min FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 7 292 Display Types Display type specifications Enter the following specifications as illustrated on the panel below z fb fsl Fixed Scale Linear Meter Display Fixed Scale Linear Meter Display Enter Orientation Horizontal Apacs Background Color iF Indicator Color Fill Color Border Color Border Width ESE Border Style A Shadow In Shadow Etched In Shadow Out Shadow Etched Out Show Value l Yes Background Colo
366. st it in the Runtime Environment At this point you should already have the Format Editor started with the respective windows displayed on the screen Before continuing make sure you have successfully finished Part 1 of this lesson 1 Stop the current preview Quit the window 2 Select DFD Attrib from the Edit menu and click on a DFD you would like to change 3 Modify the values you want and save the DFD 4 Preview again by selecting Preview in the View menu Lesson 3 Drawing static background objects The following lesson allows you to draw static background objects that will make the display look like a control panel These include a rectangular facing plate with screws placed at each corner Do not worry if the elements do not line up perfectly the first time Before you complete the lesson you will learn how to reshape and realign all the display components Before starting this lesson make sure the Format Editor is started with the Format Editor Control panel displayed on the screen if it is not see Chapter 2 Getting Started Part 1 Changing the format This procedure explains how to bring up the format created in Lesson 1 so that you can begin making changes to it Before continuing make sure you have successfully completed all parts of Lesson 1 earlier in this chapter FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Learning the Format Editor 3 73 HE File
367. sue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Learning the Format Editor 3 67 Item which is found automatically in the MDB is checked to make sure that the End Item s type is compatible If errors are found then the End Item is not accepted and the dialogue is not closed NOTE At preview the maximum and minimum attributes of the measurement End Items are sent to the data server automatically Completing the data entry process for the Real DFD Now move the cursor to the DFD Display panel DFD Display DFD Name inputemp Display Type real Data Access Type universal Refresh Rate 5 Refresh gt Ss Poll O Save DFD Cancel DFD 1 Click the mouse SELECT button on the Save DFD button on the DFD Display panel to save the dynamic fields Once you do this the background of the DFD reverts to the background color of the rest of the format 2 Click the mouse SELECT button on the Cancel DFD button to clear the extra panels from the screen NOTE When you click on the Save DFD button the dynamic field becomes an outline of the DFD To see how the dynamic field actually looks select View DFDs from the View menu on the Format Editor Control panel 3 Select Save from the File menu in the Format Editor Control panel to save your format When you completed the above steps proceed to the next lesson FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999
368. system clock or by an application depending on the data access type you use NOTE A custom time DFD that has a Data Access Type of Universal can be blanked out if the application sends the value 2000000000 minus 2 billion to the DFD FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 223 Display type specifications Enter the following specifications as illustrated on the panel below Entry Option Format String Custom Time Display Format String SH M S Mzb d h by Time zone Local Enter Reset Custom Time Display Entries Description Enter the appropriate combination of words punctuation and insertion codes needed to produce the desired customized time date display Valid punctuation includes and Valid insertion codes are as follows a abbreviated week day name Tue A week day name Tuesday h or b abbreviated month name Apr B month name April m month number 01 12 0 month number 1 12 d day of month 01 31 e day of month 1 31 H hour 00 23 k hour 0 23 I1 hour 00 12 l hour 1 12 M minute 00 59 S second 00 59 p equivalent of AM or PM Z time zone abbreviation EST z time zone name EASTERN j day number of year 001 366 Y year including century 1991 y year within century 00 99 FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 0
369. t For example the following equation string prints the sum of two times the values of two DFDs func twox return 2 1 2 27 print twox fieldl1 field2 FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 apperxnxs Sample Bitmap Symbol File 399 define pump_width 32 define pump_height 32 static char pump_bits 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 Oxfc Oxff Ox0f 0x00 0x83 0x03 0x08 0xc0 0x00 0x06 0x78 0x40 0x00 0x0c 0x78 0x20 0x00 0x18 0x68 0x20 0x00 Oxf8 Ox f 0x10 0x00 0x10 0x60 0x10 0x00 0x10 0x60 0x10 0x00 0x10 0x60 0x10 0x00 0x10 0x60 0x10 0x00 0x10 0x60 0x3f 0x00 0x08 0xe0 Ox3f 0x00 0x08 0xe0 0x40 0x00 0x04 0x00 Oxc0O 0x00 0x06 0x00 0x00 0x83 0x01 0x00 0x00 Oxff 0x00 0x00 0x80 0x81 0x01 0x00 0xc0 0x00 0x03 0x00 0x60 0x00 0x06 0x00 0x30 0x00 0x0c 0x00 Oxf8 Oxff 0x1f 0x00 Oxf8 Oxff 0x1f 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 APPENDIX J 400 Sample Bitmap Symbol File FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 APPENDIX K Sample Dynamic Object Table 401
370. t SUGGESTED i ae WORKING Working CHANGES INTERFACE Prototype Typical Work Flow for Interface Development You can use the hard copy command see the Command Reference to produce high quality printouts of the final interface design in place of hand drawn or drafted sketches With the FWDU you can quickly check the formats you have designed by previewing them The preview sends random data to the displays with in the limits specified for the End Item Format naming tracking You have to comply to the Mission Database naming conventions You may use letters numbers and the underscore character The names are checked when you create End Items in the I MBD You may consider a standard naming scheme that will help you and others keep track of the various formats It is also useful to use Virtual Nodes for grouping formats and other data types FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 2 30 Getting Started Starting the FWDU Format Editor NOTE Before the FWDU can be used for the first time it must be installed on your workstation Please see the FWDU installation guide To start editing with the FWDU Format Editor select an End Item of the type FWDU_SYNOPTIC_DISPLAY FWDU_LIBRARY_BINARY or FWDU_COMPOSITE_BINARY and click with the right button Now select the Tools and then FWDU Editor The FWDU Format Editor will now start NOTE If you want to edit an End Item of type F
371. t menu on the Format Editor Control panel Enter the information as required on the Layer Display panel Layer Display Active Layer Name layer is currently visible top layer Layer List Selected Layer Name top layer top layer Me Position 0 Run time Attributes Initial Visibility Disabled Declutter Visible Min Declutter 0 Max Declutter 0 Add Delete Active Display Dismiss Enter Once you have added the layer in order to draw any static objects or dynamic objects you must make the layer active To do this click the mouse SELECT button on its name in the Layer List of the Layer Display panel then click the mouse SELECT button on the Active button Now draw any objects or add any DFDs to this layer that you desire To change the active layer click the mouse SELECT button on another layer name in the Layer List of the Layer Display panel then click the mouse SELECT button on the Active button Make any modifications or additions to that layer When a layer is active in the Format Editor it is automatically displayed and you can hide it by clicking the mouse SELECT button on the displayed button which then changes to a pushed in hidden button Click on the hidden button to redisplay the layer To create a new layer at the bottom of the Layer List click the mouse SELECT button on the Add button then enter the information for the layer in the appropriate boxe
372. t of the Columbus Ground System and it is used for creating and editing on board synoptic displays used for controlling and commanding the Columbus Orbiting Facility COP Based Mission Database USER FWDU Scope Flight Data Generation Ground System Support Software On Board System On Board Mass Memory MCD On Board Executor Astronaut The FWDU creates and stores synoptic displays in the Mission Database MDB The synoptic dis plays are hereafter read from the MDB converted and placed on the COF on board laptop called LAPAP The displays are fed with data from the on board data management system DMS via the logical server called the MCD Mission Control and Display Commands triggered by the as tronaut are read from the display by the MCD and passed on to the COF systems Who can use this manual This manual assumes that you have a basic understanding of computers networking and interfaces This includes anyone who has used window based computer software and understands good user interface design It also includes anyone who has used a workstation on a network and understands how networking allows users to share information and resources If you have experience using drawing programs you will find the Format Editor s drawing features familiar and easy to use As a format designer you may have to work closely with or consider the needs of these other Sammi users
373. t option of the add window com mand If this format is to be used as a temporary pop up or dialog panel select whether it grabs the focus when it appears by clicking the mouse SELECT button in this box to toggle between Yes and No NOTE If you select Yes for the Grab Focus field you should always include a Cancel or Dismiss button that issues a delete window command or set the timeout value otherwise the user cannot remove the format from the screen and can only regain control of the cursor by killing Sammi FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 4 90 Format amp Layer Description Format Description Entries continued Entry Option Meaning Window Background Color Enter the background color of the win dow as explained later in this chapter Image You can change the background image by using the End Item button next to the field The field itself is read only Image Color Enter color for the background image as explained later in this chapter Image Type Read Only The type is determined by the attached image s type See above Page Fwd Bkwd etc Formats to be linked for paging purposes as explained later in this chapter Use the End Item buttons to change these fields The End Items must be of type FWDU_SYNOPTIC_DISPLAY Defining window size and position If you have planned correctly you should already know the desired size and position of each
374. t the area defined by the dynamic field When creating a meter or gauge therefore you can make the dynamic field virtually any size If the meter or gauge is less than 100 pixels by 100 pixels the image may not be displayed correctly Any text portion of the image may overwrite the graphic part of the image or not display at all You will enter the same set of specifications for Meter and Gauge You can specify colors for the body dial background scale tick marks needle and labels You can also set the minimum and maximum values for the needle scale the increment values for the tick marks and indicate whether to display them or not You can also add several features to make the display more helpful to the user For example you can e Show the current data value just below the dial along with a label that indicates what type of reading is being shown Show high low marks that indicate how far the needle has traveled in either direction during the display runtime These are shown as right triangles on the me ter gauge e Show threshold indicators high high medium high low high high low medium low low low These bands of color on the numeric scale represent thresholds that can be preset or set dynamically by an application e Use runtime annotations optional to change colors and or to blink and or to append text characters such as HI or LO next to the digital representation of the value whenever an event occu
375. ta Input Output display type e Display types Formatted Numeric Output Object Icon Symbol Table Text Table Alarm Dynamic Object Sammi can present almost any concept symbolically Instead of showing a data value literally you can represent it graphically as Graphic symbols e g open closed valve on off switch or short messages such as OK or PROBLEM Lists of messages concerning alarms or system events for example System Error at 145 Blinking and moving objects Each of these effects is accomplished by creating a lookup table that specifies the characters or symbols to be substituted for certain ranges of incoming data values For example if the incoming data value is 12 it could be converted to a symbol or a message by comparing it to a lookup table as shown below 12 lookup table gt POWER OFF 12 lookup table 0K e Display types Bar Gauge Meter Linear Meters Moving scale and Fixed scale Plot Trend You can display incoming data as a readout on a scale or points on a graph For example an incoming data value of 12 could be represented by the position of a needle on a gauge a slider on a bar graph or a point on a curve 12 MNI 12 a FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 2 24 Getting Started e Display types Equation Menu Option and Selectio
376. take a copy of the core file 4 Read the release description to determine if the error is known and to see if there is a work around Log Files After each run of the FWDU one or more log files are generated The log files are copied to the di rectory FWDU_HOME data They all end on log To make a copy of all the log files write the following in a command tool e cp FWDU_HOMEWdata log SAMMI has a log file named s2_error n log To view this file write view_log in your home directory after the copy The FWDU writes a log file named fwdu_fe log To view this write more fwdu_fe log in your home directory after the copy The fwdu_editor writes a log file named fwdu_te log To view this write more fwdu_te log in your home directory after the copy FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 APPENDIX L 422 Sample Symbol Text Tables FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Glossary 423 The following glossary may have varying utility for Format Editor users Terms appearing in boldface type in a definition are themselves defined in the glossary alarm client COF console composite CPL CRT DFD event A notification transmitted to the user when received data exceeds pre set limits For example a boiler may reach a dangerously high temperature or the price of a stock may reach its desired value In either case a message is sent to
377. te the General Action Button Grouping first and create or move General FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 251 Action Buttons into the General Action Button Grouping Similarly you can delete or move buttons out of the General Action Button Grouping When a General Action Button display type is moved out of a General Action Button Grouping it returns to its normal behavior and appearance Display type specifications Enter the following specifications as illustrated on the panel below Button Grouping Display Button Grouping Label Label Radio Grouping Yes Always One Yes Adjust Margin No Poe Horizontal Orientation No None Packing Column Tight Shadow In z Shadow Out Shadow Etched In Border Style Shadow Etched Out Border Width 3 Border Color lightsteelblue Enter Reset General Action Button Grouping Display Entries Entry Option Description Label You may specify an optional label for the General Action Button Grouping The optional Text Label may be up to 32 characters in length including new line characters The display developer may lay out the label in as many lines as desired New lines are specified by entering n anywhere in the text label n means a new line and does not print Double backslash n n is printed as n Spacing and margins for the labels are
378. te the Pathname to a FWDU_SYNOPTIC_DISPLAY You can use Path name Support as a help 3 Click on OK 4 Move the cursor into the Drawing Area fb bkgd where it turns into an outline box the size of the format being imported 5 Move the outline box to the desired location and click the mouse SELECT button The imported components appear grouped in the Drawing Area f b bkgd at the location of the outline box NOTE Imported dynamic fields may not work as expected See Chapter 7 Display Types for an explanation of each dynamic field s behavior Aligning objects to a grid Drawing objects is easier if you use the Grid function The Format Editor allows you to set up a visible grid pattern and then snap objects to the grid for easier alignment With the Snap function turned on see below any lines you draw are confined to grid points and the sides of any shapes you draw line up with the same points Therefore with both the Grid and Snap functions on every object you draw is automatically aligned to other objects on the same grid FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Drawing Methods CHAPTER 5 107 Setting the Snap and Grid function spacing You can display a grid of varying size by pixels or you can turn the Grid function off When you have the Grid function off and the Snap function on your objects still align to the invisible grid NOTE To line up objects exactly or cre
379. ted or masked See Appendix G Shifting and Masking for more information Enter the number of bits by which the incoming data value is to be right shifted if any See Appendix G Shifting and Masking for more information Select the type of incoming data value being received by the dynamic field by clicking the mouse SELECT button on one of the buttons to the right of this field from one of the following options Short Long Float Double For a border width greater than zero either enter a border color or select the border color by clicking the mouse OPTION button in the box to the right of this label FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 341 Symbol From Status Display Entries continued Entry Option Description Border Thickness Enter the integer number of pixels for a border thickness Border Style For a border width greater than zero select a border style by clicking the mouse SELECT button on one of the following buttons Shadow In Shadow Out Shadow Etched In Shadow Etched Out Label String optional Enter a string for the text label this may be up to 32 characters in length including new line characters You may format the label in as many lines as desired New lines are specified by entering n anywhere in the text label n when found is interpreted as a new line and does not print A double backslash n n is printed as n Spacing and margins
380. tem having the minimum value determines this value Data is Engineering Range Low Value Read only Data is automatically taken from measurement End Item when associating measurement end item The end item having the maximum value determines this value Data is Engineering Range High Value Enter the conversion code for incoming data see Appendix F Read only Data is automatically taken from measurement End Item when associating measurement End Item Indicate whether high low value markers will display by clicking the mouse SELECT button in the box to the right of this field to toggle between Yes and No For two dimensional barcharts only select the type of grid by clicking the mouse OPTION button in the box beside this label Then click the mouse SELECT button on one of the options from the following list No grid Suppresses the grid Line grid Displays vertical lines on a horizontal and horizontal lines on a vertical barchart Dot grid Displays the grid as points FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 7 214 Display Types Barchart Display Entries continued Entry Option Description Grid Size Click the mouse SELECT button on the button to the right of this field to select Major X Y Grid lines for major tick marks only Minor X Y Grid lines for all major and minor tick marks Grid Color Either enter a color to be used for grid lines if any or click th
381. ter five the application accesses five values Often the type of DFD can dictate how many values are required Many dynamic fields other than those used to display datasets can accept multiple values even though your format only displays one value at a time These values can include high and low limits thresholds and quality words also known as runtime annotations For example if the application is setting the high and low limits when it sends the current value the Number of Value entry is 3 the Current Value the Scale Minimum and the Scale Maximum For more detailed information on each display type refer to the desired API specifications section in Chapter 7 of this guide NOTE If multiple values are accessed in a database and any of the values do not match the display type real text integer etc the results can be unpredictable To use this capability you must enter a number for Number of Values that corresponds to the DFD values Check with your system administrator or API developer for details In order for all data set values to be simultaneously displayed in the dynamic field the DFD height in characters that you entered on the DFD Display panel should equal the number entered here If the application returns more values than can be displayed in a dataset the values are not displayed FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 8 360 Data Access Types Data Acc
382. th Soe Ww diaresis i OxFD y with acute VY y accent j OxFE Lower case h or t or thorn p l sp OxFF y with BE y diaresis y Lena A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 APPENDIX L MDB SAMMI Types N 41 9 This appendix shows the predefined MDB data types and the corresponding SAMMI data types MDB End Item Type SAMMI Data Type EGSE_INTEGER_MEASUREMENT long EGSE_INTEGER_SW_VARIABLE long UNSIGNED_INTEGER_MEASUREMENT long UNSIGNED_INTEGER_SW_VARIABLE long EGSE_FLOAT_MEASUREMENT float EGSE_FLOAT_SW_VARIABLE float DOUBLE_FLOAT_MEASUREMENT double DOUBLE_FLOAT_SW_VARIABLE double EGSE_DISCRETE_MEASUREMENT text long 1 EGSE_DISCRETE_SW_VARIABLE text BOOLEAN_MEASUREMENT text long 1 BOOLEAN_SW_VARIABLE text 0 text If linked to TEXT display type long If linked to DYNAMIC OBJECT OBJECT ICON and similar display types via their raw values only possible for MEASUREMENTs since SW VARIABLEs do not have raw values Rovsing A S Format Editor Guide APPENDIX L 420 Sample Symbol Text Tables Rovsing A S Format Editor Guide aprennxt Internal Errors Log Files L 421 If you ncounter an Internal Error in the FWDU software you should Write the error message and all the Debug information the error provides if any Note how the error occureed What did you do and can you reproduce the error 3 Take a copy of the log files see below and if the software completely crashed
383. the attached FWDU_HELP_TEXT type End Item For formats with data entry fields determines whether or not the Sammi user will be able to use the RETURN key for entering data If the RETURN key is disabled some other method must be provided for user entry Valid options are 1 RETURN key enabled for data entry 2 RETURN key disabled for data entry Enter the security level code for this format as explained later in this chapter The name of the Logical Server for the display This should bee FWDU_SERVER Display only fields These show the respective dates for the creation and current change date FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 4 88 Format amp Layer Description Entry Option Meaning WM Class Set the window manager class prop erty for the format This class can be used in user s Xdefaults file to set resources For example if the class is SAMMI2 and if the user sets this line in the Xdefaults file Mwm SAMMI2 clientDec oration none Then formats that are set to class SAMMT2 will have no decorations Listed below are the classes you can define in the Format Editor Class Name vb_class SAMMI 0 DEFAULT CLASS SAMMI1 1 AUTORAISE SAMMI2 2 SAMMI3 3 SAMMI4 4 SAMMIS5 s SAMMI6 6 SAMMI 7 SAMMI8 8 SAMMI9 9 SAMMI10 10 NOTE The autoraise feature means that the format always remains on top of other formats For more information on th
384. the bottom that the item list displays Enter a value in pixels for the left and right margins This number represents the number of pixels in from the right and from the left that the item list displays Either enter a scroll color or select one by clicking the mouse OPTION button in this box to display a list of choices For a border width greater than zero select a border style by clicking the mouse SELECT button on one of the following buttons in this box Shadow In Shadow Out Shadow Etched In Shadow Etched Out Select List Display Entries continued Entry Option Description FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 333 Border Color Border Width Add buttons For a border width greater than zero either enter a border color or select one by clicking the mouse OPTION button in this box to display a list of choices Enter an integer for the number of pixels used for the border width a zero means no border Select whether or not to add the OK and Cancel buttons if this is a pop up Select list the Cancel button is already defined by clicking the mouse SELECT button in this box to toggle between Yes and No FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 7 334 Display Types Static Select List Item Command Entries If you selected Static List from the List Category on the Select List display panel when you click t
385. the data value in binary format since all machine numbers are binary Thus all zeros 0 in the mask will zero out the corresponding data bits and all ones 1 in the mask will leave the corresponding data bits unchanged For example 00000000000000000000000000011011 Mask Hex 1B 000000001000000000100010001011101 Data 00000000000000000000000000011001 Result In the example above a hexadecimal mask value of 1B is equivalent to 11011 binary This binary mask when given leading zeros and laid over the 32 bit data value zeros out all corresponding bits in the data value except where a appears in the mask shading indicates where zeroing occurs The result of the masking process in the illustration above is a net data value of 11001 binary or 25 decimal NOTE Remember that if a Shift Right value was specified masking is applied after shifting A mask value of 0 shuts off both the shifting and masking functions simultaneously To shift without masking you must use a mask value of FFFFFFFF FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 appernixn Alarm Formats and Colors H 393 Not used in the FWDU FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 APPENDIX H 394 Alarm Formats and Colors FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 appennx1 Equation Language 1 395 The equation string of an equation DFD is specified using the Eqn lang
386. the highest and lowest values the data has displayed since the last initialization process For a Plot or Trend display type the range of values is plotted as a continuous graph FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 19991 CHAPTER 7 184 Display Types The diagram below shows how these display types function Sammi Window Dynamic Field Dynamic Field Meter Trend a 1 00 1 30 2 00 2 30 Data Server Database read onl recordi 12 33 5 high record2 26 44 2 low record3 103 123 5 high Display Type Functions With other display types like Equation General Action Button Menu Option and Selection Lists Scrollbar Slider and Text Browser the Sammi user can send commands or data strings or view and edit files FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 Display Types CHAPTER 7 185 The following diagram shows two different display types Equation and General Action Button inside a Sammi window Notice that neither of these display types receives data directly from a data server Equation pulls data values from two other dynamic fields calculates a value using a pre defined algorithm then displays the result A General Action Button sends commands to the Sammi processor or to the network whenever the user clicks on that button with
387. the middle of an existing list of variables e Click the mouse SELECT button on the variable name just above where you want to add a new variable then click the mouse SELECT button on the Add Variable FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 7 218 Display Types button Type in the information for the new variable and either press the ENTER key or click the mouse SELECT button on the Enter button e Click the mouse SELECT button on the Add Variable button Type in the informa tion for the new variable changing the Bar Position field to the location of the new variable and either press the ENTER key or click the mouse SELECT button on the Enter button In either case the Bar Position field for all variables that follow the one that you add are automatically updated and the variable list is sorted in Bar Position order When the Barchart is displayed the bar position for vertically oriented charts is numbered from left to right for horizontally oriented charts from bottom to top To change a variable click the mouse SELECT button on the name in the Variables List Make your changes in the appropriate fields and either press the ENTER key or click the mouse SELECT button on the Enter button To delete a variable click the mouse SELECT button on the name in the Variables List Then click the mouse SELECT button on the Delete Variable button If you do not select a variable name and click the
388. the object s being changed 2 Select the Recolor option from the Style menu on the Format Editor Control panel The Recolor Style panel appears Each button represents an attribute that you can reset Recolor Style Color Line Style Fill Style Font All Attributes OK Cancel 3 Click the mouse SELECT button on each button to change the associated attribute or use the All Attributes button to select all 4 Click the mouse SELECT button on the OK button at the bottom of the panel 5 Select the Recolor button under the Drawing Tools on the Format Editor Control panel 6 Move the cursor to the Drawing Area and click on the object that you want to change Repeat this step for any other object you want to change When you want to remove the Recolor dialog panel from the screen select the Cancel button at the bottom of the panel The dialog panel disappears and the last attributes changed stay in effect as defaults FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Drawing Methods CHAPTER 5 145 Undoing mistakes The Undo function reverses the last operation completed To use Undo 1 Open the Edit menu on the Format Editor Control panel and select Undo 2 To reverse an Undo simply select the Undo option from the Edit menu again NOTE You can also click the mouse OPTION button anywhere inside the Drawing Area select Undo from the popup menu that displays This p
389. then simply quit without saving Pathnames When a pathname is typed in the path is checked at save time Syntax Depending on the End Item type parts of the syntax will be checked at same time But because the End Item can be saved it does not guarantee that the syntax is correct Always test the End Item in it s correct environment after it has been created or modified Supported End Items Use the FWDU Text Editor for modifying the following End Items e FWDU_HELP_TEXT Simple text e FWDU_SYMBOL_TABLE_TEXT See APPENDIX L e FWDU_DYNAMIC_OBJECT_TABLE_TEXT See APPENDIX K e FWDU_LIST_TEXT See APPENDIX C e FWDU_CONVERSION_TEXT See APPENDIX F e FWDU_DATA_DEF_RECORD_TEXT See Tabular DDO e FWDU_EQUIPMENT_CONSTRAINTS_TEXT See the following text FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 Welcome to the Format Editor 9 367 Equipment Constraints In this section the equipment constraints End Item is described The equipment constraints End Item is of type FWDU_EQUIPMENT_CONSTRAINTS_TEXT There has to be one and only one of these End Items in each CDU The End Item has to include three lines as defined below X_SIZE lt a number gt Maximum horizontal size of display The size is used to check that displays do not exceed the limits Y_SIZE lt a number gt Maximum vertical size of display FWDU_PREDEFINED_ITEMS lt pathname gt Pathname to the pre defined items library This pathna
390. this case 5 seconds 5 Click the mouse SELECT button in the boxes to the right of Enterable and Confirm FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Learning the Format Editor 3 65 Entry to toggle both to Yes This allows users to enter data and verify the entry 6 Inthe box to the right of Font click the mouse OPTION button and select courier bold 18pt then click the mouse SELECT button to set the font for the Real DFD WARNING Do NOT click on the Save DFD or Cancel DFD button yet The Real Display Panel Now move the cursor to the Real Display panel f peA fb real FE Real Display Real Display Decimal Digits EE Conversion Factor WE Maximum Value Minimum Value a Decimal Display Format Exponential v Smallest Data Type Float Enter Reset Observe the lightblue color of the Maximum and Minimum value fields In the FWDU this means that the values are read only The values are taken from the attached End Item Also the Data Type is taken from the attached End Item because the FWDU can read information about End Items from the MDB several values can be filled automatically This also means that the values can not be changed using the FWDU You will have to use the I_MDB to change these values For more details on the Real Display see Real on page 351 WARNING Do NOT click on the Save DFD or Cancel DFD button yet FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2
391. thousands of a sec See P7 parameter STATE CODE TYPE parameters are preceded by a example P9 gt GREEN INTEGER TYPE parameters are scalars See P1 parameter PATHNAME TYPE parameters are MDB pathnames See P8 parameter REAL TYPE parameters are floats See P5 parameter Parameters not having a default value is set to see P3 parameter Last parameter shall always be a MDB pathname to an End Item of type CCSDS_END_NODE The template is filled with CCSDS_END_NODE_ for this parameter notifying you to change it You can copy paste the template string from this window to the Edit_Cmd_popup window using Motif style copy and paste To do this follow the instructions below 1 Highlight template Hint Triple Click on the line FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 7 198 Display Types 2 Press on the Copy key on the left side of your keyboard 3 Close the Onbaord_Commanding_popup by pressing OK 4 Click in the Command field to the right of Command and press on the Paste key also found on the left side of your keyboard Now you have to modify CCSDS_END_NODE_ to a full pathname of a CCSDS_END_NODE and replace any parameters with real parameters In the P1 parameter example we see the template is filled with P1 gt 5 which is a constant Assuming you want an integer variable as input you just put in the name of an existing integer DDO on yo
392. tically switches from fixed size fonts to scalable fonts when a screen is resized by more than 10 Either enter a color for the graph title color or click the mouse OPTION button in the box beside this label to display an option list Then click the mouse SELECT button on the desired color name Either enter a color for the background of the graph inside the axes or click the mouse OPTION button in the box beside this label to display an option list Then click the mouse SELECT button on the desired color name Select the type of grid by clicking the mouse SELECT button in the box beside this label to select one of the options from the following list of valid entries No grid Dotted horizontal grid lines Solid horizontal grid lines Solid vertical grid lines Solid vertical and horizontal grid lines Either enter a color to be used for grid lines if any or click the mouse OPTION button in this box to display an option list Then click the mouse SELECT button on the desired color name Click the mouse SELECT button in this group to select either Major or Minor tick marks for the X axis Click the mouse SELECT button in this group to select either Major or Minor tick marks for the Y axis FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV User Manual 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 267 Plot Display Entries continued Entry Option Description Display Mode Click the mouse SELECT button to the right of this label to toggle betw
393. tically taken from measurement End Item when associating measurement End Item Data is Engineering Range Low Value Scale Maximum Read only Data is automatically taken from measurement End Item when associating measurement End Item Data is Engineering Range High Value If a measurement End Item is attached you can choose from the measurement End Items nominal limit set range 1 5 by pressing Limits button The following window appears Limits_popup Ea Ea Font If you are showing the value either enter a font for the value or select a font by clicking the mouse OPTION button in this box to display a list of options Visible Range Enter the range of values that are visible on the moving scale at any one time Increment Enter a value for the increment between scale values FWDU UM 114 002 ROV User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 301 Moving Scale Linear Meter Entries continued Entry Option Show Scale Values Scale Font Scale Decimal Digits Show Ticks Tick Color Label String optional Label Color Label Font Value Show Threshold Description Select whether to display the scale values by clicking the mouse SELECT button in this box to toggle between Yes and No If you show the scale values either enter a font for the numbers on the scale or select a font by clicking the mouse OPTION button in this box to display a list of options If you show the s
394. ting Mode 161 180 Production mode 155 Prototyping review cycles 29 Pulldown Menus 17 Push Buttons 17 push buttons 28 30 Q quit 36 Quitting 50 R Read Composite 148 Read DFD Lib 155 157 Read DFD Lib 153 Read Key 358 read dfd lib 179 read format 37 Real 23 25 53 186 234 321 Real Display panel 64 Reals 17 Recolor 142 Recolor Style panel 38 144 Recolor Tool 62 Rectangles 104 127 Redisplay 156 Redraw 105 145 Refresh Rate 64 168 173 refresh rate specifying 174 Refresh Type 168 360 refresh type specifying 174 Region 17 323 Remove All 40 137 Reset Initial 40 Reset Maximum 40 Resize 152 Resize Tool 133 176 Retrieving composites 148 Rotate 104 RT Annotations 169 rtda dat 190 Runtime annotations 186 188 244 291 336 runtime annotations 242 283 Runtime Environment 11 Runtime keys 186 190 360 runtime keys substituting variables for 362 s General Action Butt 355 Sammi Runtime Environment 13 15 Sammi Development Kit 356 Save Composite 148 Save DFD Lib 179 Save DFD Lib 153 save dfd lib 179 save format 36 Scale 104 Scale Factor 89 scale format 146 scanned images 147 Scrollbar 26 184 202 325 Scrollbars 17 24 Security 92 Security Level 87 92 169 178 security level selecting 178 Select List 328 Selected Layer 101 Selection List 184 Selection Lists 17 24 Session Manager 362 sessions 362 set runtime key 191 Shift Right 232 275 305 354 Short 199 Slider 26 1
395. tion or a dynamic field in the same format or other formats located on either a local remote workstation FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV User Manual 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 277 When completing the DFD Display panel for this display type refer to Chapter 6 for details the DFD Name must be set as MAINMENU to produce a pop up menu or MAINPANEL to produce a menu panel Since these two names are reserved you can create only one of each type on a single format It does not matter how you size or position the dynamic field on a format The final size and positioning of the menu is controlled by the Runtime Environment A pop up menu does not take up any space in the final Sammi window since it is invisible until the Sammi user clicks the mouse OPTION button When it does appear it overlays other window components temporarily and is sized as large as it needs to be to show all options A menu panel always appears at the top of the Sammi window and takes up an amount of space that is in addition to the specified height of the format Since a menu panel is limited to the width of a format creating a menu panel with numerous options may cause the menu options to take up more than one line To fit all options onto one line try making the format wider reducing the number of options or using shorter item names in the menu Menus used as options Another use of the Menu display type is as a pop up option list for other disp
396. tion Description Suppress header Select whether or not to display the column headings by clicking the mouse SELECT button in this box to toggle between Yes and No Add separator Select whether or not to display a solid line between the headings and data by clicking the mouse SELECT button in this box to toggle between Yes and No Shadow width For a three dimensional effect enter the width in pixels for a shadow border Scrollbar color Either enter a scrollbar color or click the mouse OPTION button in this box to display a list of choices Scrollbar trough color Either enter a scroll bar trough color or click the mouse OPTION button in this box to display a list of choices Column header format Enter column headings using the following style lt col heading gt lt width gt lt conversion code gt where lt col heading gt Enter the string that displays at the top of the column lt width gt Enter the width in characters of the column lt conversion code gt Enter the print conversion code for the column The conversion codes used to display the tabular information are the same conversion codes used for the C printf command Please refer to any C programming language manual for more information FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 345 Text Sample Format sample_litrl With the Text display type you can display and accept alphanumeric data a
397. to be only two characters wide When the user makes a selection the entire text of the selection is inserted into the Integer field However since only the first two characters fit only the first two characters are used FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 309 This is a handy method for creating standard option lists that include both entry options and definitions The same effect can be created for a command type option list by having the application created to edit all but the characters it needs from the user s selection Both the Option List and its target field are dynamic fields that must be created using the DFD Display panel discussed in Chapter 6 In the illustration on the previous page you link the Option List field to the Integer field by entering the DFD Name of the Option List in the Option entry on the Integer field s DFD Display panel Toggling the Cmnd entry to Yes indicates the Option List is a command type Toggling the Cmnd entry to No indicates the Option List is a standard type The dynamic field area for an Option List is not actually where the Option List appears The final size and positioning of the option list is controlled by Sammi thus you can create the dynamic field in any size or position desired The Option List takes up no room in the final Sammi window it remains invisible until the Sammi user clicks on the OPTION button When it d
398. to the Format Editor The map example shows how multiple transparent buttons can be used to cover an irregular area all are programmed to perform the same function The area of a format where you want to FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 241 sense a user mouse click must be covered completely by dynamic fields of this type Since both the visible and transparent push buttons work the same way you can use whichever one best suits your purposes Functions NOTE DO NOT use toggle buttons to cause pop up menus to display instead use the push buttons for this function Internally the General Action Button display type is similar to the Menu display type However instead of handling a series of functions like menus each General Action Button GAB dynamic field is dedicated to a specific function The specific function performed by each button may vary and may include the following e Issuing commands You can use buttons to trigger any Sammi command such as add window or silence alarm see the Command Reference for a complete list of commands You can also use buttons to communicate with applications from in side the Sammi program e Inserting data Any button can be designed to insert a string of text into any enterable field in the current format or any other format FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 7 242 Display Types
399. ton at the bottom of the Real Display panel performs the same function as the RETURN key For APP_OP_ENT you can include a Cancel or Reset function tied to a push button menu option or function key that allows the user to clear entries before they are accepted FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Format amp Layer Description CHAPTER 4 99 e APP_CNF_OP_ENT This method disables the RETURN key so the Sammi user cannot use it for entering data If you use this method you must provide the user with a push button menu option or function key that performs the Confirm function For example if the user types in data and clicks on the Confirm button the entries are accepted by Sammi Having a Confirm button forces the user to con sciously confirm data entries instead of automatically pressing the RETURN key For APP_CNF_OP_ENT you can set up one of four commands to be initiated from the format with a function key a push button or a menu These commands are Writes all fields in the format that have confirm been updated by the user confirm amp delete Writes all fields in the format that have been updated by the user and deletes the format from the screen cancel Clears all fields and redisplays data in the fields prior to the user entries cancel amp delete Clears all fields and redisplays data in the fields prior to the user entries and deletes the format from the screen NO
400. ton on the Spline to Line Tool button of the Format Editor Control panel 2 Move the cursor to the Drawing Area and click with the mouse SELECT button on the lines or splines you want to convert Each time you click on a polyline it is converted to a spline and each time you click on a spline it is converted to a polyline Adding deleting arrowheads Ole Sift Arrow Tool With the Arrow Tool you can add or delete arrowheads at the tip of any open line including those on the ends of splines and hollow arcs NOTE The Arrow Tool works best on thin or medium lines Due to the small size of the arrowhead generated using the arrowhead drawing algorithm arrowheads are distorted on thick lines However you can draw adequate arrowheads on thick lines using the Polyline Tool To use this tool 1 Click the mouse SELECT button on the Arrow Tool button of the Format Editor Control panel 2 Move the cursor to the Drawing Area and click on the end of the line where you want an arrowhead added or deleted Clicking the mouse SELECT button adds an arrowhead Clicking the mouse OPTION button deletes an existing arrowhead FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 5 142 Drawing Methods NOTE If you had set the default arrowhead function with the Line Style option from the Style menu for arrowheads and you find that you do not need some arrow heads delete t
401. ton without making a selection the bottom item of the Variable List is deleted FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 7 316 Display Types When you have added all the variables that you want close the panel by clicking the mouse SELECT button on the Dismiss button Entry Option Digital fg Color Digital bg Color Fill Style Fill Pattern Variable Name Variable Position Foreground Color Background Color Initial Value Data Access End Item Pie Chart Variables Display Entries Description Either enter a color for the foreground of the digital value or click the mouse OPTION button in this box to display a list of choices Either enter a color for the background of the digital value or click the mouse OPTION button in this box to display a list of choices Select a fill style for the piece of pie and legend patch representing this variable by clicking the mouse SELECT button on either the Solid on the left or the Stipple button on the right If you selected the Stipple style select a fill pattern for the variable by clicking the mouse SELECT button on the button next to the desired fill pattern Enter a label for the variable Enter an integer for the relative location of the variable Either enter a color for the foreground or click the mouse OPTION button in this box to display a list of choices If you selected the Stipple style either enter a color f
402. ts may only be used in the font field in the DFD Display panel FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 Dynamic Field Description CHAPTER 6 171 Defining the display type and data access type Every dynamic field has a display type associated with it that controls how the field will look and act in the Runtime Environment For example the Meter Display type causes a dynamic field to look like a meter with a dial that reflects incoming data values Any dynamic field that receives data from other sources must also have a data access type that indicates the source of the data The three primary data access types are e Universal Dynamic field is linked to remote sources via an application e Local Dynamic field receives data from other dynamic fields on the same format files etc e Time Dynamic field receives time value from system clock used for Custom Time display type only For specific details please refer to Chapter 8 Both display and data access types are entered on the DFD Display panel as described earlier Valid combinations of display types and data access types are shown in the following table Not all display types and data access types are compatible and that some display types such as Option List do not access data since they are designed to receive input from other sources FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 6 172 Dynamic F
403. tton when you are finished If you press the RETURN key the Format Description panel remains on the screen Visual effects such as color or background image will not appear in fb bkgd until you click on the OK button FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 Format amp Layer Description CHAPTER 4 87 More specific information on some of the entries is provided in the following sections of this chapter All entries except X Location Y Location Width initial and maximum and Height initial and maximum are optional For valid entries see the following table To return the entries to their previous values press the Reset button NOTE After OK is pressed the previous values are lost Entry Option Meaning Name Description Help File App Name Security Level Logical Server Creation Date Change Date Display only field This is the file system format name The name has the following layout S_ lt SID gt _ lt End Item Name gt Enter the title of the format that will appear in the title bar of the final Sammi window along with the for mat name For example if the for mat name is S_123 formatl and the description is Pressure Control Screen the following will appear in the title bar of the Sammi window when it is displayed in the Runtime Environment S_123_formatl Pres sure Control Screen This field is read only Use the End Item button to change
404. uage Eqn is an expression language much like C Although there are several control flow statements most statements such as assignments are expressions whose value is disregarded For example the assignment operator assigns the value of its right operand to its left operand and yields the value so multiple assignments work The expression grammar is expr field value number variable expr unop expr expr bwop expr built in function arguments user defined function A field value is the value of another numeric DFD within the window It is referenced by lt dfd name gt Its value is expanded in place Numbers are floating point The input format is that recognized by the standard C function scanf i e digits decimal point digits e signed exponent At least one digit or a decimal point must be present the other components are optional Variable names are formed from a letter followed by a string of letters and numbers binop refers to binary operators such as addition or logical comparison unop refers to the two negation operators logical negation not and arithmetic negation sign change Operators are shown on the next page FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 APPENDIX I 396 Equation Language Operators in decreasing order of precedence G exponentiation FORTRAN right associative unary logical and arithmetic negation wy multiplication divi
405. uch as clicking and dragging If you are not using such a window manager please consult your window system operating manual or System Administrator for correct instructions on moving resizing and overlapping windows NOTE If you must stop in the middle of a lesson save your work by selecting Save from the File menu on the Format Editor Control panel FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 3 52 Learning the Format Editor About the sample format All the lessons in this chapter involve the steps for constructing the sample format shown below testformat Temperature Control PE 74 Temp deg F Current Temperature Enter New Temperature The Sample Format External look and operation The sample format is designed to look like a control panel with a data field and a simulated meter To heighten the illusion of a control panel we have included a solid border around the panel and screws to hold the panel in place The Sammi user can use the control panel to e Enter a new temperature e See Sammi display the new temperature on the meter Naturally the format does not perform these functions while you are creating it in the Format Editor You must run the Runtime Environment to test the format Therefore the training modules in this chapter teach you not only how to create background objects and data driven dynamic fields using th
406. ucible on a monitor screen The dot patterns bitmaps and pixmaps are then stored in a file that can be copied to your network and loaded into the Format Editor Accepted image formats The Format Editor accepts three types of graphics files for use as background images e gif or FWDU_GIF_BINARY End Item in the MDB This is a standard Graph ic Interchange Format used for color images including color photographs also called a pixmap e xbm or FWDU_X_BINARY End Item in the MDB This is the X11 Bitmap format used for monochrome images also called a bitmap or X bitmap e xwd or FWDU_XWD_BINARY End Item in the MDB This is the output from the xwd utility also called an X window dump file If your commercial scanner does not produce any of these formats various commercial utility programs are available that can convert other types of graphics files such as tif or pcx tothe xbm or gif format Scaling an image As it imports a background image the Format Editor does not rescale the image to fit the fb bkgd_ format but uses it in the same size as the original scan Some commercial scanners provide scaling and sizing as part of the scanning process so that you can reduce or enlarge an image to any size or resolution desired Keep in mind however that size may vary if the scanning resolution does not match the resolution of the work station monitor see Appendix E for a discussion of monitor resolution Re touching images
407. ue 15 darkslateb 36 cadetblue2 lue 16 lightblue 37 cadetblue3 17 lightsteelb 38 cadetblue4 lue 18 mediumb 39 purple lue 19 medi 40 gray59 umslateb lue 20 midnightb 41 gray91 lue 42 navyblue 65 aliceblue 43 skyblue 66 bisque 44 slateblue 67 bisque2 45 steelblue 68 bisque3 46 coral 69 bisque4 47 firebrick 70 chartreuse 1 FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 B 370 Standard Colors 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 medium goldenrod darkgreen darkolive green forestgreen limegreen medium forestgreen medium seagreen medium spring green palegreen greenyel low seagreen spring green yellow green maroon orange orchid darkorchid mediumor chid pink plum indianred mediumvi oletred orangered violetred violet blueviolet 71 72 73 74 75 76 T11 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 chartreuse2 chartreuse3 chartreuse4 dodgerblue 1 dodgerblue 2 dodgerblue 3 dodgerblue 4 firebrick3 firebrick4 green2 honeydew1 honeydew2 honeydew3 honeydew4 hotpink lightsea green mistyrose peachpuff lightsteelbl uel lightsteelbl ue2 lightsteelbl ue3 lightsteelbl ue4 peru powderb lue FWDU ROVSI
408. ued Description Either enter a color for the axis tick marks or click the mouse OPTION button in the box beside this label to display an option list Then click the mouse SELECT button on the desired color name Either enter a font for the tick marks or click the mouse OPTION button in the box beside this label to display an option list Then click the mouse SELECT button on the desired font name Either enter a color for the axis label or click the mouse OPTION button in the box beside this label to display an option list Then click the mouse SELECT button on the desired color name Enter the text for the axis label Enter the text for the axis label Either enter a color for the axis label or click the mouse OPTION button in the box beside this label to display an option list Then click the mouse SELECT button on the desired color name Either enter a font for the axis label or click the mouse OPTION button in the box beside this label to display an option list Then click the mouse SELECT button on the desired font name Either enter a font for the thresholds labels or click the mouse OPTION button in the box beside this label to display an option list Then click the mouse SELECT button on the desired font name FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 7 216 Display Types Barchart Display Entries continued Entry Option Description Color Fill Mode Select how the
409. umns ieee Wee Ee L aa left right 210 6 565 4 231 1 7 up down 555 5 12 5 1 2 oe a ON 4 Scrollbar Display Types Each scrollbar has a slider not to be confused with the Slider display type This is a moving part of the scrollbar that allow the user to adjust the data display by dragging it or page through a data display by clicking the mouse SELECT button in the area above or below it To create a Scrollbar display type you can select the Scrollbar icon from the DFD palette or use the Add DFD option from the Dynamic Fields menu on the Format Editor Control panel and then draw a rectangular dynamic field area that is the same size and in the same position you want the scrollbar to appear For vertical scrollbars the dynamic field area should be longer vertically to avoid distortion for horizontal scrollbars it should be longer horizontally The scrollbar is linked to its target dynamic fields by DFD Names entered in the specifications for Scrollbar display type For this reason you can position the scrollbar anywhere on the format and still control the target dynamic field s that you specify FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 7 326 Display Types You can have as many scrollbars per format as needed with up to ten target dynamic fields per scrollbar However each target dynamic field can have no more than one vertical and or one horizontal Scrollbar
410. ur synoptic display Example you have a INT_001 integer DDO The template for parameter P1 could then look like P1 gt INT_001 When you have completed entering and modifying the command press on the OK button A limited syntax check is now made If errors have been found these will be reported and you have to correct the errors before you can continue A complete syntax check is made when the display is saved This is done by calling the so called CLS Editor If errors are found here these will be reported in the consistency checker window Please note that changes done to referenced DDOS eg name changes after the limited syntax check will be reported as an error by the FWDU because the FWDU only checks the syntax at creation time of the command and not when renaming any DDOS Display type reference If you do not yet know which display type to use review Chapter 2 Once you have selected the desired display type you can read more about it on the following pages NOTE A sample format is provided for each display type and illustrated in this chapter You can view these formats by selecting Open from the File menu of the Format Editor Control panel When you have finished examining them select Dismiss from the File menu to close the format without changing the samples When creating or modifying a display type you will enter its specifications in the appropriate display panel This panel along with the general display specificatio
411. urrent Fill Style panel Current Fill Style OK Fill Style Fill Rule Cancel L x K Fill Pattern BEES SEH M Mh 2 Click the mouse SELECT button on the No Fill button the two blank overlapping squares at the far left under Fill Style Drawn objects will not hide background objects with this option selected 3 Click the mouse SELECT button on the OK button to close the Current Fill Style panel Adding text To add text to the format 1 Click the mouse SELECT button on the Text Tool T button under Drawing Tools on the Format Editor Control panel 2 Move the cursor into the Drawing Area The cursor changes to a pencil shape 3 Click the mouse SELECT button in the Drawing Area just below the center 4 Enter the following Current Temperature and press the RETURN key 5 Move the cursor below these words in the Drawing Area FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Learning the Format Editor 3 61 6 Enter the following Enter New Temperature and press the RETURN key testformat Current Temperature Enter New Temperature NOTE If the words you type do not appear you may have set the foreground and background colors the same you may have set the Fill pattern in correctly you may have chosen the wrong tool or you are not clic
412. urrent Fill Style panel 3 Click the mouse SELECT button on the OK button to close the panel and to choose the fill style rule and or pattern selected FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 Learning the Format Editor 3 77 Setting the line style To set the current line style 1 Select Line Style from the Style menu on the Format Editor Control panel The Current Line Style panel appears Current Line Style Line Fill Style Dash Patterns aaa ENEEEE EERE mm ae mo Line Cap Style ee mi _ Line Thickness Line Joint Style a i i Leading Arrow ae Trailing Arrow OK Cancel 2 Select the top symbol under Line Fill Style in the upper left side of the panel and the fifth symbol under Line Thickness on the lower right side of the panel 3 Click the mouse SELECT button on the OK button to close the panel and to choose the Line Fill Style Cap Style etc FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 3 78 Learning the Format Editor Part 3 Drawing the facing plate This procedure explains how to create a facing plate for the format Before starting make sure you have successfully completed the previous parts of this lesson 1 Click on the Box Tool button top left under Drawing Tools on the Format Editor Control panel Drawing Tools VA a SB S45 2 Box Tool
413. utton on the DFD Display panel FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 7 226 Display Types 2 The Dynamic Object dynamic field is moved either by using the Move Tool on the Format Editor Control panel or by changing the value of the X and Y Locations on the DFD Display panel 3 The Dynamic Object dynamic field is resized either by using the Resize Tool on the Format Editor Control panel or by changing the values in the Width and Height fields on the DFD Display panel 4 The Dynamic Object dynamic field is transformed by rotating or flipping it using the Mirror Tools on the Format Editor Control panel 5 The format is written to a file using the File menu of the Format Editor Control panel Only objects in the same layer as the Dynamic Object dynamic field can be controlled by the Dynamic Object Grouping Dynamic Objects Dynamic Object dynamic fields can be contained in a group In this case the Dynamic Object dynamic field includes only objects that are also part of the same group as the Dynamic Object dynamic field This allows you to build a dynamic part or composite that can be used in different formats or different places on the same format and be controlled by the Dynamic Object dynamic field or to draw other objects in the area controlled by the Dynamic Object To do this group the objects controlled by the Dynamic Object dynamic field and the Dynamic Object using the Group Tool of th
414. utton in this box to display a list of choices Border Width Enter an integer for the number of pixels used for the border width a zero means no border Border Style For a border width greater than zero 0 select a border style by clicking on one of the following options Shadow In Shadow Out Shadow Etched In Shadow Etched Out For each threshold you want to use enter the following values Value Max and min are read only The six Data values are automatically taken from measurement End Item when associating measurement End Item The six values are Danger Limits High Value Nominal Limit High Value Nominal Limit High Value Nominal Limit High Value Nominal Limit Low Value Danger Limits Low Value Show Max and Min are read only always Yes Color Either enter a fill color for the threshold or select a threshold color by clicking the mouse OPTION button in this box to display a list of choices FWDU UM 114 002 ROV User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Display Types 7 289 Meter Gauge Entries Continued Entry Option Description Threshold Coloring Mode The range of numbers included with each threshold is indicated by a band of color on the numeric scale If the scale is defined as wide this color is also used as the fill color on the scale Select the Threshold Coloring Mode by clicking the mouse SELECT button on one of the following options Left mode The bands in this mode start at the thresholds and co
415. uttons The mouse buttons are used for various standard functions in the Format Editor To avoid potential confusion between two and three button mice this manual refers to mouse buttons by their functions as shown below SELEC OPTION MENU SELECT OPTION MENU Three Button uae Mouse Mouse Button Functions Button Name Button Function s SELECT Used to click on selections and drag window panels or graphic objects Used to move text cursor to new location Used to indicate control points when drawing background objects see Chapter 5 for details FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 2 34 Getting Started OPTION MENU Used to pop up menus and or option lists Which pop up menu or list appears depends on the location of the mouse cursor If the mouse cursor is outside of a DFD or over a DFD with no pop up option list the pop up menu defined as MAINMENU appears If the mouse cursor is over a DFD non Motif with an assigned pop up option list or selection list or menu that list appears except during drawing operations that use the OPTION button to complete These are drawings of polylines polygons open and closed splines flip operations and moving objects with the Front and Back operations Otherwise when no option list is specified for this DFD a pop up message appears stating No Menu Available Used to indicate last control point when draw
416. variables Either real numbers or integers are acceptable as incoming data for this display type A single Barchart DFD can display up to 256 bars but to preserve readability you should probably use no more than ten or twelve Horizontal Barchart Barchart with Lots of Variables 100 A X High High S __ High Variable 3 L Low High A High Low Variable 2 P low L Low Low Variable 1 il il TERETA ETAT ER a Axis Label 2 D Default fill mode bottom reference with minor grid Barchart with lots of variables Preset Size amp Spacing Barchart Title Low Low High Low High Barcharts 100 100 40 60 80 90 5 Low Low High High High j AA A AR X Qualities Values i eth 0 cv 100 S T 40 r 2 cv 3 ool Variable 1 4 80H A i i 3 8 CVv 5 R B SLL Variable 2 16 Max T0 i 7 Min 0 High High TH 1 Variable 3 dent TH 3 10CAl TIME Three Five TH 5 12 Te Four TH6 13 oo Preset bar size and spacing API Change Max Min Threshoki data qualities For the Barchart display type you can e Create a title optional Define the size of the DFD Choose the colors and the fonts for titles and labels e Choose to show a grid of either dotted or solid lines optional This grid cannot be displayed
417. ve the outline box to the upper right corner of the facing plate and click the mouse SELECT button again A second copy of the screw appears where you click 7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 to make more copies of the screw for the lower left and lower right corners of the facing plate FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Learning the Format Editor 3 83 8 If the border needs to be adjusted click the mouse SELECT button on the Resize Tool second row under Drawing Tools on Format Editor Control panel Resize Resize Tool 9 To adjust the border select the border by clicking on it Then click on a corner of the box and move the mouse cursor to a suitable location and click again 10 To realign any of the objects Click the mouse SELECT button on the Move Tool first row under Drawing Tools on the Format Editor Control panel T i E Snap 8 cid Recolor Move Tool Inthe Drawing Area click the mouse SELECT button on the objects Move the outline box to the new location and click the mouse SELECT button again Use step 10 to set the screws into the corners of the border and to move the text lines and DFDs into their appropriate positions as shown in the sample format FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 3 84 Learning the Format Editor 11 To make sur
418. ver the range of numbers to the next highest threshold The fill color on the scale is from left to right Center mode In this mode there are three different coloring schemes of the bands depending on the thresholds The bands for the high low high medium and high high thresholds start at the thresholds and cover the range of numbers to the next highest threshold The fill color on the scale is from left to right The bands for the low high low medium and low low thresholds start at the thresholds and cover the range of numbers to the next lowest threshold The fill color on the scale is from right to left The band of color that covers the range of numbers between the low high and the high low thresholds is the DFD Foreground Color Right mode The bands in this mode start at the threshold and cover the range of numbers to the next lowest threshold The fill color on the scale is from right to left FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 7 290 Display Types Meter Fixed Scale Linear Sample Format sample_fsl This view only display type is either a vertically or horizontally oriented rectangle with tick marks value labels graphic indicator a filled triangle pointing to the value labels and a bar colored rectangular area that extends from the bottom of the vertically oriented meter or from the left on the horizontally oriented meter to the indicator Optional features for the f
419. w Etched Out _ Border Color lightsteelblue a VE Scroll Bars Yes Scroll Bar Color lightsteelblue lt b _ Automatic Scrolling Yes File Write Undo Cancel Buttons Label Font Buttons Label Color Buttons Button Color Write Button Yes File Select Button es Yes Enter Reset Dynamic Browser io Characters Dynamic Browser Data Processing Method Standard Text Browser Data Input Output Field Display Entries Entry Option Description File Name If you select Standard type see the description for Type below enter a file name Pop up Select whether or not this is a pop up text browser by clicking the mouse SELECT button in this box to toggle between Yes or No Type Click the mouse SELECT button on one of the following Static Enter the text that is to be displayed using the Static Browser Data Display panel that appears if you select this type and then complete this panel Standard The data is read from a disk file Dynamic An application sends the data for browsing User Manual 15 August 1999 FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 ROVSING A S 7 348 Display Types Text Browser Data Input Output Field Display Entries continued Entry Option Line Display Timeout secs Label optional Label Font Label Color Border Width Description Select whether to display single or multiple lines by clicking the mouse SELECT button in this box to toggle between Single and Multiple
420. w a new object However you can easily change object attributes later as explained in Recoloring oObjects later in this chapter Arcs Wedges Drawing Tools AV ws S A Arc Tool With the Arc Tool you draw an arc by clicking three points in the Drawing Area If a solid or stippled fill style has been selected as a default attribute see Selecting fill styles earlier in this chapter the arc is filled like a pie wedge Arcs may have any of the line attributes discussed earlier FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 Drawing Methods CHAPTER 5 121 To create an arc 1 Click on the Arc Tool button 2 Move to the Drawing Area and begin defining the arc path by clicking the SELECT mouse button on the first second and third points in the Drawing Area Drawing an Arc The arc is drawn automatically using the default colors and line or fill styles shown in the bottom half of the Drawing Tools panel To change an arc s color line style or fill style see Recoloring objects later in this chapter FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 5 122 Drawing Methods Circles Ellipses Circle Tools T Ellipse Tools With the Circle and Ellipse Tools you draw circles or ellipses by clicking two points in the Drawing Area Sfb bkgd This can be done in either of two ways e
421. which is displayed on top of the first etc The front and back commands allow you to modify this sequence You may specify the order in which graphical objects or sets of grouped objects are drawn on the format This is especially important when drawing objects that are filled because they can hide objects drawn earlier NOTE Dynamic fields DFDs are always displayed on top of static objects because they are updated continuously by time critical data To bring object s to the front top of a drawing sequence 1 Select the Front option from the View menu on the Format Editor Control panel 2 Inthe Drawing Area click with the mouse SELECT button on the outline of the object that you want brought to the front Repeat this step for other objects as de sired 3 While using this option you can click with the mouse OPTION button on objects to send them to the back To send object s to the back bottom of a drawing sequence 1 Select the Back option from the View menu on the Format Editor Control panel 2 Inthe Drawing Area click with the mouse SELECT button on the outline of the object that you want sent to the back Repeat this step for any more objects 3 While using this option you can click with the mouse OPTION button objects to bring them to the front FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Drawing Methods CHAPTER 5 131 Grouping objects Group Tool
422. wing or changing existing formats The previous discussion covered creating a new format The following steps can be used each time you want to view or modify an existing format This procedure works whether you have just started the Format Editor or have already used it to create or modify other formats Remember that this is a general procedure with references to specific details in later chapters 1 Select the Open option from the File menu on the Format Editor Control panel An Open_popup window appears similar to the SaveAs_popup 2 Write the Pathname to an End Item of type FWDU_SYNOPTIC_DISPLAY or use Pathname Support for a scrollable list of the existing synoptic display 3 Click on the OK button The format appears in the Drawing Area FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 Getting Started 2 47 Viewing and modifying the Format Description panel To view the Format Description panel 1 Select the Attributes option from the File menu on the Format Editor Control panel The Format Description panel appears 2 Make any desired changes on the Format Description panel see Chapter 4 for more details 3 Click the mouse SELECT button on the OK button Inserting UNIX files into the MDB To insert a format created with the standard SAMMI into an MDB End Item of type FWDU_SYNOPTIC_DISPLAY use the Insert File in the File menu The following window appears Insert_popup CS SSS
423. with three dimensional bars FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 7 210 Display Types e Create labels variables for each barchart that may consist of variable names that display below each bar on a vertical chart or to the left of each bar on a horizontal chart variable values that display above each bar on a vertical chart or to the right on a horizontal chart e Choose the method and style with which the bars fill e Create and display threshold information e Choose a threshold reference method e Give the bars a three dimensional appearance e Create and choose to display markers indicating the highest and lowest values that the data has achieved during a Sammi session e Create and display runtime annotations API information The FWDU_SERVER sends only the current value for each bar The limits and measurement end item type are passed to the FWDU_SERVER at preview and the FWDU_SERVER sends data between max and min FWDU UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual ROVSING A S 15 August 1999 Display Types CHAPTER 7 211 Display type specifications Enter the following specifications as illustrated on the panel below To enter information for the individual bars click on the Variable Definitions button Information on completing the Barchart Variables Display panel follows this section fb barchart FE Bar Display
424. y values flow and temperature and a single x value pressure The two resulting curves show variations in flow and temperature as pressure increases There might be two scales for the y axis one for each curve color coding helps the Sammi user see which scale belongs to which curve There are a variety of specifications you can enter for a plot or trend graph detailed in the following sections General On a general level you can specify the graph title and color as well as the background color and grid For the grid you can choose the color the type dots or lines and the spacing grid lines at major or minor tick marks You can use any printable character as the line marker To specify such a character enter the character into the Line Marker field on the relevant display panel surrounded by single quotes in line marker style definition e g S WARNING Plots and Trends DO NOT update when the OPTIONS pop up is displayed for zooming functions etc incoming data points are lost during this time X amp Y Axis For the x axis you can specify the title and title color You can also specify the minimum maximum values and color to be used for the scale Sammi draws the tick marks and adds the appropriate scale labels If you do not select specific minimum maximum values Sammi resets the scale to the data range each time a set of points is received You can use sub second trend ranges Sammi uses double precision to
425. your illustrations These are explained on the following pages Using scanned images Many drawing steps can be omitted by scanning drawings directly into the Format Editor using the background image function A background image becomes an immobile part of the drawing that you can embellish with manually drawn static objects For more information on importing background images see Using background images in Chapter 4 of this manual Converting static objects to dynamic objects Any static object drawn with the Format Editor tools can be converted to a dynamic object using the Dynamic Object display type explained in Chapter 7 Dynamic objects can be designed to change color blink rotate and change line style or fill style in response to incoming data For example you might have a group of objects designed to look like a storage tank that turns red and starts blinking when incoming data shows that the storage tank it represents is empty Using composites During the design and development of formats you might want to use certain groups of static objects and dynamic fields repeatedly With the Composite function of the Format Editor you can readily group and save these groups When you save a composite it is stored in the same directory as formats usually SSAMMI data or demo or user directory but with the prt extension which distinguishes it from a format NOTE Your pathname may be different check with your system administrator
426. ype e Time used for the Custom Time display type e Universal used to connect dynamic fields to API created data sources This chapter details each data access type it also explains how to set up the Data Access Description panel for dynamic fields that use the Universal data access type Another function described in this chapter runtime keys allows a format designer to supply a generic variable for which a user can substitute a specific variable during runtime In general you can use the local and universal data access types with any dynamic field However only those dynamic fields with a data access type of universal or Curve Set for Curve Set display types only can communicate with an API created application Some dynamic fields impose restrictions on the data access type that you can use for them If you specify an invalid data type the Format Editor displays a warning message For example Static Select Lists and Static Menus can expect a local data type while Dynamic Menus expect a universal data type Refer to the following sections for more information on each data type NOTE The information in this chapter pertains only to the five data access types shown above Sammi data access types designed for specific client applications are not described in this manual FWDU ROVSING A S UM 114 002 ROV Issue 2 2 User Manual 15 August 1999 CHAPTER 8 356 Data Access Types Curve Set This data type is a specializ
427. ze font usage etc You can then use this dynamic field in other formats repeatedly DFD Library files are stored on the disk and retrieved into any format currently being edited with the read dfd lib command The Display Palette on the Dynamic Fields menu uses libraries in exactly this way Or you may view and select from a list of libraries with the Read DFD Lib panel available by selecting the Read DFD Lib option from the Dynamic Fields menu of the Format Editor Control panel For example applications built by your organization might require the use of three different standard meters any or all of which could appear on a format You can create each of these meters separately on an empty new format and save it with the save dfd lib command under a distinct name meterl meter2 and so on Now instead of creating the DFD each time you want to use it you can simply read it into a format with the read dfd lib command The following sections describe how to work with DFD Libraries Creating DFD libraries To create a DFD Library file and save it to disk 1 Edit an existing dynamic field or add a new dynamic field within the format as described in the earlier sections of this chapter 2 Modify the attributes of the dynamic field to your desired specifications Make sure that all panels are saved by pressing the RETURN key in an input field or by clicking on the Save DFD button where available 3 Once you have modified

FWDU User Manual (Issue 2.2, 15.08.1999)

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents